JP2017063959A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably enhancing a player's attention level to games.SOLUTION: When a game ball enters an upper operation port 33 or a lower operation port 34, reservation information is stored in a main control device. In the main control device, on the basis of the reservation information, a winning/losing lottery is performed as to whether or not to be shifted to an opening/closing performance mode. If the lottery is won, a shift is made to the opening/closing performance mode. In a symbol display device, a presentation for game rounds is performed so as to correspond to the winning/losing lottery. When the presentation for the game rounds is to be performed, a setting of a variable display time is performed. Further, in this Pachinko machine, regarding the reservation information stored as the above, a setting of the variable display time for game rounds may be performed by a determination based on the reservation information before the reservation information becomes an object of the winning/losing lottery.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into a starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variation display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed at the time of the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect for one game time that is displayed is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, in gaming machines, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to games, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

The invention described in claim 1
Information acquisition means for acquiring information for determination based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Information storage means for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Determination means for determining whether or not to give a first privilege to a player for the determination information stored in the information storage means;
Based on the determination by the determination means, the first effect is started by a predetermined notification means, and the first effect is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. A first setting means capable of setting a period during which the first effect is performed;
First effect executing means for performing the first effect over a period set by the first setting means;
First privilege granting means for granting the first privilege based on determination by the determination means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A destination determination unit that performs determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit before the predetermined determination information is determined by the determination unit;
A second setting unit capable of setting a period of the first effect based on a result of the determination by the destination determination unit;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, the degree of attention to a game can be suitably increased.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation | variation display time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a fluctuation | variation display time table. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process after opening / closing execution mode completion | finish. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of an effect control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the reservation notice in MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending command. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding display control command corresponding | compatible process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a hold notice and a special hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relevance of an effect pattern and the image for a hold display. It is a flowchart which shows a special reservation advance notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the holding | maintenance information grasping | ascertainment process. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process at the time of time specification possible. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables for special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time of a normal pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables for special reservation notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables for special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time of a time specific pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time of a premier pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of time specification impossible. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process at the time of removal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables for special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the special reservation notice control process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer management process. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process at the time of a shift. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a pending | holding display. It is a flowchart which shows the change display control process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special reservation notices. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process at the time of shift in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables for special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation | variation display time in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a fluctuation | variation display time table. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding control command response process. It is a flowchart which shows a special reservation advance notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation | variation display time table in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command response process for pending | holding control in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process at the time of a shift. It is a flowchart which shows the timer management process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a subtraction value adjustment process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary for special reservation notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary for special reservation notice in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation corresponding | compatible process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary for special reservation notice in the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation corresponding | compatible subtraction process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for the success or failure lottery etc. in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification for special reservation notices. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of the special reservation notice in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of a special reservation notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of a special reservation notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of a special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding control command response process. It is a flowchart which shows a special reservation advance notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various tables regarding a special reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special reservation notices at the time of a stop. It is a flowchart which shows a privilege provision process. It is a flowchart which shows the special reservation notice process at the time of a shift. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of the special reservation notice in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding control command response process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of the special reservation notice in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding control command response process. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main side special reservation notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a setting time table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a setting time table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending command. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding control command response process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the special reservation notice determined by the main side. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation | variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation | variation display time at the time of a hold notice execution. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the control apparatus which determined execution of the special reservation notice, and the determination process of a fluctuation | variation display time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the storage area for special reservations in the modification of 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating special game times in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a setting time table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation | variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation | variation display time at the time of special game round execution. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start. In the modification of 12th Embodiment, (a) is a flowchart which shows a hold display setting process, (b)-(e) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image selection table for a hold. (A)-(b) in the modification of 12th Embodiment is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image selection table for hold | maintenance, (c) is the description for demonstrating the special reservation notice table at the time of disconnection. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of an effect pattern regarding special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of an effect pattern regarding special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of an effect pattern regarding special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of an effect pattern regarding special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of an effect pattern regarding special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of an effect pattern regarding special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of an effect pattern regarding special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the chance production | presentation in a game round and a special game round. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the image for holding | maintenance, and a chance effect. (A) is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process for a fluctuation | variation start, (b), (c) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference in the character generation | occurrence | production by the presence or absence of holding information. In 13th Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation in case hold information of a priority side is acquired before special game times. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the confirmation process for a pending | holding advance notice. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the setting process of a fluctuation | variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process for a fluctuation | variation start. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of an effect pattern regarding special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of an effect pattern regarding special game times.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward by using one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated rearward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  Note that the gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, the front door frame 14 has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame. Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like. ing.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 is on the upper side. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 34, and the electric operating member 34a is in the open state (supported state or guide state). It is possible to win 34.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display unit 43, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning at the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display unit 43 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 43. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 43 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 44, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning to the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols that are a kind of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened as the opening / closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is on an active line set in advance. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

  By the way, based on the winning at any one of the operation ports 33, 34, the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 start the variable display, until the predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time.

  In the upper left part on the front side of the center frame 42, a main hold light emitting unit 45 that emits and displays the number of holds is provided corresponding to the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41. The main reserved light emitting unit 45 is composed of LEDs. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed when the main holding light emitting unit 45 is turned on.

  In the upper right part of the center frame 42, there is provided an accessory holding light emitting unit 46 that displays the number of holdings in a light emitting manner corresponding to the accessory display unit 44. The accessory light-holding light emitting unit 46 is composed of LEDs. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the on-hold holding light emitting unit 46.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is configured by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and is mounted below the game board 24 in the inner frame. A game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by operating a launch handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various light emitting portions are provided. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window 61 as a part of the various light emitting units. These various light emitting units are composed of LEDs. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72.

  An operation portion 75 that can be operated by the player is provided above the firing handle 54 in the front door frame 14. The operation unit 75 is connected to an effect control device described later, and a predetermined effect is executed by operating the operation unit 75.

  A main control device, an effect control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, a power source and a firing control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 203 and the RAM 204 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 202, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power interruption monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211 and the like provided in the main control device 81 are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power interruption monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power interruption monitoring board 205. Further, as a part of the various detection sensors 211, for a winning winning entry portion (a payout corresponding entry portion) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating opening 33, a lower operating opening 34, a through gate 35, and the like A plurality of detection sensors provided in a one-to-one correspondence are connected to each other, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 and also performs a support generating lottery based on a winning to the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power interruption monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an effect control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 33 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 34. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and a change end command are output to the effect control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the open / close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display. The unit 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  The power interruption monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and launch control device 98, and monitors the voltage of 24 VDC which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power supply and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism based on the launch permission signal output from the main control board 201, and the game ball launch mechanism has predetermined launch conditions. Driven when.

  The effect control device 82 is based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and each of the on-hold light emitting units 45 and 46 provided on the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and speaker unit provided on the front door frame 14. 64 is driven and controlled. In addition, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212. In the display control device 212, display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the command input from the effect control device 82.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, a plurality of variable display areas are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of variable display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order.

  Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the display screen G is designed to stop and display three symbols for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a probable variation jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a probable big hit result occurs, the same specific symbol combination Is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. In addition, the type of the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the symbol with the numeral as described above. For example, the numeral itself may be variably displayed. May be displayed in a variable manner.

  On the lower part of the display screen G, a hold display area Ga is set. In the hold display area Ga, unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum hold number when a game ball is won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction. Is provided. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is four, and in correspondence with this, the reserved display area Ga includes the first unit reserved display area Ga1. A second unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is 1, the predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the game ball In the case where the number of holds when winning the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is four, predetermined holding images are displayed in all of the first unit holding display area Ga1 to the fourth unit holding display area Ga4. Is done.

  Further, at the bottom of the display screen G, an execution display area Gb is set in parallel with the hold display area Ga. In the execution display area Gb, the predetermined hold image corresponding to the currently executed game time is displayed.

<About various counters and reserved ball storage area>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and fluctuations in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 A variation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer 231, information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS is awarded to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The stored information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 as the acquired information storage means.

  The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is stored as holding information in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4. The

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 are stored on hold. The reserved ball storage area 232 includes a reserved number storage area NA. The reserved number storage area NA specifies the number in which the winning history for the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is stored. Information for storing is stored.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 43, and at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of whether or not is made is performed.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 299, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to zero. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. As a result, the probability that the high probability mode is a big win is higher than that of the low probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. As the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result and a probable variation jackpot result are set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, the probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  In the distribution table, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but this numerical distribution is arbitrary. In addition, the distribution destination of the jackpot result is not limited to the above two types. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, a plurality of modes are set so that the expected value of the game ball is high and the opening / closing execution is performed. It is good also as a structure which increases the type of jackpot result rather than said two types by providing a difference in the mode transfer destination mode.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. For example, the reach table is set so that “200 to 239” is numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence win.

  Incidentally, in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is a game time in which the symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures) is provided, and the variable winning device 32 is in the opening / closing execution mode. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display becomes the special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started and the stop display result is derived and displayed. The display state for causing the player to think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which possible reach symbol combinations are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the symbol variation display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of reach symbols, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents in FIG. 4 will be specifically described. First, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or difficult to recognize which symbol is displayed. Thereafter, the variation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize or easily recognize the symbol displayed. Then, the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, and the fluctuation display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Thereafter, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. In this case, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. When the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol variation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the variation display time on the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 41. Note that, when the variation display time is determined using the variation type counter CS, the variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203 is referred to.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4.

<About various processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main control board 201>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the game of each game progresses in the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 will be described.

  In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on, and transmits an interruption signal from the interruption monitoring board 205 to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). An NMI interrupt process activated by an input is executed, but the description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, the state of the sensor corresponding to the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the sensor is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. .

  After executing the reading process in step S101, the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning through the through gate 35 is executed. In the through-winning process, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored on the condition that the stored number of stored features is less than 4 stored in the reserved role area. Store in the area. In addition, the effect control device 82 executes processing for lighting the accessory holding light-emitting unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the accessory holding storage number.

  Thereafter, in step S105, after the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 is executed, the timer interruption process is terminated.

<Winning process for working port>
The winning process for the operation opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined whether or not the upper working port winning flag is stored in the upper working port winning flag storage area in the various flag storing area 234 of the RAM 204. The upper working opening winning flag is stored in the reading process (step S101) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 6) when a game ball is won into the upper working opening 33. If the upper operation opening winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S207 without executing the processes of steps S202 to S206. If the upper working opening winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S202.

  In step S202, the upper operation opening winning flag is deleted. In the subsequent step S203, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 232 is read, and the reserved storage number N stored in the reserved area RE is the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). ) Is determined. If the reserved storage number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the process directly proceeds to step S207. If the reserved storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S204, and the reserved storage number N is incremented by one.

  In the following step S205, the values (each numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the previous step S103 are used as the free holding area of the holding area RE. Stored in the first reserved area among RE1 to RE4, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the reserved storage number N added by 1 in step S204.

  In the following step S206, the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are control devices on the sub-side (sub-side), recognize that the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 has occurred, and the effect control device. In 82, a confirmation process for the hold notice, which is a process for executing the hold notice, is executed. Such processing will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S201, a negative determination is made in step S203, or after the processing in step S206 is executed, the process proceeds to step S207 in the lower operation port winning flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. It is determined whether or not an operation opening winning flag is stored. The lower working opening winning flag is stored in the reading process (step S101) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 6) when a game ball is won into the lower working opening 34. If the lower operation opening winning flag is not stored, the main winning process is terminated as it is. If the lower working opening winning flag is stored, the processing of steps S203 to S206 is executed after the lower working opening winning flag is deleted in step S208. In this case, by making a negative determination in the process of step S207 after the processes of step S203 to step S206, the main winning process is terminated.

  In a configuration in which an upper operating port 33 and a lower operating port 34 are provided as operating ports in the game area, and winning to both the operating ports 33 and 34 can occur simultaneously, the upper operating port can be achieved by one processing of timer interrupt processing. It is determined whether or not a winning to 33 has occurred and whether or not a winning to the lower operating port 34 has occurred, and when winning to both operating ports 33 and 34 has occurred simultaneously, The information acquisition processing in steps S203 to S205 and the information transmission processing to the sub-side control device based on the winning in step S206 are executed for the winning. As a result, even when winnings to both the operating ports 33 and 34 occur at the same time, acquisition of holding information based on winning to the upper operating port 33 and acquisition of holding information based on winning to the lower operating port 34 are obtained. It is possible to accurately perform the information transmission process to the sub-side control device at an early timing.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S301 to S306 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S308 and S309 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, in the case where production commands such as various hold commands, variation commands, type commands, variation end commands, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the production control device 82.

  Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S303, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. Thereafter, in step S304, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed. The game times control process will be described later in detail.

  Thereafter, in step S305, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By this gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, or the like.

  In subsequent step S306, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened, display control of the combination display 44, and the like are performed. In this case, as already described, a lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and drive control of the electric accessory 34a is performed based on the lottery result.

  In the subsequent step S307, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S308 and S309). That is, in step S308, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S309, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game times control process shown in FIG. 9, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether an opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored in an opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process, and is similarly deleted when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the opening / closing execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S402, that is, the game turn start process in steps S402 to S405 and the game turn progress process in steps S406 to S409. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. To do. The variable display flag is stored when the main display unit 43 starts the variable display, and is deleted when the variable display ends.

  If the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S403 to S405. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the number N of reserved memories is “0”. The case where the number N of reserved storage is “0” means that no holding information is stored in the holding ball storage area 232. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  If the number N of stored memory is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the stored ball storage area 232 for variable display is executed in step S404, and the main data is further stored in step S405. A variation start process for starting variation display on the display unit 43 and variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. When the variation start process is executed, the game times control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process in step S404 and the change start process in step S405 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S501, the reserved storage number N is decremented by one. In subsequent step S502, the data stored in first holding area RE1 of holding area RE is moved to execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S503, a process of shifting the data (that is, the holding information) stored in each holding area RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.

  In the subsequent step S504, a shift command is set, which is information for causing the effect control device 82 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S504 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 receives the shift command, and executes a process for changing the display on the main hold light emitting unit 45 in accordance with the decrease in the hold number. In addition, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute a process for changing the display in the hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the hold number.

  Next, the variation start process of step S405 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the change start process, first, in step S601, a success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current change start process corresponds to the big win is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 221, the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, It is determined whether or not the value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the high probability jackpot value information. In the case of the low probability mode, the value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 221. Is matched with the jackpot numerical information for low probability.

  After performing the success / failure determination process in step S601, it is determined in step S602 whether or not a big hit is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. If jackpot information is stored, type determination processing is executed in step S603.

  In the type determination process, the information acquired from the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information updated by the big hit type counter C2 is grasped. Also, information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot information is acquired from the distribution table in the ROM 203. Then, both pieces of information are compared, and it is specified whether or not the information corresponds to probability variation jackpot information.

  In a succeeding step S604, it is determined whether or not the type of winning the big hit is a probable big hit result based on the information specified in the type determining process in the step S603. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S605, and if it is not a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S606. If it is determined in step S602 that it is not a big win, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S607.

  In each stop result setting process of step S605 to step S607, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is specified from information stored in advance in the ROM 203, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. Remember. Further, in step S605 and step S606, information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the determination result of whether or not this game is successful is a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 ( The information “1” is stored in the corresponding area). Specifically, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in step S605, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S606.

  After executing any one of steps S605 to S607, in step S608, a variable display time setting process is executed.

  Here, the setting process of the variable display time will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12, in the process for setting the variable display time, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not a big win is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. If the jackpot is won, in a subsequent step S702, the variable display time table for jackpot time is acquired from the variable display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203. If it is not a big win and the result is a losing result, a fluctuation display time table at the time of losing is acquired from the fluctuation display time table storage area 222 in step S703.

  In each variation display time table, the variation display time is determined by the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the number N of stored storage at the start of variation. That is, as shown in FIG. 13, the presence or absence of reach is determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern is determined by the value of the variation type counter CS. In this embodiment, the fluctuation display time is determined by the hold number non-corresponding pattern in which the variable display time is determined regardless of the hold memory number N at the start of change, and the hold memory number N at the start of change. The number-of-holds correspondence pattern is defined.

  More specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 0 to 4 in the variable display time table at the time of big hit, it is set to the game number in which no reach occurs. Among them, the case where the value of the variation type counter CS is 0 to 24 is set as the variation pattern of the reach non-occurrence A, and this is the variation pattern of the holding number non-corresponding pattern. In this case, the variable display time is set to 10 sec regardless of the value of the number N of reserved storage at the start of the fluctuation. In addition, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 25 to 49 among the non-reach occurrences, the fluctuation pattern of the reach non-occurrence B is set, and this is the fluctuation pattern of the holding number correspondence pattern. In this case, the variable display time is set to 10 sec when the reserved memory number N at the start of the fluctuation is 0 to 1, and the variable display time is set to 5 sec when the reserved memory number N is 2 to 3.

  When the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 5 to 99 in the variation display time table at the time of big hit, it is set to the game number of occurrence of reach. Of these, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 5 to 19, it is set to a game time where normal reach occurs, and when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 20 to 99, it is set to game times where super reach occurs. Is done.

  Here, the super reach is a reach display in which the expectation of winning the big hit is higher than that of the normal reach. Furthermore, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C are set in the super reach. Super Reach A to C are set such that Super Reach C is set to have the highest expectation level for jackpot winning and C, B, and A are set to have a higher expectation level for winning the jackpot. These super-reach A to C are also different in the contents of the production, super-reach A and B are set to play an animated movie, and super-reach C is set to play a live-action movie. ing. Note that different animation movies are set for Super Reach A and B. The super reach A to C have different variable display times, the super reach C is set to have the longest variable display time, and the variable display times are set to be longer in the order of C, B, and A. More specifically, the super reach A is set to 45 sec, the super reach B is set to 60 sec, and the super reach C is set to 90 sec. The game times in which these super reaches A to C are generated are fluctuation patterns of the hold number non-corresponding pattern in which the game times are performed in the set variable display time regardless of the value of the hold memory number N at the start of the change. .

  In game games in which normal reach occurs at the time of a big hit, the case where the variation type counter CS is 0 to 24 is set as the variation pattern of the normal reach A, and this is the variation pattern of the non-holding number correspondence pattern. In this case, the variable display time is set to 20 sec regardless of the value of the number N of stored storage at the start of the fluctuation. Further, among the game times in which normal reach occurs, the case where the value of the variation type counter CS is 25 to 49 is set as the variation pattern of the normal reach B, and this is the variation pattern of the holding number correspondence pattern. In this case, the variable display time is set to 20 sec when the reserved memory number N at the start of change is 0 to 1, and the variable display time is set to 15 sec when the hold memory number N is 2 to 3. Normal reach A and normal reach B have the same effect pattern after the occurrence of reach, but the contents until the occurrence of reach, that is, the contents of the notice effect, etc. differ until the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 stop. ing. That is, the length of the fluctuation display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is based on the length of time until the reach occurs, and the length of time from the start to the end of the reach is the same for any normal reach A and B. Is set to

  On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table at the time of detachment, all of reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super reach C are set. The probability of occurrence is different. That is, at the time of detachment, the reach random number counter C3 is set to non-reach when 0 to 59, the reach is set to 60 to 99, and the probability of reach is set lower than the jackpot. Yes. When the reach is not generated, the value of the variation type counter CS is set to 0 to 24 as reach non-occurrence A, and the case of 25 to 49 is set as reach non-occurrence B.

  Among reach occurrences at the time of detachment, when reach random number counter C3 is 60 to 89, normal reach is set, and when it is 90 to 99, super reach is set, and the occurrence rate of super reach among reach occurrences is greater than that of jackpot Is set too low. In normal reach, when the variation type counter CS is 0 to 24, normal reach A is set, and 25 to 49 is set as normal reach B. In the super reach, the value of the variation type counter CS is set as super reach A when the value is 0-15, the case of 16-33 is set as super reach B, and the case of 34-49 is set as super reach C. Has been.

  In this specification, the variable display time will be described in relation to the display on the symbol display device 41. The variable display time (operation period) is the variable display after the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is started. In addition to the time until the game ends, a so-called fixed time for displaying the stop result (game result) after the variable display ends is included.

  Returning to the description of the variable display time setting process (FIG. 12), after acquiring any variable display time table in step S702 or step S703, in step S704, the acquired variable display time table and each parameter are obtained. The variable display time (operation period) corresponding to (reach random number counter C3, variable type counter CS, pending storage number N) is set in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the variable display time setting process is terminated.

  As described above, the variation display time of each game time is determined using the game result, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS as parameters. As described above, reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C are set as the variation patterns to be determined. Further, a hold number correspondence pattern in which the reserved memory number N is added as a parameter and a hold number non-corresponding pattern in which the hold memory number N is not added as a parameter are set, and the fluctuation pattern of the above reach non-occurrence B and normal reach B Is a holding number correspondence pattern, and the other variation patterns are holding number non-correspondence patterns.

  The method for setting the variable display time for each game time is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration in which reach non-occurrence is not included in the case of a big hit, that is, a configuration in which a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 at the time of a big hit. In addition, the generation of reach and its type may be determined using not only the reach random number counter C3 but also other counters. As another counter, for example, a stop pattern counter that determines a stop pattern of a predetermined line (for example, the middle line L2) if it is out of place is considered, and if it is a big hit, a pattern that stops and displays the same symbol combination is determined. A jackpot symbol counter or the like is possible. In this case, for example, the reach random number counter C3 may determine whether or not reach has occurred, and the other counter may determine the type.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which a variable display time differs according to the height of a support mode or the height of a lottery mode. For example, in the high frequency support mode, a configuration in which a short variation display time can be easily selected even when the game result is the same as in the low frequency support mode, or a configuration in which a long variation display time is easily selected. Also good. In the high frequency support mode, the hold information is acquired at a relatively high frequency, so that a smooth game can be realized by adopting a configuration in which a short variable display time is easily selected. In this case, it is preferable to add a process for determining the level of the support mode in the setting process of the variable display time, and obtain a variable display time table corresponding to the support mode.

  Returning to the description of the change start process (FIG. 11), after the change display time setting process is executed in step S608, a change command and a type command are set in step S609. The change command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, information on probability variation jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, information on miss results, and the like.

  The change command and type command set in step S609 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect in the game times based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include the variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to each game time is performed. Thereafter, in step S610, the variation display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 43, and then the variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 9), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S406 to S409 is executed. In the game times progression process, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the current game times change display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (step S608). The value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S407. In the process for variable display, the display mode in the result display section related to the current game time is changed. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S408. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any one of the above steps S605 to S607 is specified, and the main display unit 43 displays the pattern corresponding to the information on the main display unit 43. The display of the unit 43 is controlled.

  In the subsequent step S409, a change end command is set. The variation end command set here is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 ends the effect in the game times based on the received variation end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the change end command, thereby confirming and displaying the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round (final). Stop). After execution of step S409, the game times control process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the gaming state transition process executed in step S305 of the normal process will be described.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, start processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S804. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without opening the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is set for opening in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) is executed.

  In the subsequent step S805, a round display start process for informing the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the round display start process, first, address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output.

  In the subsequent step S806, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  In the subsequent step S807, after executing the external signal setting process, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot is generated in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what happened.

  On the other hand, if it is in the open / close execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the flow proceeds to step S808. In step S808, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. When the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S809. In the big winning opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the big winning opening 32a is controlled according to the unit opening time of each round and the waiting time between rounds, and the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 32a reaches the upper limit winning number in each round. If the unit opening time has not elapsed, the variable winning drive section 32c is driven and controlled so that the large winning opening 32a is closed.

  After the big prize opening / closing process is executed in step S809, it is determined in step S810 whether the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, and whether the waiting time for ending has passed in step S811 Determine whether or not. If the value of the round counter area RC is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S812.

  Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, a flag erasing process for erasing information for specifying the gaming state is executed in step S902. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and when they are not already stored, the states are maintained. In subsequent step S903, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S904, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state where the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, the gaming state is also referred to as a special advantageous state). After executing the processing of step S904, the migration processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S901 that the probability variation jackpot flag is not stored, the flag erasure process is executed in step S905. Thereafter, in step S906, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S907, “100” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is ended when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, a transition is made to a normal game state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. After executing the processing of step S907, the migration processing is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 14), after the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S812 is completed, a round display termination process is executed in step S813. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off. After that, in step S814, after executing the opening / closing execution mode termination processing, the gaming state transition processing is terminated. In the end processing of the opening / closing execution mode, the probability variation jackpot flag and the normal jackpot flag are deleted.

<About reservation notice>
Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the reservation notice corresponding to the content of the holding information stored in the holding ball storage area 232 has a predetermined probability at a timing before the game times related to the holding information are started. It is configured to be done in. Such a hold notice is performed by executing predetermined control in the effect control device 82 based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 81. The electrical configuration and processing configuration related to the reservation notice will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 16, an MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided in the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command to be described later is received. In addition, a game time control command (game time control information) such as a change start command, a type command, and a change end command is received. Also, an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) such as an opening command and an ending command is received.

  As described above, the holding light emitting units 45 and 46 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. Yes.

  The MPU 252 receives a hold display control command (hold display control information) for performing hold display control, a game turn control command (game time control information) for performing symbol display, from the effect control device 82. A command for opening / closing execution mode (information for opening / closing execution mode) for displaying a moving image in the opening / closing execution mode is received. Then, the received commands are analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 255).

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 254.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and also reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Regarding processing related to pending notice>
Next, processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described. As the process related to the hold notice on the main control device 81 side, the confirmation process (step S206) for the hold notice in the winning process for the operation opening (FIG. 7) is set. This process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6), and is executed at a timing when a winning is made to the operation ports 33 and 34.

  Hereinafter, the confirmation process for holding notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, the holding information stored in the holding area RE, which is the holding information acquired in step S205 based on the current winning of the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, is stored in the big hit random number counter C1. Value (information for jackpot determination), value of jackpot type counter C2 (information for jackpot type determination), value of reach random number counter C3 (information for determination of occurrence of reach), value of variation type counter CS (variation type) Information).

  In a succeeding step S1002, it is determined whether or not a high probability flag for holding is stored in the RAM 204.

  Here, the high probability flag for holding will be described. While the hold information stored in the hold area RE is sequentially digested, the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed at a timing different from the digest timing of the hold information. In this case, a situation may occur in which the lottery mode differs between the timing when the predetermined hold information is subjected to the confirmation process for the hold notice and the timing when the hold information is consumed. For example, even if the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the timing when the predetermined hold information is subject to the confirmation process for the hold notice, the probability change is a big hit between that timing and the timing when the predetermined hold information is consumed. When the corresponding hold information is digested, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode. The high probability flag for holding is a flag for grasping the change in the lottery mode by the MPU 202 and reflecting the content in the determination of success / failure in the confirmation processing for holding notice.

  By providing the high probability flag for holding, even when the lottery mode changes with respect to the holding information to be digested later by the holding information stored in the holding area RE, the confirmation process for holding notice in the correct lottery mode is performed. This makes it possible to accurately determine the validity determination.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, a success / failure determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed in step S1003. If a negative determination is made in step S1002, a success / failure determination process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed in step S1004.

  After step S1003 or step S1004 is executed, a process of temporarily storing the determination result information on the determination of success / failure in step S1003 or step S1004 in the determination result storage area provided in the RAM 204 is executed in step S1005. Thereby, by grasping the determination result information stored in the determination result storage area, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the current determination.

  In a succeeding step S1006, it is determined whether or not the current hold information corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the determination result information is jackpot information and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1006, the flag is set by storing “1” in the high probability flag for holding in step S1007.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1006, it is determined in step S1008 whether the current hold information corresponds to a normal jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the determination result information is jackpot information and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value corresponding to the normal jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, the high probability flag for holding is cleared to “0” in step S1009.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1008 after executing one of steps S1007 and S1009, a hold command setting process is executed in step S1010, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is ended.

  The hold command setting process executed in step S1010 is a process for causing the effect control device 82 to grasp game result information and variable display time information as the contents of the hold information.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, first, in step S1101, a process for grasping information regarding the game result, that is, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 among the hold information acquired this time. Run. In the subsequent step S1102, information regarding the variable display time, that is, the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variable type counter CS among the hold information acquired this time is executed. In step S1103, a process for setting the hold command including the information grasped in steps S1101 and S1102 as an output target to the effect control device 82 is executed, and the hold command setting process is ended. This hold command is output to the effect control device 82 in step S301 of the normal process (FIG. 8). In addition, instead of the configuration in which values such as the counters C1, C2, C3, CS, etc. are set as information relating to the game result and information relating to the variable display time, information relating to the game result and the variable display time itself is set in the hold command. It is good also as a structure. By doing so, it is possible to suppress an illegal act in which the values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and CS are read from commands input and output between the main control device 81 and the effect control device 82. The same applies to other commands (variation command, type command, variation end command, etc.) input / output between the main control device 81 on the main side and the production control device 82 on the sub side. It is preferable that information set from the counter value, not the value itself, be set in these commands. Even if these commands are configured to output the value of the random number counter on the main side involved in the player's profit to the sub side, there is a possibility that the random number update timing is grasped and fraudulent acts may be performed. is there.

  Next, processing related to the hold notice on the side of the effect control device 82 will be described. The processing on the side of the effect control device 82 is roughly classified into a hold control command response process and a special hold notice control process. The hold control command handling process is a process for handling a hold control command (hold command or shift command) from the main control device 81, and the special hold notice control process is a special hold set in the hold notice. This is a process for controlling the advance notice. Each of these processes is set to be activated every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec). In the effect control device 82, in addition to these processes, a variable display control process for controlling the effect for game times is set. This variable display control process is also set to be started at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec).

  First, the hold control command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1201, it is determined whether a hold command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 1201, 1 is added to the secondary-side reserved storage number SN stored in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 in step S 1202. In a succeeding step S1203, a hold display setting process is executed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as a pre-reading effect that is a kind of the reservation notice, an effect is set in which the holding image P displayed in the holding display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 is made to correspond to the holding information. A plurality of types of holding images P are set corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot of the holding information, and the holding image P corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot of the holding information is displayed as a prefetch effect.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20A, as the holding image P, the first holding image P1 (A), the second holding image P2 (B), the third holding image P3 (C), A fourth hold image P4 (D) and a fifth hold image P5 (E) are set. These hold images P1 to P5 are set to have different colors and shapes, for example, so that they can be distinguished from each other. ing. In the present embodiment, for example, the first hold image P1 is rainbow, the second hold image P2 is gold, the third hold image P3 is red, the fourth hold image P4 is yellow, and the fifth hold image P5. Is displayed in blue. In the figure, the hatch settings are displayed differently.

  In the hold display setting process in step S1203, a hold image P corresponding to the received hold command is set from the hold images P1 to P5. In this case, the hold display pattern table stored in the ROM 243 is acquired, and the corresponding hold images P1 to P5 are set from the information included in the hold command. As the hold display pattern table, as shown in FIG. 21, a hold display pattern table at the time of jackpot and a hold display pattern table at the time of release are set. Then, based on the game result information (the jackpot random number counter C1) in the information included in the hold command, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponding to the hold command is a jackpot result. In some cases, the hold display pattern table at the time of jackpot is acquired, and in other cases (in the case of a loss result), the hold display pattern table at the time of release is acquired.

  In the hold display pattern table at the time of jackpot, the hold images P1 are respectively set according to various fluctuation patterns (reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super reach C). -P5 are set to have different selection rates. The probability that the first hold image P1 is most selected is set to be low, and the probability that the first hold image P1 is selected in the order of P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 is set to be low. In addition, when super reach A to C is compared with normal reach A and B, super reach A to C is more likely to select a holding image with a smaller number, and normal reach A and B and reach non-occurrence A and B are In comparison, the normal reach A and B are set so that the holding image having the smaller number is more easily selected.

  In the super reach A to C, when the easiness of selection of the holding image having the smaller number is compared, the super reach C is most easily selected, and is set to be easily selected in the order of C, B, and A. . In the normal reach A and B, the normal reach A is selected more easily than the normal reach B, and in the non-reach A and B, the non-reach A is set more easily than the non-reach B. In the non-reach B, the first hold image P1 is set not to be selected.

  In the hold display pattern table at the time of losing, the same fluctuation pattern (reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super Even in the case of reach C), the setting is made so that it is difficult to select the holding image with the smaller number. For example, the first hold image P1 to the third hold image P3 are not selected in the non-reach occurrences A and B at the time of release, and the fifth hold image P4 and the fifth hold image P5 are used for the fifth hold. The image P5 is easier to select than the fourth holding image P4. Further, the first hold image P1 and the second hold image P2 are not selected in the normal reach A and B at the time of detachment, and the fifth hold image P5 is selected in the third hold image P3 to the fifth hold image P5. It is easy to select, and it is easy to select in order of P5, P4, P3. Further, in any variation pattern, the first hold image P1 is set so as not to be selected at the time of deviation.

  In other words, in the hold display pattern table at the time of jackpot and the hold display pattern table at the time of release, the hold image having a smaller number is more easily selected as the degree of expectation of the jackpot is higher, and the number is increased as the variable display time is longer. A small hold image is set to be easily selected. Therefore, by displaying the holding image with the smaller number, the player expects a big hit result in the game times corresponding to the holding image, and about the game times for which the determination of success / failure is held It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention before the game times are executed.

  On the other hand, it is possible to predict that the holding information on which the holding image having the larger number is displayed is not a jackpot result but a losing result. Therefore, the game times related to such hold information can be game times waiting for digestion for the player. In particular, when an effect pattern with a long variation display time is selected in such a game round, the effect is performed over a long period of time despite the player predicting that the result is a losing result. May feel redundant. Furthermore, for a case in which a holding image with a smaller number is displayed with respect to the holding information that is the target of the success / failure determination after the holding information corresponding to the holding image on the side with a larger number, this number is displayed. While the degree of attention to the game times related to the hold information on the smaller side increases, the effect of making the game times related to the hold information on the larger number side feel redundant is considered to increase. On the other hand, if an effect pattern with a short variation display time is selected in the game times that are predicted to be a jackpot result, the result is different even though it is predicted to be a jackpot result. Can be the result of suspicious. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, a special hold notice is set as a kind of hold notice in order to eliminate the above-mentioned inconvenience due to the length of the variable display time.

  That is, after executing the hold display setting process in step S1203 in the hold control command response process (FIG. 19), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the pending notice counter YK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is less than “3”. The hold notice counter YK is a counter for adjusting the number of executions of the special hold notice.

  Here, the special reservation notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In a special hold notice, which is a kind of hold notice, a predetermined hold image is set to change to another hold image based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. More specifically, the predetermined holding image changes to a holding image having a smaller number than the predetermined holding image based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Specifically, the condition for changing the hold image is a condition related to the passage of time from the start to the end of the special hold notice. The special hold notice starts from the start of display of the hold image, that is, from the time when the hold information is acquired. In the game time of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice, the lower symbol row Z3 is displayed from the high-speed change display. It is set to end at the timing of switching to the low speed fluctuation display. Then, at the start of this special hold notice, a predetermined set time is displayed, and this predetermined set time elapses before the special hold notice ends, that is, the hold subject to the special hold notice. The hold image displayed for the hold information subject to the special hold notice when the predetermined set time elapses before the lower symbol row Z3 is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display in the information game. Changes to a holding image having a smaller number than the displayed holding image. In the following description, the condition for changing the hold image in the special hold notice is also referred to as a special condition.

  As the special hold notice, in FIG. 20B, for example, a time display for displaying the predetermined set time above the hold image so as to correspond to the hold image in the third unit hold display area Ga3. The region GE is set, and the time display image Gp is displayed in the time display region GE. The time display area GE is configured so that the time display image Gp, the hold image, and the hold image can be recognized by, for example, a balloon so that the player can recognize which hold image is the hold information subject to the special hold notice. Are displayed in association with each other. This time display image Gp is associated with a predetermined set time, for example, “68.40” is displayed in 0.01 sec increments, and counts down every 0.01 sec from the start to the end of the special hold notice. The display is updated with the format.

  Then, in the special hold notice, the hold image is uniformly displayed as the fourth hold image P4 at the start, and the fourth hold image P4 is a hold image on the side having a smaller number (for example, the third hold image). The image P3) can be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 20 (c), in the game time of the holding information subject to the special holding notice, the time before the lower symbol row Z3 switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. When the display image Gp becomes “00.00” and the special condition is satisfied, the hold image subject to the special hold notice in the execution display area Gb is changed from the fourth hold image P4 to the third hold image P3. Change.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), in the game time of the hold information subject to the special hold notice, the time before the lower symbol row Z3 switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. When the display image Gp cannot be “00.00” and the special condition is not satisfied, the hold image that is the target of the special hold notice in the execution display area Gb is the fourth hold image. The image P4 remains unchanged.

  In this case, the time display image Gp at the end of the high-speed fluctuation display is continuously displayed even after the special hold notice ends, that is, after the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3. However, the countdown of the time display image Gp is stopped, and the remaining time at the end of the special hold notice is continuously displayed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, as the special hold notice, the displayed hold image changes to a hold image on the side with a high jackpot expectation level (side with a smaller number) based on the establishment of the special condition. It is possible to produce an effect as if the degree of expectation of jackpot has increased for the hold information corresponding to the changed hold image. Since this special condition is that a predetermined set time elapses from the start to the end of the special hold notice, the longer the variation display time of the game times from the start to the end of the special hold notice, the longer this predetermined condition is. The set time of elapses easily and special conditions are easily established. For this reason, the player expects that when the special reservation notice is started, the variation display time of the game times consumed until the special reservation notice ends is long.

  Here, it is considered that setting a predetermined effect (for example, super reach display) having a high expectation level for jackpot during the game round contributes to increasing the degree of attention to the game. And it is thought that the degree of attention increases as the predetermined production becomes flashy. However, even if the performance of the game times becomes flashy and the performance continues for a long time, the game result does not change, and for a player who wants to know the game result quickly, Prolonging the production may not be preferable.

  Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the jackpot expectation degree can be predicted from the relevance to the hold notice, and it may not be possible to expect the jackpot simply by the occurrence of a predetermined effect. . That is, for example, even if a super-reach occurs in the game times in which the above-described holding image P for the holding notice is the holding image P on the side where the jackpot expectation is low, the holding image P on the side where the jackpot expectation is high Compared to the case where super reach occurs in game times, it is not possible to expect a jackpot. Therefore, if you are predicting that this is a result of losing, if the super reach is unfolding, the time between them will be simply waiting for digestion, and the inconvenience due to the longer production will be more It can be remarkable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the variation display time of the game times digested during the period when the special hold notice is performed is long, the special display is set so that the special condition is easily established. It is possible to avoid inconvenience due to a long time.

  Returning to the description of the hold control command response process (FIG. 19), if the hold notice counter is less than “3” in step S1204, the special hold notice setting process is executed in step S1205. The special reservation notice setting process is a process for performing various settings for the effect when the special reservation notice is executed. The special hold notice setting process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, based on the information included in the hold command received this time, it is determined whether the hold information that triggered the hold command is any jackpot result. If it is any jackpot result, the process advances to step S1302 to execute a process for grasping stored hold information.

  The hold information grasping process in step S1302 is a process for grasping the variable information display time of the hold information stored in the hold storage area 250 provided in the RAM 244. The holding storage area 250 is a storage area corresponding to the holding ball storage area 232 on the main control device 81 side, and can store information included in the received holding command in association with each holding information.

  In the hold information grasping process in step S1302, it is first determined in step S1401 whether or not unconfirmed hold information exists in the hold storage area 250 as shown in the flowchart of FIG. If unconfirmed hold information exists, a variable display time table is acquired in step S1402, and processing for grasping the variable display time for unconfirmed hold information is executed in step S1403. Here, in the various table storage areas 245 in the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82, the same variable display time table as the variable display time table (FIG. 13) on the main control device 81 side is stored. Information related to the variable display time included in the hold command, that is, the reach random number counter C3 and the change type counter CS are stored in the hold storage area 250 in the hold increase process (step S1208 in FIG. 19) described later. Therefore, based on the information stored in the storage area for holding 250 or the information included in the received holding command and the information in the various table storage areas 245, the presentation control device 82 side also displays the variable information on the variable display time. It is possible to grasp.

  However, as already described, a holding number correspondence pattern and a holding number non-corresponding pattern are set in the effect pattern in each game time, and in the case of the holding number correspondence pattern, the holding memory at the start of the game time is set. The variable display time is determined based on the number N (secondary reserved storage number SN). Then, the number N of reserved memories at the start timing of the hold information grasping process (FIG. 23) may be different from the number N of reserved memories at the start timing of the game times of the stored hold information. Therefore, there is a possibility that the fluctuation display time cannot be specified (understood) in step S1403.

  Therefore, in step S1404, it is determined based on the processing result in step S1403 whether or not the variable display time can be specified. If it can be identified, that is, if the game time related to the pending information that is confirmed this time is an effect pattern of the pending number non-correspondence pattern, the process returns to step S1401 to determine the presence or absence of unconfirmed pending information, and unconfirmed pending If there is information, the process proceeds to step S1402 again. If there is no unconfirmed hold information, the hold information grasping process is terminated.

  As a specific example of the determination process in step S1401, for example, a confirmation counter is set, and the counter is incremented by 1 each time the determination in step S1401 is performed. Then, the hold information is stored in an area of the hold storage area 250 corresponding to the value of the counter (for example, if the counter value is 2, the area where the hold information that is the target of the second determination is stored). Check if it is. If the hold information is stored in the area corresponding to the counter value, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. If the hold information is not stored in the area corresponding to the counter value, the hold information is stored in the subsequent areas. Is not stored in step S1401, a negative determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S1401, the counter is set to an initial value (1). As a result, the confirmation process can be performed from the first area of the storage area for holding 250 in the next processing time.

  If it is determined in step S1404 that the variable display time cannot be specified, that is, if the game time related to the hold information confirmed this time is an effect pattern of the hold number correspondence pattern, the process proceeds to step S1405, and various types of RAM 244 are stored. After storing the non-time identifiable flag in the flag storage area 234, the hold information grasping process is terminated. The time specification impossibility flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the hold information of the hold number correspondence pattern is included.

  Returning to the description of the special hold notice setting process (FIG. 22), after executing the hold information grasping process in step S1302, whether or not the variable display time of the stored hold information stored in step S1303 can be specified. Execute the process of determining. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time identifiable flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244.

  If the time specification impossibility flag is not stored in step S1303 and the variable display time of the stored hold information can be specified, an effect setting process when the time specification is possible is executed in step S1304. Then, the special hold notice setting process is terminated. In addition, if the time specification impossibility flag is stored in step S1303 and the fluctuation display time of the stored hold information cannot be specified, an effect setting process when the time specification is impossible is performed in step S1305. After execution, the special hold notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the hold information related to the hold command received this time is not a jackpot result but a miss result in step S1301, execution of the effect setting process at the time of miss is executed in step S1306, and then this special The hold notice setting process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the effect setting process when the time can be specified in step S1304, the effect setting process when the time cannot be specified in step S1305, and the effect setting process when the time is out of step S1306 will be described.

<Production setting process when time can be specified>
First, the effect setting process when the time can be specified will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1501, the special hold notice table at the time when the time can be specified is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 among the special hold notice tables for the big hit. In step S1501, the effect pattern counter EK is acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. As shown in FIG. 25 (a), a time specifying pattern, a normal pattern, and a premier pattern are set in the special reservation notice table when the time can be specified as shown in FIG. The contents of these effects will be described together with the description of each process. The effect pattern counter EK is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 at predetermined intervals in order within a range of 0 to 999, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in step S1502, based on the special reservation notice table when the time can be specified acquired in step S1501 and the production pattern counter EK, the production content of the special special notice is a normal pattern (EK = 500-699).

  If it is a normal pattern, the process proceeds to step S1503, and a timer input process for a normal pattern is executed as a process for setting an effect for the normal pattern.

  Here, the timer input process in the normal pattern will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1601, a process for setting the outline of the special reservation notice is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the normal pattern is selected as the special hold notice, the outline of the special hold notice as the normal pattern is first set, and then the time display area GE at the start of the special hold notice. The detailed predetermined set time displayed as the time display image Gp is set. In step S1601, as an outline of the hold notice to be set, the hold memory number N (secondary hold memory number SN) immediately before reception of the current hold command, that is, immediately before the hold information is acquired, and various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are displayed. On the basis of the special holding counter TK provided in the table 243 and the special holding notice table (FIG. 27A) at the time of jackpot stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, When a special hold notice is executed, a rough length (short time, medium time, long time) of a predetermined set time is set. The special holding counter TK is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle in order within a range of 0 to 999, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Specifically, in the special reservation notice table at the time of jackpot, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), when the storage number N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 0 (hold storage after acquisition of the current hold information) When the number N is 1) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 699, the special hold notice is set not to be executed. Further, when the number N of reserved storage immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 0 and the special hold counter TK is 700 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a medium time when the value is 700 to 799, and is set to be a short time when the value is 800 to 999.

  Further, when the number N of reserved storage immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 1 (when the number N of hold storage after acquisition of the current hold information is 2), the special hold counter TK is 0 to 399. In some cases, the special hold notice is set not to be executed. Further, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 1 and the special hold counter TK is 400 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 400 to 499, a medium time when it is 500 to 699, and a short time when it is 700 to 999.

  When the reserved storage number N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 2 (when the hold storage number N after acquisition of the current hold information is 3) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 299 Is set not to execute a special hold notice. Further, when the number N of stored storage immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 2 and the special hold counter TK is 300 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 300 to 599, a medium time when it is 600 to 899, and a short time when it is 900 to 999.

  When the reserved storage number N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 3 (when the hold storage number N after acquisition of the current hold information is 4) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 199 Is set not to execute a special hold notice. In addition, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 3, and the special hold counter TK is 200 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 200 to 549, a medium time when it is 550 to 899, and a short time when it is 900 to 999.

  That is, in the special reservation notice table, the probability of executing the special reservation notice is set to be lower as the number N of stored memories immediately before obtaining the reservation information is smaller. In other words, the larger the number of stored hold information, the higher the probability of executing the special hold notice. The greater the number of the hold information, the longer the time from the start to the end of the special hold notice may be, so the possibility that the special condition is satisfied increases. Thus, by doing as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a special reservation notice that is difficult to satisfy the special condition.

  In the timer input process in the normal pattern (FIG. 26), after setting the outline of the hold notice in step S1601, whether or not to execute the special hold notice in step S1602 based on the processing result in step S1601 is determined. judge. If it is determined not to be executed, the timer input process is terminated as it is. If it is determined to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1603, where the rough set time set in step S1601, the time selection counter JK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 are stored. Based on the stored jackpot time selection table (FIG. 27 (b)), details of a predetermined set time in the special hold notice are set. The time selection counter JK is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented one by one in a predetermined cycle in the range of 0 to 19 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  After setting the detailed set time in step S1603, in step S1604, numerical information corresponding to the set time set in step S1603 is input to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. Execute the process. After executing the process of step S1604, the timer input process is terminated. The timer counter T is a counter for managing subtraction update of a predetermined set time in the special hold notice.

  Returning to the description of the effect setting process when the time can be specified (FIG. 24), after executing the process of step S1503, whether or not it is set to execute the special hold notice in the process of step S1503 in step S1504. Determine whether. When the non-execution is set, the effect setting process is terminated as it is. If it is set to execute, the process proceeds to step S1505.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the process for determining whether or not to execute the special reservation notice (step S1601 in the timer input process at the normal pattern in step S1503), the process for setting the special reservation notice effect pattern (step S1501). In addition, the configuration is performed after step S1502). Here, as a configuration of the normal effect setting process in the gaming machine field, after performing the process of whether or not to execute the effect, if the effect is to be executed, then set the effect pattern of the effect A configuration for performing the processing is generally performed. This is because if the effect pattern setting process is performed even when the effect is not executed, unnecessary processing is performed correspondingly, and the processing may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the effect pattern setting process, a process for determining whether or not to execute the effect is performed. If the configuration is such that the presence / absence of the performance is determined at the initial stage, the difference in the number of processes between the case where the performance is not performed and the case where the performance is performed may be large. In this case, the difference in time required for processing also increases, and even in the case of production execution, there is a possibility that the presence or absence of production execution will be realized before the production occurs because of a delay in the production timing. . If it does so, we are anxious about the effect of the presentation which prepared with much effort being unable to be produced suitably. Therefore, there is a possibility that the presence / absence of execution will be realized before the production starts by reducing the difference in the number of processes and processing time by determining the presence / absence of production execution after setting the production pattern. The effect of improving the degree of attention by executing the special reservation notice can be suitably achieved.

  If it is determined in step S1504 that a special reservation notice is to be executed, the process advances to step S1505 to acquire a jackpot subtraction pattern table. As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the big hit subtraction pattern table includes a default subtraction, a shift subtraction, and a specific timing subtraction as subtraction patterns of the values input to the timer counter T in step S1604. Any one of them is set to be selected based on the value of the subtraction counter GK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244.

  The default subtraction is a method in which the subtraction of the time display image Gp is subtracted with the passage of actual time in the special hold notice. For example, when 1 sec elapses, the display of the time display image Gp is also subtracted by 1 sec and updated. The The subtraction unit is 0.01 sec corresponding to the minimum display unit of the time display image Gp. The subtraction at the time of shifting is a subtraction method in which a predetermined number is subtracted at the timing when one game round is completed and the holding information is shifted to a lower area in the holding ball storage area 232, and when this subtraction at the time of shifting is selected. Is subtracted in addition to the default subtraction. The specific timing subtraction is a subtraction method that subtracts a predetermined number based on the fact that the display of the time display image Gp has reached a predetermined display time that has been determined in advance and has reached a specific timing, and when this specific timing subtraction is selected. Is subtracted in addition to the default subtraction.

  The subtraction counter GK is a loop counter that is incremented one by one in a predetermined cycle in order within a range of 0 to 999, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. More specifically, for the subtraction pattern table, the default subtraction is selected when the subtraction counter GK is 0 to 249, the subtraction when shifting is selected when it is 250 to 699, and is specified when it is 700 to 999. Timing subtraction is set to be selected. In step S1506, a subtraction pattern for the timer counter T is set based on these parameters.

  After executing the processing in step S1506, it is determined in step S1507 whether the subtraction pattern set in step S1506 is subtraction during shift. In the case of subtraction at the time of shift, processing for storing the flag at the time of shift in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 is executed in step S1508. The shift flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the shift subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1507, or after the processing of step S1508 is executed, it is determined in step S1509 whether the subtraction pattern set in step S1505 is a specific timing subtraction. In the case of specific timing subtraction, processing for storing specific timing flags in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 is executed in step S1510. The specific timing flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the specific timing subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1509, or after the processing of step S1510 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, the special hold command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. This special hold command includes information on the effect contents of the special hold notice set in each of the above processes, and is output to the display control device 212 by a command output process activated at a predetermined cycle. The display control device 212 that has received the special hold command controls the symbol display device 41 so that the special hold notice is displayed on the display screen G based on the information included in the command. After executing the process of step S1511, the effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the current special hold notice effect pattern is not a normal pattern, the process advances to step S1512 to determine whether or not it is a time specifying pattern. If it is a time specifying pattern, the process advances to step S1513 to execute timer input processing for the time specifying pattern.

  In this timer input process, based on each hold information stored in the hold storage area 250, hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time, and the remaining variable display time in the game currently being executed. The time from the start to the end of the special hold notice is grasped, and the timer counter T is set based on the grasped information.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether there is unconfirmed hold information in the hold storage area 250 or not. As a specific configuration for confirming unconfirmed pending information, a configuration similar to the configuration in step S1401 can be considered. If there is unconfirmed hold information, the fluctuation display time table at the time of losing is acquired in step S1702. In this embodiment, when there are a plurality of holding information corresponding to any jackpot result in the holding ball storage area 232 (holding storage area 250), an event occurs in which the special holding notice based on these jackpot results overlaps. It has a configuration that does not. In addition, when there are a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot results, the special hold notice can be executed only for the hold information that is subject to the determination of success / failure first. Although the process for doing so will be described later, since the setting is made in this way, each hold information grasped in the timer input process at the time specific pattern is an outlier result. Therefore, in step S1702, a process of obtaining a deviation display time table (see FIG. 13B) at the time of deviation is executed. In step S1703, processing for grasping the variable display time of the hold information based on the variable display time table acquired in step S1702 is executed. In the subsequent step S1704, a process of adding the variable display time grasped in step S1703 to the timer counter T is executed.

  After executing the process of step S1704, the process returns to step S1701 to determine whether there is unconfirmed pending information. If there is, the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 are repeated. If there is no unconfirmed hold information, the process proceeds to step S1705, and a variable display time table (see FIG. 13 (a)) at the time of jackpot is acquired to grasp the variable display time corresponding to the hold information acquired this time. Execute the process. In the subsequent step S1706, the effect pattern is grasped based on the variation display time table acquired in step S1705, and the time until the high-speed variation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is terminated in the game times related to the hold information is grasped. Execute the process.

  Here, in this embodiment, from the information on the game result and the information on the variation display time, at least the time pattern until the high-speed variation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is completed among the effect patterns of the corresponding game times. It is possible to grasp. Specifically, in this configuration, an effect pattern table for determining an effect pattern for each game time is stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82. And this effect pattern table is set so that the pattern of time until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is completed is uniquely determined from the information of the game result and the fluctuation display time information. In step S1706, the time until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is completed is grasped based on the effect pattern table. In addition, in this effect pattern table, in addition to the time until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, detailed effect patterns for each game time are also defined. And in the variation start process in the variation display control process described later, the stop result of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is set based on the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the information on the variation display time, the information on the game result, etc. Based on the stop result information and the variable display time information, the details of the corresponding effect pattern are read out from the effect pattern table and set as the effect pattern in the current game round.

  That is, the process of step S1706 is a process of specifying the effect pattern of the game times at a timing earlier than the start of the game times, and the effect pattern setting process (variation start process) performed at the start of the game times is the game. This is performed at a timing earlier than the start timing of the times. By providing such a configuration, it is possible to produce an effect according to the effect pattern of the game times at a timing earlier than the game times. And in this embodiment, since it is set as the structure which specifies an effect pattern at the timing before the start of the game times using the effect pattern table for setting an effect pattern at the time of the start of game times, The structure for specifying first is simplified.

  Note that the configuration for specifying the effect pattern of the game times at a timing prior to the start of the game times is not limited to the above, and may be another configuration. For example, the effect pattern table may be prepared separately for a table for time until the high-speed fluctuation display ends and a table in which a detailed effect pattern is set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which specifies not all but a part of effect pattern of game times at the previous timing. Furthermore, the time until the high-speed fluctuation display is completed using a counter or the like is determined by lottery etc., and this lottery is performed at the previous timing, and the details of the lottery etc. are taken into account at the start of the game round. It is good also as a structure which determines an effect pattern. In other words, as long as the production pattern is determined at the start of the game round, it is only necessary to be able to identify at least a part of the production pattern to be determined at the earlier timing. If it is a configuration that is determined at a timing earlier than that, it is possible to specify the effect pattern determined at the earlier timing, and at the start of the game times, it is configured to set the effect based on the determined effect pattern Good.

  In step S1707, processing for adding the time grasped in step S1706 to the timer counter T is executed.

  After executing the process of step S1707, in step S1708, a process of grasping the remaining variation display time of the currently executed game time is executed. By the way, the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are provided with a progress counter for grasping the progress status of the fluctuation display time of the game time being executed, and numerical information corresponding to the fluctuation display time is displayed at the start of the game time. Input to the progress counter. The progress counter is subtracted and updated every predetermined period, and becomes 0 at the end of the game. In step S1708, by grasping the numerical information of this progress counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time of the game times being executed. After performing the process of step S1708, a process of adding the remaining time grasped in step S1708 to the timer counter T is executed in step S1709.

  After executing the process of step S1709, after executing a predetermined time adjustment process in step S1710, the timer input process is terminated. In this predetermined time adjustment process, adjustment is performed by increasing or decreasing the predetermined set time specified in steps S1701 to S1709. In other words, by increasing or decreasing the specified actual time by lottery or the like, it is possible to give randomness to whether or not a predetermined set time elapses before the end of high-speed fluctuation, that is, whether or not a special condition is satisfied.

  Note that the time to increase / decrease in step S1710 is not limited to the configuration in which the time is randomly determined by lottery or the like. For example, it may be determined according to the game result of the hold information and the type of jackpot that are subject to special hold notice. Alternatively, it may be determined according to the game situation (for example, the number of reserved items or the lottery mode). The increase / decrease in step S1710 may be determined at random by lottery or the like, or may be determined according to the game situation during execution of the special reservation notice. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to reflect a game situation more with respect to possibility of establishment of special conditions, and it can suppress giving an impression like what is called a race.

  Returning to the description of the effect setting process when the time can be specified (FIG. 24), after executing the timer input process at the time specifying pattern in step S1513, the special hold notice command is output and set in step S1511. The effect setting process ends. If it is determined in step S1512 that the pattern is not a time specific pattern but a premier pattern, in step S1514, a timer input process for the premier pattern is executed. After the process of step S1514, after performing said step S1511, this effect setting process is complete | finished.

  In the timer input process at the time of the premier pattern in step S1514, which of the plurality of premier effects to be executed is set, and each process corresponding to the set effect is performed. Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, a premier effect lottery process is executed in step S1801. In the premier effect lottery process, the premier pattern effect selection table (FIG. 25B) stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and the premier counter lot PK for the premier effect lottery from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 , And set which premier effect to execute. In the performance selection table at the time of the premier pattern, as the premier effect, the display time at the start of the special hold notice and the confirmation time display effect that makes it possible to grasp that it is a jackpot result, and the time at the predetermined end during subtraction A tail specific change effect in which a jackpot finalizing effect is performed and a one-shot reverse effect in which a special condition is forcibly established by performing a large subtraction at a predetermined timing during subtraction are set. The premier counter PK is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle in order within a range of 0 to 999 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In the effect selection table at the time of the premier pattern, the case where the premiere counter PK is 0 to 333 corresponds to the fixed time display effect, the case where it is 334 to 666 corresponds to the tail specific change effect, and may be 667 to 999. It is set to correspond to a one-shot reverse effect.

  After performing the effect lottery process in step S1801, it is determined based on the result of the process whether or not the one-shot reverse effect is set in step S1802. The one-shot reversal effect is the timing before the end of the special hold notice as the predetermined timing during the subtraction as described above, for example, the start of the game time of the hold information subject to the special hold notice Sometimes, it is an effect that the special condition is forcibly established by subtracting until the set time becomes zero. If it is set to this one-shot reverse effect, the one-time reverse flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 so that it is possible to grasp that the MPU 242 is set to this one-time reverse effect in step S1803. Execute the process of storing

  Note that the execution timing of the one-shot reverse effect is not limited to the above as long as it is the timing before the end of the special reservation notice. For example, it may be before the start of the game of the hold information subject to the special hold notice (during the game of the hold information digested before the hold information of interest). Moreover, the timing at which new hold information is acquired during execution of the special hold notice may be used. However, the closer to the end of the special hold notice, the higher the unexpectedness when a one-shot reverse effect occurs.

  In the subsequent step S1804, an effect time setting process for one reversal is performed. In this effect time setting process, a time selection table for the one-time reversal effect is obtained from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the time corresponding to the number N of reserved memories immediately before acquisition of the current hold information is grasped. As shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the time selection table at the time of one reversal, the production time is set corresponding to the reserved memory number N, and the production time becomes longer as the reserved memory number N increases. Is set. A plurality of effect times are set so that the selected effect times can be different even with the same number of reserved memories, and which effect time is set is randomly selected by lottery or the like. These performance times are set to be longer than the variable display time that is usually selected easily in one game time, and special hold is made at the performance time selected in the time selection table at the time of one-time reversal. When the advance notice is executed, the special condition is set to be difficult to be satisfied only by normal default subtraction. In addition, it is good also as a structure where a special condition is not materialized only by default subtraction regardless of which production time is selected.

  After executing the process of step S1804, a process of inputting the time grasped in step S1804 to the timer counter T is executed in step S1805. After executing the process of step S1805, the timer input process is terminated.

  When it is not a one-shot reverse effect in step S1802, it is determined in step S1806 whether or not the effect set in step S1801 is a tail specific change effect. As described above, in the end specific change effect, the display of the predetermined time display image Gp being subtracted is “7” in the present embodiment as the predetermined end, and the display of the time display image Gp is “X7.77” (X Is an arbitrary number) at a timing (also referred to as tail specifying timing in the following description) so that a jackpot finalizing effect is generated. When it is determined in step S1806 that the tail specific change effect is set, in step S1807, various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 are stored so that it can be understood that the MPU 242 is set to the tail specific change effect. A process of storing the tail specific change flag in 234 is executed.

  Note that the end specifying timing is not limited to the above, but for example, “X7.70”, “X7.00”, “XY.70”, and “XY.Z7” (Y and Z are arbitrary numbers). The predetermined end does not have to be a rounded eye. Further, the predetermined end is not limited to one type and may be a plurality of types. In this case, the number of times that the tail specifying timing occurs can be increased.

  In the subsequent step S1808, an effect time setting process for the end specific change is performed. In this effect time setting process, the time selection table at the time of the end specific change effect is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the time corresponding to the reserved storage number N immediately before acquisition of the current hold information is grasped. As shown in FIG. 25 (d), in the time selection table at the time of the end specific change, the production time is set in correspondence with the number N of stored memories, and the production time becomes longer as the number N of held memories increases. Is set. A plurality of effect times are set so that the selected effect times can be different even with the same number of reserved memories, and which effect time is set is randomly selected by lottery or the like. These performance times are set so that the timing at which the predetermined end is included is included at least once. Specifically, an effect time shorter than a predetermined end time is not set. In addition, the probability that there is a plurality of tail specific timings that are predetermined tails during subtraction is set to be higher than the probability that the tail specific timing is singular. More specifically, for example, when the end specific timing is “XY.Z7”, the probability that “XY.Z8 to XY.Z9” is selected selects “XY.Z0 to XY.Z6”. It is set to be higher than the probability.

  If an effect time with a plurality of tail specific timings is selected during subtraction in step S1808, a process of randomly setting which timing to generate the jackpot final effect is performed by lottery or the like. In addition, you may set so that the probability that a jackpot finalizing effect will generate | occur | produce becomes higher in the timing with the late generation timing among several end specific timings. In this way, the probability of going through the tail specific timing multiple times before the jackpot finalizing effect is performed, and the number of times the player pays attention to whether or not the jackpot finalizing effect is performed at this tail specific timing. Can be expensive. Also, in this case, if a roll effect that steps up each time the end specific timing is passed, the degree of attention toward the later timing can be more suitably increased. In addition, as a jackpot finalizing effect, the subtraction of the time display image Gp may be terminated at the end specifying timing, and the subtraction may not be performed thereafter. In this way, it is considered that the player expects the subtraction to end at the end specific timing, and the degree of attention to the special reservation notice can be increased. As a timing to end the subtraction, when there are a plurality of end specific timings as described above, the value is more suggestive of a hit like “XY.77” than “XY.Z7”, The timing may correspond to a value that suggests an advantage to the player as compared to other values, such as an odd number (corresponding to a probable jackpot result) rather than an even number (usually corresponding to a jackpot result). Further, the time display image Gp may be enlarged at the end specifying timing, the color may be changed to a conspicuous color, or the shape may be sharpened to enhance the time display image Gp. By doing in this way, interest in time display image Gp can be raised more. It is also possible to combine this highlighting with a configuration that stops subtraction as described above. In this case, it may be configured to start from a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds before) the end specifying timing (timing at which subtraction can be completed), and in this way, the end specifying timing (timing at which subtraction can be completed) approaches. The player can easily recognize that the time display image Gp has changed.

  After executing the process of step S1808, in step S1809, a process of inputting the time grasped in step S1808 to the timer counter T is executed. After executing the process of step S1809, the timer input process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1806 that the tail specific change effect is not set, the process proceeds to step S1810. The case where a negative determination is made in step S1806 is a case where the fixed time display effect is set as the premier effect. For example, “77.77”, “7.77”, and “3.41” are used as the fixed time display effects as the fixed time that can be recognized as a jackpot result at the display time at the start of the special hold notice. ”Is set (see FIG. 25 (e)), and one of these fixed times is displayed at the start of the special hold notice, so that the player becomes the target of this special hold notice. It is possible to grasp that the hold information that is held is any jackpot result.

  Needless to say, the type of the fixed time in the fixed time display is not limited to the above. Further, as in the case of the tail specific change effect, a configuration in which the subtraction is not performed while the fixed time display is performed may be performed, or a time display image Gp may be changed (emphasized) in the fixed time display.

  In step S1810, processing for storing a fixed time display flag in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 is executed so that the MPU 242 can grasp that the fixed time display effect is set. In continuing step S1811, the production time setting process for a fixed time display is performed. In this effect time setting process, a time selection table for a fixed time display effect is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and a fixed time to be displayed this time is selected. Which set time is set among a plurality of set times is randomly determined by lottery or the like. Note that a plurality of jackpot results may be set in association with the fixed times to be displayed. By doing this, it is possible not only to grasp that it is a jackpot result by displaying the confirmed time, but also to grasp the type thereof, and to more appropriately pay attention to the confirmed time display. It becomes possible to raise.

  After executing the process of step S1811, the process of inputting the time grasped in step S1811 to the timer counter T is executed in step S1812. After executing the process of step S1812, this timer input process ends.

<Direction setting process when time cannot be specified>
Next, the effect setting process when the time cannot be specified in step S1305 in the special reservation notice setting process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The effect setting process when the time cannot be specified is substantially the same as the effect setting process when the time can be specified. That is, first, in step S1901, the special reservation notice table when the time cannot be specified is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 among the special reservation notice table at the time of big hit. In step S1901, the effect pattern counter EK is acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. In the special reservation notice table when the time cannot be specified, as shown in FIG. 25A, a normal pattern and a premier pattern are set as the contents of the special reservation notice. In other words, in the special reservation notice table when the time cannot be specified, the time specification pattern is set not to be selected as compared with the special reservation notice table when the time can be specified.

  After setting the special reservation notice effect pattern in step S1901, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the normal pattern is set. If the normal pattern is set, step S1503 to step S1511 are set. Similar to the process of, after performing the processes of steps S1903 to S1911, the effect setting process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1902 that the normal pattern is not set, the premier pattern is set. In this case, the same process as in step S1514 is executed in step S1912. After performing the process of step S1911, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Direction setting process when out of sync>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of deviating from step S1306 in the special reservation notice setting process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The effect setting process at the time of losing is substantially the same as the process in the case where the special pattern special hold notice is set in each effect setting process (step S1304, step S1305) at the time of the big hit. That is, in step S2001, the reserved storage number N immediately before reception of the current hold command, that is, immediately before acquisition of hold information, the special hold counter TK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and the various table storages in the ROM 243. The process of acquiring the special reservation notice table (FIG. 33A) at the time of disconnection stored in the area 245 is executed. In step S2002, a process for setting an outline of the special reservation notice is executed.

  In the special hold notice table at the time of detachment, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), when the hold storage number N immediately before acquisition of hold information is 0 (the hold storage number N after acquisition of hold information this time is 1). If the special reservation counter TK is 0 to 679, the special reservation notice is set not to be executed. Further, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 0 and the special hold counter TK is 800 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 800 to 949, a medium time when it is 950 to 989, and a short time when it is 990 to 999.

  Further, when the number N of reserved storage immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 1 (when the number N of hold storage after acquisition of the current hold information is 2), the special hold counter TK is 0 to 599. In some cases, the special hold notice is set not to be executed. Further, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 1, and the special hold counter TK is 600 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 600 to 799, a medium time when it is 800 to 969, and a short time when it is 970 to 999.

  When the reserved memory count N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 2 (when the hold memory count N after acquisition of the current hold information is 3) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 399 Is set not to execute a special hold notice. In addition, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 2, and the special hold counter TK is 400 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 400 to 699, a medium time when it is 700 to 949, and a short time when it is 950 to 999.

  When the reserved storage number N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 3 (when the hold storage number N after acquisition of the current hold information is 4) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 199 Is set not to execute a special hold notice. In addition, when the number of stored memories N immediately before acquisition of the hold information is 3, and the special hold counter TK is 200 to 999, a special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK Is set to be a long time when it is 200 to 599, a medium time when it is 600 to 949, and a short time when it is 950 to 999.

  That is, when the special hold notice table at the time of losing and the big hit is compared, the probability of being set to non-execution at the time of losing is higher. In addition, a longer time is more easily selected as the predetermined set time when it is off, and as a result, even when the special hold notice is executed, it is less likely that the special condition is satisfied when it is off.

  After executing the process of step S2002, in the subsequent step S2003, it is determined whether or not to execute the special hold notice based on the result of the process of step S2002. If not executed, the effect setting process is terminated as it is. When executing, in step S2004, the process for setting the details of the set time is executed in the same manner as the process in step S1603. That is, in step S2004, a special hold is made based on the rough setting time set in step S2002, the time selection counter JK in the RAM 244, and the time selection table at the time of removal from the ROM 243 (FIG. 33B). Set the details of the predetermined set time in the notice. After setting the detailed set time in step S2004, in step S2005, a process of inputting numerical information corresponding to the set time set in step S2004 is executed to the timer counter T of the RAM 244.

  In the subsequent step S2005, a subtraction pattern table for removal is acquired. As shown in FIG. 28A, the subtraction pattern table for losing is specified as default subtraction, subtraction at shift, based on the value of the subtraction counter GK in the RAM 244, similarly to the subtraction pattern table for jackpots. The timing subtraction is set to be selected.

  More specifically, with respect to the subtraction pattern table for outliers, the default subtraction is selected when the subtraction counter GK is 0 to 749, and the subtraction upon shift is selected when it is 750 to 874, which is 875 to 999. In this case, the specific timing subtraction is set to be selected. That is, the probability that the default subtraction is selected is set higher when it is out of the big hit. In other words, there is a higher probability that the subtraction at the time of shift or the specific timing subtraction will be selected at the time of jackpot than at the time of loss.

  In step S2006, the subtraction pattern of the timer counter T is set based on the values of the subtraction pattern table and the subtraction counter GK acquired in step S2005.

  The processing from step S2007 to step S2011 is the same as the processing from step S1507 to step S1511 described above, and the processing when the subtraction at shift or specific timing subtraction is selected (processing to store the corresponding flag) is executed.

  After performing the process of step S2011, after performing the process which adds and updates "1" to the hold notice counter YK in step S2012, this production | generation setting process is complete | finished.

  Returning to the description of the hold control command handling process (FIG. 19), after executing the special hold notice setting process in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, it is determined whether the hold command received this time corresponds to any jackpot result. If it corresponds to any of the jackpot results, the process proceeds to step S1207, and a process of updating by adding “3” to the hold notice counter YK is executed. As a result, a negative determination is made in the process of step S1204.

  That is, when the hold information corresponding to any jackpot result is stored, the special hold notice is not executed for the hold information digested after the hold information. As described above, the special hold notice is subject to the special hold notice based on the time from the start of the special hold notice to the predetermined timing in the game times related to the hold information. It is an effect whether or not to change the holding image related to the hold information. If any jackpot result is included in the hold information digested from the start to the end, before the end An open / close execution mode is included. That is, depending on the length of the opening / closing execution mode, the possibility that the special condition is satisfied is extremely high, and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such a case, when the opening / closing execution mode is performed during execution of the special hold notice, the special hold notice is not performed.

  However, even if the opening / closing execution mode is performed during the special hold notice, if the setting time in the special hold notice is not subtracted during the open / close execution mode, the possibility of establishment of the special condition will be extremely increased. In such a case, it may be possible to avoid a decrease in interest even if a special reservation notice is executed. By doing in this way, it is also possible to raise the frequency with which special reservation notice is performed.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the special hold notice is performed when the opening / closing execution mode and the special hold notice overlap, and the special hold notice is subtracted even in the open / close execution mode. In this case, for example, if the probability that the special condition is established is set by using the length of time during which the opening / closing execution mode is performed, not only the length of the variable display time during game play but also the opening / closing execution mode It can be a new effect that the probability of establishment of the special condition of the hold information varies depending on the length. In particular, in the opening / closing execution mode, the execution length may vary depending on not only the setting on the gaming machine side but also the game mode of the player. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, when the number of winnings to the big winning opening 32a reaches the winning upper limit number of each round, the round ends. Duration may vary. Therefore, the game can be a novel game in which the special condition is more easily established as the timing of reaching the upper limit number of winnings by the player's operation is delayed. Thereby, the opening / closing execution mode can be fully enjoyed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1206, or after the processing in step S1207 is executed, the hold increasing command processing is executed in step S1208, and then the hold control command response processing is terminated. In this process, light emission control of the hold light emitting unit 45 is performed in response to the increase in hold information, and a command corresponding to the increase in hold information is output to the display control device 212. This command includes information on the hold image determined in step S1203, information on the special hold notice determined in step S1205, and information on the secondary hold storage number SN. Based on the received command, the display control device 212 reads data corresponding to the corresponding holding image from the holding image data storage area stored in the character ROM 256, and holds the unit holding corresponding to the secondary holding storage number SN. The symbol display device 41 is controlled to display on the display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, it is determined whether a shift command is received. If a shift command has not been received, the hold control command handling process is terminated. If a shift command has been received, the process advances to step S1210 to execute a process of subtracting 1 from the secondary reserved storage number SN.

  In a succeeding step S1211, it is determined whether or not a shift subtraction flag is stored. The subtraction flag at the time of shift is a flag stored when subtraction at the time of shift is selected as the subtraction pattern in the special reservation notice as described above. If this flag is stored, the process advances to step S1212 to execute a subtraction process at the time of shift. This shift subtraction process will be described later in detail.

  When the shift subtraction flag is not stored in step S1211, or after executing the process of step S1212, the process proceeds to step S1213. In step S1213, a shift process is executed. In the shift process, the data in each storage area in the storage area for holding 250 is shifted. That is, in the shift process, the hold information stored in each storage area of the hold storage area 250 is shifted from the upper area to the lower area. In the shift process, the light emission control of the hold light emitting unit 45 is performed in response to the decrease in the hold information, and a command corresponding to the decrease in the hold information is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to change the display of the corresponding unit hold display areas Ga1 to Gs4 based on the received command. After executing the process of step S1213, the hold control command response process is terminated.

<Special hold notice control process>
Next, the special hold notice control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, in the special hold notice control process, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice is being executed in step S2101. If it is being executed, a predetermined setting is made in step S2102. A timer management process that is a process related to time subtraction is executed, and a hold display process that is a process related to the hold image P is executed in step S2103. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, or after executing the process of step S2103, the special hold notice control process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the timer management process and the hold display process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the timer management process, as shown in FIG. 35, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not an elapsed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The elapsed flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the special condition is satisfied because the timer counter T is “0”. If the elapsed flag is stored, the timer management process is terminated as it is.

  If the elapsed flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2202 to determine whether or not a subtraction end flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The subtraction end flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to know that the subtraction of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice has ended without special conditions being satisfied. If the subtraction end flag is stored, the timer management process is terminated as it is.

  If the subtraction end flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2203 to execute timer subtraction processing. In this process, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting “1”. In the subsequent step S2204, the subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. This subtraction command includes the information of the timer counter T updated in the above step S2203, and is output to the display control device 212 by command output processing activated in the MPU 242 at a predetermined cycle. Based on the reception of the subtraction command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 reads an image corresponding to the information of the timer counter T included in the subtraction command from the character ROM 256, and displays the time display area GE in the special hold notice. The symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the time display image Gp is updated.

  In a succeeding step S2205, it is determined whether or not a specific timing subtraction flag is stored. If the specific timing subtraction flag is stored and the specific timing subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern, it is determined in step S2206 whether or not it is time to perform the specific timing subtraction. As already described, the specific timing subtraction is a subtraction method in which a predetermined number is subtracted based on the fact that the display of the time display image Gp has reached a predetermined display time that has been determined in advance and has reached a specific timing.

  As shown in FIG. 28C, the specific timing subtraction table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 performs a subtraction with a specific timing that is a predetermined display time, a subtraction probability at the specific timing. In this case, the subtraction time is set for each game result of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. Specifically, regardless of the game result, the case where the setting time of the special hold notice is any of the remaining 10 sec, 20 sec, 40 sec and 60 sec is set as the specific timing. In addition, the subtraction probability is uniformly set to 25% when the game result is a jackpot result at any specific timing, and when the game result is a missed result, the specific timing The winning probability is set to be lower as the time becomes slower (as the specific timing has less remaining time). Regardless of the game result, the subtraction time is set so that the subtraction time is shorter as the specific timing is delayed (the specific timing with the remaining time of the set time is shorter).

  In step S2206, the specific timing subtraction table is acquired and it is determined whether or not it is the specific timing (remaining 10 sec, 20 sec, 40 sec, or 60 sec). If it is the specific timing, a subtraction lottery process is executed in step S2207. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform subtraction at the current specific timing based on the subtraction probability of the specific timing subtraction table of the ROM 243. In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the subtraction lottery is won based on the processing result in step S2207. If the subtraction lottery is won, timer subtraction processing is executed in step S2209. In this process, a process of subtracting a numerical value corresponding to the current subtraction time set in the specific timing subtraction table from the current timer counter T is performed. In the subsequent step S2210, the specific subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The specific subtraction command includes the subtraction time subtracted in step S2209 and the information of the timer counter T after the subtraction. The output mode of the specific subtraction command and the processing on the display control device 212 side when the subtraction command is received are the same as in the subtraction command described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, different commands are provided for each subtraction opportunity, such as outputting information at the time of normal default subtraction as a command at the time of subtraction, and outputting information at the time of specific timing subtraction as a command at the time of specific subtraction. . As a result, since the display control device 212 can grasp the subtraction opportunity by grasping the type of command, the processing configuration can be simplified in setting the effect corresponding to the subtraction opportunity. be able to. However, from the viewpoint of reducing the storage capacity on the side of the effect control device 82 by reducing the types of commands to be set or reducing the number of input / output commands between the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, these commands May be configured in common. Specifically, in step S2210, the subtraction command set in step S2204 may be updated. For example, if the information obtained by subtracting “1” from the timer counter T in step S2204 (step S2203) is set as the subtraction command, the information obtained by subtracting “1” from the information subtracted at a specific timing (step S2210) The information regarding the subtraction value combined with S2209) is reset to the subtraction command. In this way, the subtraction command can be used at any subtraction opportunity, and the number of commands set in one timer management process is only one, and the number of input / output commands is set as described above. It can be reduced more than the configuration.

  When a negative determination is made in any of step S2205, step S2206, and step S2208, or after executing the process of step S2210, the process proceeds to step S2211. In step S2211, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T has reached “0”. If the timer counter T is “0”, the process of storing the elapsed flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is executed in step S2212, and then the timer management process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2211 that the timer counter T is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2213. In step S2213, it is determined whether or not either the tail specific change flag or the one-time reverse rotation flag is stored in the RAM 244. If any one of the flags is stored, it is determined in step S2214 whether or not it is the performance execution timing corresponding to the stored flag. Specifically, when the tail specific change flag is stored, the tail specific change effect is set as the current effect pattern. In step S2214, the timing (time display area) at which this tail specific change effect is to be executed. It is determined whether or not the GE display is “X7.77”. Further, when the one-time reverse rotation flag is stored, the one-time reverse rotation effect is set as the current effect pattern. In step S2214, the timing at which this one-time reverse rotation effect is to be executed (the target of the special hold notice) It is determined whether or not it is the game information start timing of the held information.

  If affirmative determination is made in step S2214 and it is the execution timing of the effect corresponding to the stored flag, the process proceeds to step S2115 to execute effect setting processing for executing the corresponding effect. In this process, the timer counter T is set to “0”, and when the tail specific change flag is stored, the tail specific change effect is executed, and when the one-time reverse rotation flag is stored. The display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so as to execute a one-shot reverse effect, and a corresponding effect is executed on the symbol display device 41 by outputting a command to the display control device 212. To. Thereafter, after the elapsed flag is stored in step S2212, the timer management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2213 or step S2214, the timer management process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in the timer management process, the regular subtraction process of the timer counter T, the subtraction process at a specific timing, and the process in the premier effect such as the fixed time display effect, the tail specific change effect, and the one-shot reverse effect Run. If the special condition is satisfied, an elapsed flag is stored. In the hold display process (step S2103) in the special hold notice control process (FIG. 34), a process based on the fact that this elapsed flag has been stored (the special condition has been established) is performed.

  As already described, in the present embodiment, as a subtraction pattern, subtraction upon shifting is set in addition to default subtraction and specific timing subtraction. Therefore, prior to the description of the hold display process, the shift subtraction process for the shift subtraction will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The subtraction process at the time of the shift is a process that is executed based on the reception of the shift command from the main control device 81 in the hold control command corresponding process (FIG. 19) (step S1212).

  In the shift subtraction process, it is determined in step S2301 whether or not a shift winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The shift winning flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to know that subtraction at the time of shifting has already been performed. If it is determined in step S2301 that the shift winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S2302, subtraction lottery processing for shifting is executed. In this process, the shift subtraction table is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and whether or not the subtraction is executed at the current shift is selected by lottery. . As shown in FIG. 28 (b), the shift time subtraction table is based on the number of hold after the shift and the game result of the hold information subject to special hold notice, , Subtraction time at the time of winning is set. Specifically, the winning probability of subtraction at the time of shift is such that subtraction at the time of shift is performed with a higher probability when the game result is a big hit result than when it is a losing result regardless of the number of holds after the shift Is set. In addition, the subtraction time at the time of winning is set so that the longer the subtraction time is subtracted as the number of hold after the shift is larger, regardless of the game result.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 28B, in this embodiment, the subtraction time at the time of shift is set to be different depending on the game result of the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice. Specifically, when the number of holds after shifting is two or three, if the game result of the target hold information is a jackpot result, the subtraction time is 20 sec, and if it is a miss result, 10 sec. It is said. By doing so, a game of grasping the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the time of shift is added, and the special hold notice can be fully enjoyed. In order to make it difficult to grasp the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the time of shift, a configuration in which the same subtraction time can be set regardless of the game result may be adopted. Furthermore, in order to add the pleasure of predicting the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the time of shift, for example, as a configuration in which the subtraction time is set by lottery or the like, different subtraction times are easily set depending on the game result. It may be.

  In step S2303, based on the processing result in step S2302, it is determined whether or not a lottery for subtraction upon shifting has been won. If the lottery for subtraction at the time of shift is won, a process for storing a win-at-shift flag is executed in step S2304. Thus, an affirmative determination is made in step S2301 at the next and subsequent shifts.

  In subsequent step S2305, timer subtraction processing is executed. In this process, based on the subtraction table at the time of shift, numerical information corresponding to the subtraction time corresponding to the number of holds after the shift and the game result is grasped, and the grasped numerical information is subtracted from the numerical information of the timer counter T. Execute the process. In step S 2306, the subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. This subtraction command includes information on the subtraction time to be subtracted in step S2305 and information on the timer counter T after the subtraction. The processing for outputting the subtraction command to the display control device 212 side and the subsequent processing on the display control device 212 side are as described above.

  If the shift winning flag is stored in step S2301, if it is determined in step S2303 that the subtraction lottery has not been won, or after executing the process of step S2306, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T has reached “0”. If the timer counter T is “0”, the elapsed flag is stored in step S2308. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the subtraction process at the time of shift is terminated.

  Next, the hold display process in step S2103 in the special hold notice control process (FIG. 34) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether an elapsed flag is stored. The case where the elapsed flag is not stored is a situation where the special condition has not yet been established. In this case, the hold display process is terminated as it is. If the elapsed flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2402. In step S2402, it is determined whether the changed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The changed flag is a flag stored when the holding image is changed based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (the elapsed flag is stored) (step S2406 described later). If the changed flag is stored, the hold display process is terminated as it is. If the changed flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2403.

  In step S2403, the changed hold display is set. In this process, a holding image to be changed from the fourth holding image P4 is set based on the establishment of a special condition based on the game result of the holding information that is the target of the special holding notice. For example, the ROM 243 stores a pattern table for the holding image after the special condition is established, and a plurality of holding image patterns to be changed when the special condition is established according to the game result are set in the pattern table. Yes. Then, a counter is acquired from the RAM 244, and a holding image is determined by lottery or the like. In this embodiment, the changed hold image is uniformly set as the third hold image P3. In this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load when changing the hold image. However, in order to diversify the change pattern, it is preferable to set a plurality of hold images after the change and determine which hold image to change. In these cases, the hold image after the change may be set so as to be a hold image on the side where the big hit expectation is higher than the hold image before the change.

  Since the first hold image P1 in the present embodiment is selected only when the result is a jackpot result, when the changed hold image is set, the first hold image as the changed hold image is used. It is preferable that the image P1 for use is not selected, or the first image for reservation P1 can be selected only when the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice is a jackpot result. In the present embodiment, the hold image before the change is uniformly set as the fourth hold image P4. However, the hold image may be randomly determined from the hold images P1 to P5 by lottery or the like. In this case, the first hold image P1 is not selected as the hold image before the change, or the first hold image P1 is displayed only when the hold information subject to the special hold notice is a big hit result. It is good to be able to choose. When the second hold image P2 is selected as the hold image before the change, the jackpot result is fixed after the change (changes to the first hold image P1). If the special condition is satisfied even though the held information is a result of losing, a contradiction between the game result and the holding image may occur. Therefore, the second holding image P2 is selected only when the time can be specified, and when the result is a jackpot result, the time is set so that a special condition can be satisfied, and the result is an outlier result. In such a case, if the time is set so that the special condition is not satisfied, inconsistency with the game result can be avoided. Note that the second holding image P2 is selected only when the second holding image P2 is not selected as the holding image before the change or when the holding information subject to the special holding notice is a jackpot result. It may be made to be able to be selected.

  In the subsequent step S2404, an effect pattern at the time of change is set. In this process, an effect pattern in the case of changing the holding image is set based on the game result of the holding information that is the target of the special holding notice. For example, the ROM 243 stores a pattern table for effect patterns at the time of change, and in this pattern table, a plurality of effect patterns are set according to game results and game conditions when special conditions are established. Then, a counter is acquired from the RAM 244, and it is determined by lottery or the like in which effect pattern the holding image is changed. As an effect pattern, for example, the pre-change hold image is once made difficult or impossible to visually recognize by displaying smoke or the like, and then the change hold image is visible, For example, there may be an effect pattern in which a plurality of hold images as candidates are displayed and the plurality of hold images are changed, and then one candidate is fixedly displayed and changed.

  In subsequent step S2405, an effect setting process is performed when special conditions are established based on the information set in steps S2403 and S2404. In this process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of change and the hold image after the change. In step S 2405, the change time command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The change time command includes the information on the hold image after the change set in step S2403 and the information on the effect pattern at the change time set in step S2404, and is activated periodically. It is output to the display control device 212 by command output processing. Based on the reception of the change command, the display control device 212 grasps that the special condition is satisfied, the hold image after the change, and the effect pattern at the change. Then, image data corresponding to these effects is read from the character ROM 256, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the effects are displayed on the display screen G.

  In the subsequent step S2406, processing for storing the changed flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is executed. By performing this process, an affirmative determination is made in step S2402 in the next and subsequent hold display processes. After executing the process of step S2406, the hold display process is terminated.

  As described above, based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied, that is, the time display image Gp of the time display area GE in the special hold notice becomes “00.00”, the hold image P differs from the previous images. It changes to an image (see FIG. 20C). More specifically, among the holding images P set in correspondence with the expected degree of jackpot, the holding image P on the side with the lower expected degree of jackpot changes from the holding image P on the higher side. Therefore, as a player, when the special hold notice starts, the time display image Gp becomes “00.00” by the end, that is, the game of the hold information that is the target after the special hold notice starts. It is expected that the period until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends (switches to the low-speed fluctuation display) will be as long as possible. Therefore, even if the fluctuation display time of one game time becomes long, it is possible to reduce discomfort given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently perform an effect during one game, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  On the other hand, if the special condition is not satisfied, that is, the time display image Gp is “00. If it is not “00”, the holding image P does not change. Hereinafter, processing when special conditions are not satisfied will be described. This process is performed as a part of the variable display control process for controlling the effects during the game. Therefore, first, the variable display control process will be described, and then the process when the special condition is not satisfied will be described.

<Variable display control processing>
The variable display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the variation display of the symbols for one game is started on the symbol display device 41 and transmitted from the main control device 81. When the change end command is received, a process of displaying the symbol change display as the final stop display (definite stop display) is executed.

  That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, it is determined in step S2501 whether or not one game is being executed. If one game time is not being executed, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not a change command has been received. If the change command has not been received, the change display control process is terminated as it is. If the change command has been received, the change start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S2503.

  In the variation start process, information on presence / absence of reach, variation display time information, and game result information is grasped based on the command received from the main control device 81, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 242. . And based on the grasped information, the stop result of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in the current game round is set. Specifically, when five effective lines L1 to L5 are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 and one of the jackpot results is obtained, the combination of the jackpot symbol is set on any of the effective lines. Set the stop result so that the stop is displayed. In addition, if the reach is displayed even if it is not a jackpot result, the combination of reach symbols is stopped on any active line, and a symbol different from the reach symbol is displayed on the effective line. Set the stop result to stop. Further, when reach display is not performed, the stop result is set so that the combination of reach symbols is not stopped and displayed on any active line. Then, the address information corresponding to the set stop result is read from the stop information table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the address information is stored in the stop information address storage area of the RAM 244.

  In addition, in the variation start process, an effect pattern for the current game time is also set. In this effect pattern setting process, referring to the effect pattern table provided in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, the information on the variable display time in the current game round and the address information stored in the stop information address storage area The effect pattern corresponding to both of the above is specified and set as the effect pattern in the current game round. Then, based on the information on the stop result and the information on the effect pattern, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are started to be controlled, and a command including these pieces of information is output to the display control device 212 to display the display control device. 212 is controlled to execute display effects for game times.

  In step S2501, in the variation display control process, if one game is being executed, it is determined in step S2104 whether a variation end command has been received. If the variation end command has not been received, the variation display control processing is terminated after executing the variation processing in step S2105. If the change end command has been received, the change end control process is terminated after the change end process is executed in step S2106. In the process for ending the change, a process for ending the game number by ending the variable display in the game number and executing a notification corresponding to the game result and erasing various counters and flags set during the game number. Execute.

  The process in the case where the special condition is not satisfied in the special hold notice is performed in the above-described changing process. Therefore, the fluctuating processing will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2601, it is ascertained whether or not it is the change start timing of all symbol sequences. Incidentally, the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are provided with an elapsed time counter for grasping the elapsed time from the start of the game times, and at the start of the game times (more specifically, at the start of the variation start process). The update of the elapsed time counter is started. The effect pattern determined in the variation start process is associated with the information of the elapsed time counter, and the MPU 242 can specify the execution timing of various effects by referring to the elapsed time counter. it can. In step S2601, it is determined from the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern in the game time being executed whether or not it is a change start timing. In the following description, in the process of determining whether or not it is the execution timing of each effect, the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern are referred to as in the process of step S2601.

  If it is the start timing of the variation of all symbol sequences, the high-speed variation start process for all symbol sequences is executed in step S2602. In this process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the start of high-speed fluctuation display, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the high-speed fluctuation display of all symbol rows is performed on the symbol display device 41. To start. After executing the process of step S2602, the mid-variation process is terminated.

  If it is not the change start timing of all symbol sequences in step S2601, it is determined in step S2603 whether it is the deceleration timing of the upper symbol sequence Z1. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration processing for the upper symbol row Z1 is executed in step S2604, and then the mid-variation processing is terminated. In the deceleration process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the upper symbol row Z1, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the symbol display device 41 has the upper symbol row Z1. Change the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

  If it is not the deceleration timing of the upper symbol row Z1 in step S2603, it is determined in step S2605 whether it is the deceleration timing of the lower symbol row Z3. If it is a deceleration timing, a deceleration process for the lower symbol row Z3 is executed in step S2606. In the deceleration process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the lower symbol row Z3, and a command is output to the display control device 212, whereby the symbol display device 41 has the lower symbol row Z3. Change the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

  After the deceleration process of the lower symbol row Z3 is executed in step S2606, the special pending notice process is executed in step S2607, and the changing process is terminated. The special hold notice process will be described later in detail.

  If it is not the deceleration timing of the lower symbol row Z3 in step S2605, it is determined in step S2608 whether it is the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2. If it is a deceleration timing, the middle symbol sequence Z2 is decelerated in step S2609, and then the changing middle processing is terminated. In the deceleration process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the deceleration of the middle symbol row Z2, and a command is output to the display control device 212. Change the fluctuation display from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

  If it is not the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S2608, it is determined in step S2610 whether it is the stop timing of the upper symbol row Z1. In the case of the stop timing, after the stop process of the upper symbol row Z1 is executed in step S2611, the changing process is ended. In the stop process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the upper symbol row Z1, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the symbol display device 41 has the upper symbol row Z1. Stop the fluctuation display.

  If it is not the stop timing of the upper symbol row Z1 in step S2610, it is determined in step S2612 whether it is the stop timing of the lower symbol row Z3. If it is a stop timing, after the stop process for the lower symbol row Z3 is executed in step S2613, the mid-variation process is terminated. In the stop process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the lower symbol row Z3, and a command is output to the display control device 212. Stop the fluctuation display.

  If it is not the stop timing of the lower symbol row Z3 in step S2612, it is determined in step S2614 whether it is the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2. If it is the stop timing, the middle symbol sequence Z2 is stopped in step S2615, and then the mid-variation processing is terminated. In the stop process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the middle symbol row Z2, and a command is output to the display control device 212, so that the symbol display device 41 changes the middle symbol row Z2 of the middle symbol row Z2. Stop the fluctuation display.

  If it is not the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S2614, in step S2616, the processing for various effects being changed is executed, and then the changing processing is ended.

  Here, in the fluctuation display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the time from when the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display until it stops, that is, the time during which the low-speed fluctuation display is performed is basically determined in advance. It's time. Specifically, it is a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec) except for the period during which the low-speed fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is performed in the reach display. In the low-speed fluctuation display, the player can clearly grasp the changing pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp to some extent which symbol stops on which line at the timing when the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display. Therefore, the player can grasp whether or not the lower symbol row Z3 is a low-speed fluctuation display and a reach line is formed with the upper symbol row Z1, that is, whether or not a reach display occurs. It can be said that it is the timing when the people are highly interested. Therefore, since it is configured to determine the special condition of the special reservation notice at this timing, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player is overlooked due to his eyes being overlooked. In addition, since it is a timing that attracts attention every game in this way, this timing (timing for switching the lower symbol row Z3) is a certain level for the player even if he / she does not see the variation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is thought that it is possible to grasp. Therefore, it can be said that the situation where the determination of the special condition is overlooked is further suppressed.

  Next, the special reservation notice process in step S2607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2701, it is determined whether a special hold notice is being executed. If it is not being executed, the special hold notice process is terminated. If the special reservation notice is being executed, it is determined in the subsequent step S2702 whether or not the current game number is a game time subject to the special reservation notice being executed. If it is not the target game time, the special hold notice process is terminated. If it is the target game time, it is determined in subsequent step S2703 whether or not an elapsed flag is stored, that is, whether or not a special condition is satisfied. When the elapsed flag is stored, the special condition is satisfied even for the game times subject to the special hold notice, and the hold image P is displayed in the hold display process (FIG. 37). Processing for changing is performed. Therefore, when the elapsed flag is stored, the special hold notice process is terminated as it is. In this case, since the holding image has already changed, the special holding notice process may be ended after the display of the time display area GE is ended.

  When the elapsed flag is not stored, that is, when the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is finished without special conditions being established in the game times of the hold information subject to the special hold notice, step S2704 is executed. After executing the special hold notice end process at, the special hold notice process is finished. In this end process, a subtraction end flag is stored to stop subtraction of the timer counter T. Thereby, in the timer management process (FIG. 35), the timer subtraction process (step S2203) is not performed, and the subtraction of the timer counter T is stopped.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as the end process of step S2704, the subtraction of the timer counter T is stopped, while the display of the time display image Gp in the time display area GE is continuously displayed as it is. Therefore, as the time display image Gp, an image indicating the time when the subtraction of the timer counter T stops is displayed as it is (see FIG. 20C). Therefore, the player can know that the special condition has not been met even after the subtraction is completed (after the special hold notice ends), although the predetermined set time is subtracted in the special hold notice. . In other words, even after the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 has been completed in the game times that are subject to the special hold notice, the special hold notice had been made until then, and the special conditions were not satisfied. And the time required until the special condition is established. By doing in this way, even if the special condition is not satisfied and the holding image P is not changed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game times while leaving the remnant.

  In other words, in the hold notice that is an effect corresponding to the hold information and is performed before the game time of the hold information, an effect that has a high expectation level as a result of the hold notice (a special hold notice in the present embodiment) If you set the, you can increase the degree of attention to the hold notice, but if the production with a high expectation level of the jackpot branches to an off-stage production, for example at the branching point during the production (this embodiment is special When the condition is not satisfied, the degree of attention to the game times of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice as well as the hold notice may be extremely reduced.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if it is a case where the branching to the off-site effect is branched as a branching point during the production, an index indicating how much the branch has branched to the winning side effect (in this embodiment, The remaining time of a predetermined set time is displayed. In other words, by not only branching to the hit side and off side at the branch point on production, but also displaying the degree of ease and difficulty of branching to the hit side at the branch point even after that branch, It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation even when branching to the off-side, and it is possible to suppress the degree of attention from being extremely lowered thereafter.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied after a predetermined set time has elapsed, a special hold notice is set to change the hold image P as a privilege to the player. As a result, the special display condition is satisfied after a predetermined set time has elapsed in the situation where the special hold notice is being made, that is, the variable display time of the game times executed in the situation where the special hold notice is being made. Players expect a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game times from being felt redundant due to a long variation display time during the game times.

  In particular, in this gaming machine, an effect is set in which the game result is predicted before the end of the game round using the type of the holding image P as the holding notice. Therefore, in the game times that are predicted to be a result of losing due to this hold notice, even if a reach display is made, the player does not expect much from it and is regarded as a mere waiting time for digestion. There is also a possibility that. Therefore, by associating the special condition in the special hold notice with the variable display time as in the above configuration, it becomes possible to contribute to the establishment of the special condition even when the time is often regarded as simply waiting for digestion. It can be avoided that the degree of attention is extremely reduced.

  In the above-described configuration, the special condition notice (the time display image Gp in the time display area GE) is displayed as a special hold notice so that the player can grasp the easiness of the special condition and the process of establishment. it can. By doing so, the relationship between the special condition and the variable display time can be clearly understood, and the effect of avoiding the disadvantage caused by the long variable display time can be suitably achieved.

  In particular, since the time display image Gp is configured to be updated with the passage of time, it is possible to clearly grasp the process of changing the possibility (establishment probability) of the special condition. Can be entertained. Since the time display image Gp is configured to be updated and displayed from the start to the end of the special hold notice, it is possible to entertain the establishment possibility at the longest.

  When the special condition is not satisfied in the special hold notice, the remaining time at the determination time of the special condition (the end point of the high-speed fluctuation display) is displayed as the time display image Gp even after the special hold notice ends. Therefore, even if the special condition is not satisfied, the player can clearly understand how long the special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied a little later, Since not only the result that there was no result but also a regretful level is displayed, it is possible to leave the remnant of the special reservation notice and prevent the expectation from being extremely lowered.

  In the special hold notice, the predetermined setting time is set based on the hold information digested before the hold information that is the target as well as the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. did. By doing in this way, not only the hold information which is the object in the special hold notice, but also other hold information can be given interest, and each degree of attention can be suitably increased.

  Processing to grasp the change display time of the game times related to the hold information digested before the hold information subject to the special hold notice before the start of the game times related to the hold information digested earlier ( By providing the timer input process at the time specifying pattern), it is possible to suitably execute the special hold notice effect using the length of the variable display time.

  On the other hand, the variation display time of the game times related to the hold information digested before the hold information subject to the special hold notice changes depending on the game situation (for example, the number of holds) at the start of the game turn. obtain. In other words, a hold number correspondence pattern and a hold number non-correspondence pattern are set for the variable display time of game times, and in the case of a hold number correspondence pattern, it is difficult to grasp the change display time first. . Therefore, when the hold information digested earlier includes the hold information corresponding to the hold number correspondence pattern, the variable display time is not specified. As a result, in the production using the variable display time, it is possible to avoid as much as possible the occurrence of inconvenience in production due to the fact that the previously specified variable display time is different from the actual time.

  Here, the privilege based on the establishment of the special condition in the special reservation notice (change of the image P for reservation) is a privilege on production, and does not relate to the direct profit of the player such as a ball. That is, for example, the special condition may not be satisfied when the hold information subject to the special hold notice is a jackpot result, and the special condition is not satisfied when the hold information that is the target is an outlier result. It may be established, and vice versa, it does not affect the player's direct interests. Therefore, the success or failure of the special condition may not be determined at the start of the special hold notice, and it is not necessary to grasp all the variable display times at the start of the special hold notice as described above. Therefore, when the above-described hold information digested includes a hold number correspondence pattern, the special condition setting time is set without grasping the variable display time. In other words, regardless of the game result of the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice, the special that was set at the start of the special hold notice depends on the game status (the acquisition status of the hold information) that is executing the special hold notice. The success or failure of the conditions will be different. By doing this, the impression that the success or failure of the special condition is determined according to the game situation is strengthened, and it is suppressed that the attention level is extremely lowered in the middle like the so-called race where the result is determined first. It becomes possible.

  In the special hold notice, the special condition is set mainly based on hold information different from the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. By doing in this way, it becomes possible not only to hold information targeted in the special hold notice, but also to hold other hold information, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in a balanced manner Become.

  In this case, since the variable display time of the other hold information can be set after the start of the special hold notice as described above, it can be said that the probability of establishment of the special condition can also be set after the start of the special hold notice. . For this reason, in the special hold notice, not only the initial stage such as the start time but also attention can be paid at other timings.

  Furthermore, as a method of subtracting the remaining time of the predetermined set time for special conditions, in addition to the default subtraction that is a regular subtraction, as a method of changing the remaining time in the middle, subtraction at shift or specific timing subtraction is used. Provided. If only the above-mentioned default subtraction is used, at the beginning of the special hold notice or at the midway stage, depending on the player, it is determined from experience whether the special condition is easily established based on the number of hold information and the current remaining time. It can also be possible. In such a case, the degree of attention to the special reservation notice may be extremely reduced. In view of this, by including a pattern in which a group of times are subtracted at an unexpected timing, such as subtraction at the time of shift or specific timing subtraction, it becomes possible to keep interest in the special reservation notice until the end.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the subtraction patterns of the set time in the special reservation notice, the shift subtraction configuration is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the subtraction process at the time of shift according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the processing in step S2301 in the first embodiment, it is determined in step S2801 whether or not a shift winning flag is stored. If the shift winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, a process of grasping the hold image P that is shifted to the execution display area Gb in the current shift is executed. In step S2803, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform subtraction processing during the current shift.

  In step S2803, a shift lottery table is acquired from the ROM 243, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the subtraction process. After the processing of step S2803 is executed, the processing at step S2804 to step S2809 is executed similarly to the processing of step S2303 to step S2308 in the first embodiment, and the subtraction processing at the time of shifting is ended.

  In the lottery table at the time of shift in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the game result of the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice, the number of holds after the shift, and the current execution display area Gb are shifted. The holding image P defines the probability of subtraction and the subtraction time for subtraction. Specifically, when compared with the holding image P that is shifted to the execution display area Gb, the holding image P having a lower jackpot expectation level is shifted than the holding image P having a higher jackpot expectation level is shifted. However, the probability of performing subtraction is set higher regardless of the game result. This probability is set to be higher when the game result is a jackpot result than when the game result is an outlier result.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation display time of each game time is basically set according to the jackpot expectation level, and is set so that the fluctuation display time can be longer as the jackpot expectation degree becomes higher. ing. Further, as already described, the holding image P is set so that a different image is displayed according to the expected degree of jackpot. Therefore, in the game times corresponding to the holding image P on the side where the degree of expectation of jackpot is low, basically, the variable display time is shortened. In other words, if there is a game number corresponding to the holding image P on the side where the jackpot expectation is low in the situation where the special hold notice is being performed, not only can this be expected to be a jackpot result in this game number, There is a high possibility that the variation display time of the game times is short, and the rate of contribution because the special condition is satisfied is also low. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by increasing the probability that subtraction at the time of shift is performed when a game time corresponding to such a holding image P with a low jackpot expectation is executed, at least in a special holding notice, a special condition is required. Can be easily established. In this way, when a special hold notice is made, the degree of attention to the special hold notice will be drastically reduced even if the expectation of the jackpot of the hold information digested before that is low. Can be avoided.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of subtraction during shift is increased when the variable display time is short, but the subtraction time when subtraction during shift is performed may be increased. Further, the special condition may be easily established by increasing the subtraction speed of the default subtraction. Even if it does in this way, there can exist an effect similar to the above.

  Also, contrary to the above configuration, the longer the variation display time, the higher the probability that subtraction will be performed during shift, the subtraction time when subtraction during shift is performed, or the subtraction speed is increased, Special conditions may be easily established. In this case, in addition to the effect due to the long variation display time, the special condition is more easily established, which is preferable for the player.

  Further, the special condition may be made difficult to be established by reducing the probability that subtraction is performed, shortening the subtraction time when subtraction is performed, or slowing the subtraction speed. By setting such a case, even if it is predicted that the special condition will be established at the initial stage of the special hold notice, it is possible to prevent the special hold notice from being established. It is possible to keep a close eye on.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the special hold notice is executed when the change display time of the hold information can be specified. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the special mode is in effect. As this special mode, in the present embodiment, the special mode is set during the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the special mode flag is stored in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. This special mode flag is stored when the high frequency support mode is set (step S903, step S906) in the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode (FIG. 15), and when the low frequency support mode is set (game number counter). Is deleted). When the special mode flag is stored or erased, a command including the information is output from the main control device 81 side to the effect control device 82 side. Thereby, it is possible for the effect control device 82 side to grasp that it is in the special mode.

  If it is determined in step S2901 that the special mode flag is not stored, in steps S2902 to S2905, the same processing as in steps S701 to S704 is executed, and the variable display time setting process is ended. To do.

  If it is determined in step S2901 that the special mode flag is stored, the variable display time table in the special mode is acquired in step S2906, and the process proceeds to step S2905. As shown in FIG. 44, the variable display time table in the special mode is set such that the hold number correspondence pattern is not set and the hold number non-correspondence pattern is selected in any case. . That is, in the special mode, the variable display time may be specified before the start of the game time of the hold information based on the information (game result, reach random number counter C3, change type counter CS) at the time of acquisition of the hold information. It is possible.

  The hold control command handling process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the processes in steps S3001 to S3003 are executed in the same manner as the processes in steps S1201 to S1203 in the first and second embodiments. In step S3004, it is determined whether the special mode is being performed. If it is in the special mode, the process proceeds to step S3005, and it is determined whether or not the hold notice counter YK is less than “3” as in the process of step S1204. If it is less than “3”, special hold notice setting processing is executed in step S3006.

  In the special hold advance notice setting process in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, it is determined in step S3101 whether or not the hold command received this time corresponds to any jackpot result. If it is any jackpot result, the special hold notice setting process is terminated after executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified in step S3102. If it is determined in step S3101 that the result is not a jackpot result but a loss result, an effect setting process at the time of loss is executed in step S3103, and then the special hold notice setting process is terminated. The effect setting process when the time can be specified and the effect setting process when the time is off are as shown in FIGS.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice is executed in a situation where the variable information display time of the hold information can be specified. No processing is required for the case where holding information is included), and the processing configuration can be simplified. In a configuration in which the variable display time of game times is used for a hold notice, if this variable display time can be specified in advance, a hold notice corresponding to that can be set in advance. An extreme increase in processing load can be avoided. Therefore, if the special hold notice is made in the special mode where the variable display time can be specified in advance as in the above configuration, the special hold notice effect can be set in advance in any case. preferable.

  On the other hand, if all of these effects are set in advance, there will be no room for the effects to change depending on the subsequent game situation. There is also a possibility that the degree will be extremely lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice is executed when the time can be specified as described above, but when the time is used directly (timer input processing at the time specifying pattern) and so on. By setting the case where there is no (timer input processing at the time of normal pattern), it is possible to prevent the result from being grasped in advance from the contents of the production.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the hold information includes the hold information corresponding to the hold count correspondence pattern at the start of the special hold notice, a predetermined set time is set with the change display time as a temporary change display time.

  The hold control command handling process in this embodiment is substantially the same as the hold control command handling process (FIG. 19) in the first and second embodiments, and only the configuration of the special hold notice setting process is different. . The special hold advance notice setting process in the present embodiment is the same process as the special hold advance notice setting process (FIG. 46) in the third embodiment.

  Here, even when the time specifying pattern is selected as the effect pattern for the special hold notice in the effect setting process when the time can be specified (FIG. 24), unlike the third embodiment, the change in the hold information The case where the display time cannot be specified in advance (when the pattern is a pending number correspondence pattern) is included. Therefore, in the present embodiment, with respect to the hold information of the hold number correspondence pattern, the effect is set by specifying the change display time as the temporary change display time.

  That is, in the variable display time table in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, reach non-occurrence B and normal reach B are included as the hold number correspondence pattern, and a temporary variable display time corresponding to these is set. ing. In this case, the temporary variation display time is set to the time that can be actually set or less, more specifically, the shortest time that can be actually set. For this reason, even if such provisional variable display time is incorporated into the predetermined set time in the special hold notice, the success or failure of the final special condition is not affected. In other words, the hold information corresponding to the hold count correspondence pattern has the shortest temporary change display time regardless of whether the actual change display time is set to the longest time or the shortest time is set. Since time is set, the success or failure of special conditions is not affected. By doing in this way, it is a configuration in which the difference in the variable display time can occur due to the difference between the grasp timing of the variable display time for setting the effect of the hold notice and the actual variable display time setting timing. However, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience in the production setting.

  In this embodiment, the temporary variation display time is set to be equal to or less than the time that can be actually set, but after being set to be equal to or longer than the time that can be actually set, the pending control command response processing May be changed as follows.

  That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, the processing of step S3201 to step S3208 is executed similarly to the processing of step S1201 to step S1208. If it is determined in step S3201 that a hold command has not been received, it is determined in step S3209 whether a shift command has been received. If it has been received, in step S3210, a secondary hold storage is performed. Subtraction processing of the number SN is performed. In step S3211, it is determined whether the hold information shifted to the current execution area AE is the hold information corresponding to the hold number correspondence pattern as the adjustment process at the time of shifting. If it is not the reserved number correspondence pattern, it is determined in step S3212 whether or not a shift subtraction flag is stored. If it is stored, a shift subtraction process is executed in step S3213. If it is the pending number correspondence pattern in step S3211, the shift time subtraction process is executed in step S3213 regardless of the presence or absence of the shift time subtraction flag. After the execution of the process of step S3213, the shift process is executed in the same manner as the process of step S1213 in step S3214, and then the hold control command response process is terminated.

  In the subtraction process at the time of shift in step S3213, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, it is determined in step S3301 whether or not the pattern corresponds to the number of holdings as in step S3211. When the pattern is not the hold count correspondence pattern, the processing of step S3302 to step S3309 is executed in the same manner as the processing of step S2301 to step S2308. If it is determined in step S3301 that the pattern is a hold number correspondence pattern, the process advances to step S3310 to determine whether a special hold notice is being executed.

  If the special hold notice is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3311, and it is determined whether or not the variable display time is shortened from the temporarily displayed change display time in the special hold notice as described above. The fluctuation display time can be grasped by referring to the value of the secondary reserved storage number SN, and it can be determined whether or not the fluctuation display time has been shortened from the temporarily set fluctuation display time. . Note that when a shift command is output from the main control device 81, a variation command is also output. Therefore, the actual variation display time may be determined based on the variation command.

  If it is determined in step S3311 that the time has been shortened, in step S3312, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the shortened time from the timer counter T is executed as a timer subtraction process. In step S3313, the subtraction time command including the subtraction time and the information of the timer counter T after the subtraction is output to the display control device 212, and then the process proceeds to step S3308. If a negative determination is made in step S3310 or step S3311, the subtraction process at the time of shift is terminated.

  As described above, even when the effect is set as the temporary variable display time when the special hold notice is set, the inconvenience in effect occurs by performing subtraction at the time of the shift as a post-adjustment means. You can avoid that.

  Since this adjustment means is a subtraction during shift that can occur even during normal times, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player during adjustment, and it is also necessary to provide a new process as the adjustment means. It is also possible to suppress the complexity of the processing configuration.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the subtraction method of the timer counter T is different from that of the above embodiment. Hereinafter, different configurations will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart for explaining timer management processing in the present embodiment.

  In the timer management process in this embodiment, the processes in steps S3401 to S3415 are executed in the same manner as the processes in steps S2201 to S2215 in the above embodiments. If it is determined in step S3413 that neither the tail specific change flag and the one-shot reverse flag are stored, or if it is determined in step S3414 that the timing is not the specific change timing and the one-shot reverse effect, After performing the subtraction value adjustment process in step S3416, the timer management process is terminated.

  Here, in the subtraction process of default subtraction (step S3404) in the present embodiment, a subtraction value (subtraction width) can be set in one process. In step S3404, a process of subtracting the set subtraction value from the timer counter T is performed. In the subtraction value adjustment process in step S3416, this subtraction value is set. Note that the normal subtraction value is “1” as in the above embodiments.

  The subtraction value adjustment processing in step S3416 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the currently executed game number is the game number of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501 and the game time of the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice, the process proceeds to step S3502, and whether or not the adjusted flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. Determine whether. The adjusted flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to specify that the subtraction value has already been adjusted in the game time. If the adjusted flag is stored, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is.

  If the adjusted flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3503. In step S3503, processing for grasping the remaining time (set remaining time) of a predetermined set time is executed. Specifically, the current value of the timer counter T is grasped. In the subsequent step S3504, processing for grasping the remaining time (actual remaining time) until the end of the high-speed fluctuation display in the current game round is executed. Specifically, referring to the address information of the effect pattern for game times, the time required until the end of the high-speed fluctuation display is grasped. In step S3505, the set remaining time grasped in step S3503 is compared with the actual remaining time grasped in step S3504, and the value (S1) obtained by subtracting the actual remaining time from the set remaining time is 0. Whether the set remaining time is longer than the actual remaining time.

  The case where S1 is larger than 0 in step S3505 is a case where the set remaining time is longer than the actual remaining time and the specific condition is not satisfied even if the default subtraction is performed as it is. In that case, it progresses to step S3506 and a subtraction value increase lottery process is performed. In this process, a lottery table is acquired from the ROM 243, and a lottery counter is acquired from the RAM 244 to increase the subtraction value (usually “1”) of the timer counter T in one processing round in the default subtraction. A lottery of whether or not is executed.

  In this embodiment, the winning probability is set to be different depending on the game result of the hold information that has been triggered by the special hold notice. Specifically, the winning probability is 30%, and the result is a missed result. In this case, it is set to win the subtraction value increase lottery with a probability of 10%. The winning probability may be set differently depending on the length of S1. For example, if the winning probability is higher as S1 is longer, the unexpectedness when the specific condition is satisfied can be enhanced. Conversely, if the winning probability is higher as S1 is shorter, the situation in which the specific condition is satisfied can be relieved (the specific condition is satisfied by increasing the subtraction value).

  After the subtraction value increase lottery process is executed in step S3506, it is determined in step S3507 whether or not the subtraction value increase lottery is won based on the processing result of step S3506. If not, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated. If it is elected, the process proceeds to step S3508. In step S3508, it is determined whether the value (S2) obtained by further subtracting the actual remaining time from S1 is greater than 0, that is, whether the set remaining time is longer than twice the actual remaining time. When S2 is larger than 0 in step S3508, in step S3509, the value (S3) obtained by further subtracting the actual remaining time from S2 becomes larger than 0, that is, the set remaining time is 3 of the actual remaining time. It is determined whether it is longer than twice. If S3 is smaller than 0 in step S3509, that is, if the set remaining time is 2 to 3 times the actual remaining time, the process proceeds to step S3510, and the subtraction value for subtraction is set to “3”. Execute the process. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, a process of subtracting "3" from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed for the predetermined set time is changed to a speed that is three times higher than that.

  If S2 is 0 or less in step S3508, that is, if the set remaining time is 1 to 2 times the actual remaining time, the process proceeds to step S3511 and the subtraction value for subtraction is set to “2”. Execute the process. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, a process of subtracting "2" from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed for the predetermined set time is changed to a speed twice that of the previous speed.

  After performing the process of step S3510 or step S3511, it progresses to step S3512, and after performing a timer effect change process, a subtraction value adjustment process is complete | finished. In this timer effect changing process, a command including information on the subtraction value changed in step S3510 or step S3511 is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command controls the symbol display device 41 so that the notification mode of the set time by the time display image Gp in the time display region GE becomes a different notification mode from the previous notification mode.

  Specifically, as the different notification modes, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), a start and a goal are displayed, and a preset character moves with a vehicle from the start toward the goal. Do. If the character reaches the goal by the time the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, the special condition is satisfied and the holding image P changes to a different image. If the character does not reach the goal, the special condition is satisfied. It shall not be established. If the subtraction value is set to “3” in step S3510, the vehicle is set as a rocket (FIG. 52 (a1)), and the subtraction value is set to “2” in step S3511. The vehicle is set to be a motorcycle (FIG. 52 (a2)). In other words, depending on the type (speed) of the vehicle, it is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation to reach the goal (expected expectation of establishment of special conditions).

  By doing this, even if the set remaining time is clearly longer than the actual remaining time, by leaving the possibility that the special condition can be satisfied, the special condition is quickly given up. It is possible to suppress a reduction in the degree of attention. In this case, the success or failure of the special condition that the character from the start to the goal moves is notified by the display of the relative distance from the mode in which the success or failure of the special condition is notified by the absolute time display as in the time display image Gp. Therefore, even if the speed at which the set time is advanced is changed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels uncomfortable.

  If S3 is larger than 0 in step S3509, that is, if the set remaining time is longer than three times the actual remaining time, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is. That is, in this case, the subtraction value is not adjusted. This is because if the special condition is satisfied by adjusting the subtraction value even if the set remaining time and actual remaining time are too far apart, in the first place, the degree of attention to this special pending notice may decrease. This is a device for avoiding a reduction in the degree of attention.

  If it is determined in step S3505 that S1 is not greater than 0, that is, if the actual remaining time is longer than the set remaining time, the process proceeds to step S3513. The case where the process proceeds to step S3513 is a case where a special condition is satisfied. In step S3513, it is determined whether or not the absolute value of S1 is equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (for example, a value corresponding to 2 sec). If the absolute value of S1 is less than the set value, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is.

  If the absolute value of S1 is greater than or equal to the set value, that is, if the actual remaining time is longer than the set remaining time and the difference is greater than or equal to the set value (2 sec), the process proceeds to step S3514. In step S3514, a subtraction value reduction lottery process is executed. In this process, a lottery table is acquired from the ROM 243, and a lottery counter is acquired from the RAM 244, and the subtraction value (usually “1”) of the timer counter T in one process is reduced in the default subtraction. A lottery of whether or not is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability is set so as to differ depending on the game result of the hold information that has been triggered by the special hold notice. Specifically, the winning result is 10%, and the result is a missed result. In this case, it is set to win the subtraction value reduction lottery with a probability of 30%. The winning probability may be set differently depending on the length of S1. For example, the longer the S1 is, the higher the winning probability is, so that it is possible to prevent the specific condition from being established earlier, and conversely, the shorter the S1 is, the higher the winning probability is. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the last specific condition is satisfied by shortening the difference between the set remaining time and the actual remaining time.

  After the subtraction value reduction lottery process is executed in step S3514, it is determined in step S3515 whether or not the subtraction value reduction lottery is won based on the processing result of step S3514. If not, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated. If it is elected, the process proceeds to step S3516. In step S3516, it is determined whether the value (S4) obtained by subtracting the set remaining time from the absolute value of S1 is greater than 0, that is, whether the actual remaining time is longer than twice the set remaining time. If S4 is larger than 0 in step S3516, that is, if the actual remaining time is longer than twice the set remaining time, a process of setting the subtraction value for subtraction to “0.5” in step S3517. Execute. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, a process of subtracting "0.5" from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed for the predetermined set time is changed to a speed that is 0.5 times the previous speed.

  If S4 is 0 or less in step S3516, that is, if the actual remaining time is 1 to 2 times the set remaining time, the process proceeds to step S3518, and the subtraction value for subtraction is set to “0.8”. Execute the setting process. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, a process of subtracting “0.8” from the timer counter T is performed. That is, the subtraction speed for the predetermined set time is changed to a speed that is 0.8 times the previous speed.

  After performing the process of step S3517 or step S3518, it progresses to step S3519, and after performing a timer effect change process, a subtraction place adjustment process is complete | finished. In this timer effect change process, a command including information on the subtraction value changed in step S3517 or step S3518 is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command controls the symbol display device 41 so that the notification mode of the set time by the time display image Gp in the time display region GE becomes a different notification mode from the previous notification mode.

  As the different notification modes, specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), a start and a goal are displayed, and an effect that a preset character moves on the vehicle from the start toward the goal is performed. If the character reaches the goal by the time the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, the special condition is satisfied and the holding image P changes to a different image. If the character does not reach the goal, the special condition is satisfied. It shall not be established. If the subtraction value is set to “0.5” in step S3517, the vehicle is set as a rocket. If the subtraction value is set to “0.8” in step S3518, the vehicle is set. Set the bike. That is, the same effect as when the subtraction value is increased is performed. However, if the subtraction value is set to “0.5” in step S3517, for example, a meteorite group appears between the start and the goal, and the speed of the rocket cannot be moved during that time. A slowing effect is performed (FIG. 52 (b1)). In addition, when the subtraction value is set to “0.8” in step S3518, for example, a gas station appears near the goal and refuels there, and the motorcycle stops immediately before the goal. Is produced (FIG. 52 (b2)).

  By doing this, even if the set remaining time is clearly shorter than the actual remaining time, leaving the possibility that the special condition will not be satisfied, the special reservation notice will be issued as the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the loss of attention to whereabouts. In this case, the success or failure of the special condition that the character from the start to the goal moves is notified by the display of the relative distance from the mode in which the success or failure of the special condition is notified by the absolute time display as in the time display image Gp. Therefore, even if the speed at which the set time is advanced is changed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels uncomfortable. Further, by associating with the effect in the case where the subtraction value is increased, it is possible to focus on which adjustment is performed among the increase and decrease of the subtraction value.

  Note that the execution timing of the process for reducing the subtraction value (steps S3514 to S3521) may be set to be earlier than the above. That is, as the timing earlier than the start timing of the game time of the hold information subject to the special hold notice, the hold information digested one time before the target hold information or the previous two times The processing for reducing the subtraction value may be performed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start) in the game times of the hold information. By doing in this way, it is possible to prolong the special condition that can be established quickly to the game number of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the said 1st-5th embodiment, it was set as the structure which performs the effect which changes the image P for hold | maintenance into the image for hold | maintenance with a high jackpot expectation as a privilege based on the special conditions being satisfied in the special hold notice. However, in this embodiment, the privilege to be granted is changed based on the fact that this special condition is satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, the character PM is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, lower right) in the display screen G separately from the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that perform variable display (see FIG. 53A). The character PM is involved in the performance of the game times and, for example, assists the same symbol as the reach symbol forming the reach line in the reach display to stop at the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2 (for example, the change destination side). To try to stop the fluctuation by pressing the design from).

  When the special condition is established in the special reservation notice of the present embodiment, the item A equipped with the character PM is displayed as a privilege given to the player (see FIG. 53B). It is displayed with the equipped. When the character PM equips this item A, the aspect that assists the reach symbol to stop on the reach line is different from the case where the character PM is not equipped (specifically, it becomes flashy). Done. Therefore, by equipping the character PM with this item A, the player can obtain a satisfaction that he / she customizes the reach display effect and can be more immersed in the game. Note that if the special condition is not satisfied in the special hold notice, the item A is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, an operation unit 75 that can be operated by the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12 (see FIG. 1). Output information that can be read by a portable terminal or the like included in is output. Further, by reading this output information with a portable terminal or the like, the information is stored in the portable terminal or the management server. Then, by inputting the stored information to the pachinko machine 10 via the operation unit 75, the character PM is displayed in a state corresponding to the stored information. Therefore, for example, from the start of the game, it is possible to display the character PM equipped with the item A with the special condition being established. The stored information can be used.

  The operation unit 75 is connected to the effect control device 82, and operation information of the operation unit is output to the effect control device 82. The operation unit 75 includes a rotation operation unit that can perform a rotation operation, for example. It can be selected. The operation unit 75 is provided with, for example, a ten o'clock key as an input unit for inputting information on the character PM. In the input state, a screen keyboard or the like is displayed on the display screen G, and it is possible to input character PM information (for example, an 8-digit password) by operating the cross key to move the cursor. ing. The configuration of the operation unit 75 is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

  Hereinafter, the process for operation performed by MPU242 of the production | presentation control apparatus 82 is demonstrated, referring the flowchart of FIG. The operation process is a part of the corresponding process for responding to the operation of the operation unit 75 activated in the MPU 242 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle). In the corresponding process, the output state or the input state is set. Is launched for. In this handling process, in addition to the operation process, for example, an effect process based on the operation of the operation unit 75 (for example, a process for performing an effect such as an action by the character PM or an attack by the item A), a special hold, etc. Processing for responding to the operation of the operation unit 75 in effects and settings other than the advance notice is performed.

  First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the operation unit 75 has been operated. In step S3601, once an operation is detected, an affirmative determination is made until processing based on the operation is completed. If an operation has been performed, the process advances to step S3602 to determine whether an operation for setting the output state has been performed (the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit corresponds to the direction for setting the output state). Determine. If it is an operation for setting the output state, the process advances to step S3603 to store the output state flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 and set the output state. In step S3603, information for output is grasped. That is, a process of grasping information on the item A that the character PM has is executed. In step S3604, an information output command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The information output command includes information indicating that the output state is set and information on the item A included in the character PM. The display control device 212 that has received the information output command receives the character from the character ROM 256. The code image CG (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) corresponding to the information of the item A included in the PM is read, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the code image CG on the display screen G (FIG. 53 ( c)).

  If it is determined in step S3602 that the operation is not an operation for setting the output state, the process advances to step S3605 to perform an operation for setting the input state (the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit is set to the input state). It corresponds to the direction to be performed). If it is an operation for setting to the input state, the process proceeds to step S3606, where the input state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 and set to the input state. In step S3607, an information input command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The information input command includes information indicating that the input state has been set, and the display control device 212 that has received the information input command receives an input state image (for example, code input) from the character ROM 256. The image display device 41 is controlled to display an image for the input state on the display screen G (see FIG. 53D).

  If it is determined in step S3601 that the operation is not performed, if it is determined in step S3605 that the operation is not an operation for setting the input state, or after the process of step S3604 or step S3607 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3608. . In step S3608, processing for determining whether or not the output state is in effect is performed by checking the output state flag. If it is in the output state, the process advances to step S3609 to determine whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 10 sec) has elapsed since the output state was set. When the output / input state is set in step S3603 or step S3606, updating of the timer counter that can grasp the passage of time is started. In step S3609, based on the fact that the value of the timer counter is numerical information corresponding to the predetermined time, it can be specified that the predetermined time has elapsed. If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the operation process is terminated as it is.

  If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process advances to step S3610 to execute state recovery processing. In this process, the output state flag is deleted in order to return from the output state to the normal state. In step S3611, the state return command is set as an output target to the display control device 212, and then the operation process is terminated. This state return command includes information indicating that the output state has returned to the normal state, and the display control device 212 that has received the state return command receives an image (character PM) corresponding to the normal state from the character ROM 256. The symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image on the display screen G.

  If it is determined in step S3608 that the output state is not set, the process advances to step S3612 to check whether or not the input state is set by checking the input state flag. If it is in the input state, the process advances to step S3613 to determine whether a predetermined time (for example, 20 sec) has elapsed since the input state was set, or whether an input operation has been performed. Determine whether. The timer counter is used for determining whether the predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, the input state and the output state are set to have a longer predetermined time in the input state. This is because when the time required for code input is compared with the time required for code reading, code input requires a larger amount of operation and is considered to require a long time. Whether or not an input operation has been performed can be determined by grasping a signal from the cross key in the operation unit 75. When the code input is a code with a plurality of digits, for example, when the operation unit 75 requires a plurality of operations, the predetermined time is extended for each operation. It is good to do. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the input state is released before the operation is completed when the operation is started near the lapse of the predetermined time.

  If it is determined in step S3613 that a predetermined time has elapsed or an input operation has been performed, a state recovery process is executed in step S3614. In this process, the input state flag is deleted in order to return from the input state to the normal state. In step S3615, the state return command is set as an output target to the display control device 212, and then the operation process ends. This command for returning the state includes information on the item A corresponding to the input code in addition to the information indicating that the state has returned from the input state to the normal state, and the display control device that has received the state return command 212 reads an image (such as an image of the character PM) corresponding to the normal state and the image of the item A from the character ROM 256 and controls the symbol display device 41 to display the image on the display screen G. This makes it possible for the character PM to play a game with the item A (see FIG. 53 (e)).

  As described above, if the special condition is established in the special reservation notice as in the present embodiment, if the player is given a certain benefit, the player is satisfied that the specific condition is satisfied, that is, the special reservation notice is issued. In order to expect a long display time of the game times to be executed during the period in which the game is being performed, even if the variable display time of the game times is long, it does not simply become redundant, and attention to the game It is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree.

  In addition, if a plurality of items A are set and which item A is given as a privilege by lottery or the like every time a specific condition is established, the pleasure of collecting the item A is also added, and the fun of the game is improved. More preferable from the viewpoint. In this case, as shown to Fig.55 (a), you may set so that the kind of item A provided may differ according to the difficulty (length of predetermined setting time) of specific conditions. By doing in this way, the rarity when a more difficult special condition is materialized can be raised and the pleasure which collects the item A can be increased.

  In addition, the type of item A to be given may be varied depending on the game times effect during execution of the special reservation notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), it may be configured to vary according to the number of stops of a specific symbol (for example, the main symbol with 7) in the game times during execution of the special hold notice. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to raise the degree of attention to the special reservation notice and the game times being executed.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, it was set as the structure from which the aspect of reach display differs because the character PM equips the item A, However, It is good also as a structure from which the establishment probability of special conditions changes. That is, for example, in a process that is activated at a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle) by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 as in the operation-corresponding subtraction process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, the special condition is adjusted based on the operation. Also good.

  Specifically, it is determined in step S3701 whether or not the special hold notice is being executed. If it is being executed, it is determined whether or not the operation unit 75 has been operated in step S3702. . If an operation has been performed, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not item A is displayed. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S3701 to S3703, the operation corresponding subtraction process is terminated as it is.

  If item A is displayed in step S3703, the process advances to step S3704 to execute processing for selecting the type of item A. In this process, for example, a selection screen for displaying the type of item A selected this time from a plurality of items A is displayed (see FIG. 55B). In this selection screen, the item A (including information input from the mobile terminal) assigned so far and the subtraction value information corresponding to the type of the item A are displayed. The subtraction value information is information on time to be subtracted from a predetermined set time among information set according to the type of item A, as shown in FIG. 55 (a). Note that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the variable display are reduced and displayed in an area that does not overlap the selection screen, for example. Then, the type of item A is selected based on the operation signal from the operation unit 75.

  In a succeeding step S3705, processing for grasping the subtraction value information of the selected item A is executed. In step S3706, the timer counter T is subtracted based on the subtraction value information grasped in step S3705. In step S3708, the subtraction command is displayed on the display controller 212, and the operation-corresponding subtraction process is terminated. The processing on the display control device 212 side that has received the subtraction command is as described above.

  In this way, by making it possible to reflect the item A as the granted privilege in the special conditions, not only the enjoyment of collecting the item A but also the enjoyment of using the item A is added. And, by using the item A, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the item A (reflected in special conditions). In other words, the success or failure of the special conditions can be used to make a game with chained fun, and it is possible to encourage more active participation in the game and be more immersed in the game.

  In this case, the information of item A may be configured to be deleted when used during the special reservation notice. By doing in this way, the willingness to collect further item A can be stimulated.

  Further, if the item A is not used in the current special reservation notice, the item A may be configured to hold its use until the next special reservation notice is executed. By doing in this way, for example, according to the special conditions in the special reservation notice, it is possible to consider whether or not to use the item A, and to devise the type of the item A to be used. Encourage participation.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which can hold | maintain the execution right of a special reservation notice. Specifically, for example, in the special reservation notice setting process, when the special reservation notice execution lottery is won, the right to execute the special reservation notice is obtained. When the execution right is obtained, a right image indicating that the right is being held is displayed on the display screen G, for example. Then, the execution right can be exercised at a timing intended by the player, and specifically, a special suspension notice can be executed based on the operation of the operation unit 75. In this way, a game situation in which special conditions are likely to be established in the special hold notice (for example, when there are a plurality of hold information or when the variable display time is expected to be long depending on the type of the hold image P, etc. ), Or when the player wants to obtain special benefits such as changes in the image P for hold or items A (type of hold information), the player will be able to leave the special hold notice to the player's will, and more actively participate in the game. Can be encouraged.

  The opportunity for obtaining the right to execute the special hold notice is not limited to the lottery at the time of receiving the hold command. An effect (for example, a premier effect) may be executed, or the number of executions of the predetermined effect may reach a predetermined number. In these cases, in the configuration for interlocking with the portable terminal or the like, the total number of times may be set. In this way, the right to execute a special reservation notice is obtained in various situations, and the game can be diversified.

  In addition, the special conditions of the special hold notice that is on hold may be set by a lottery, etc. at the time of acquisition of the rights, or depending on the game situation at the time of exercising the rights (at the start of the special hold notice) It is good also as a structure set like each embodiment. In the case of a configuration that is set at the time of acquiring the right, it is preferable that the player can grasp the special condition (predetermined set time) (for example, a configuration that displays the special condition in accordance with the right image). By doing so, it becomes possible to devise the timing of exercising rights. However, even if it is difficult or impossible to grasp the special conditions, it is possible to expect the effect of increasing the unexpectedness at the time of exercising the rights.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, it is configured that the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are distinguished from each other, and whether or not the holding information is based on winning to either one (for example, winning to the lower working port 34). The lottery is configured to be executed in preference to the determination of whether or not to hold the hold information based on the winning of the other.

  The configuration of the reserved ball storage area 232 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The reserved ball storage area 232 in the present embodiment includes a first result display area reservation area Ra provided as first acquisition information storage means, and a second result display area reservation area provided as second acquisition information storage means. Rb. The holding area Ra for the first result display unit displays the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33. This is a reserved area for storing in series. Note that the combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the first result display holding area Ra is the holding information related to the upper operating port 33. The hold information corresponds to special information in the present embodiment.

  In addition, the second result display section reservation area Rb displays the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the lower operating port 34. This is a reserved area for time series storage. Note that the combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the second result display area holding area Rb is the holding information related to the lower operating port 34. The hold information corresponds to special information in the present embodiment.

  Each of the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb includes four storage areas of a first area to a fourth area, and a reservation number storage area. Each storage area has a C1 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a C2 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a C3 storage for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. An area and a CS storage area for storing the value of the variation type counter CS are configured. With the four storage areas from the first area to the fourth area, a maximum of four game balls winning histories to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are held and stored.

  Then, in the winning process for the operating opening in the present embodiment (FIG. 7), when the winning to the upper operating opening 33 occurs, the reserved storage number RaN of the first result display area reservation area Ra is less than 4. Under certain conditions, the buffer values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS are stored in the corresponding storage areas. In addition, when a winning is made to the lower working port 34, the jackpot random number counter C1, The buffer values of the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS are stored.

  Further, although detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, in this embodiment, the main reserved light emitting unit 45 includes a light emitting unit for the upper working port 33 (first holding light emitting unit) and a light emitting unit for the lower working port 34 (first 2 on-hold light emission unit). The hold display area Ga on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 also includes a hold display area for the upper working port 33 (first hold display area) and a hold display area for the lower working port 34 (second hold display area). , Are set separately. Each holding light emitting unit is provided in four in correspondence with the maximum storage number of each holding storage number RaN, RbN, and each holding display area is also divided into four in correspondence with the maximum storage number.

  Each of the hold commands set in the winning process for the operating port includes information indicating which of the operating ports 33 and 34 is a hold command based on winning. Further, the storage area for holding 250 on the side of the effect control device 82 also includes a first storage area to a fourth storage area corresponding to the upper operation opening 33, and a first storage area to a fourth storage area corresponding to the lower operation opening 34. In the hold display control command handling process (FIG. 19), information related to hold information is stored in the corresponding storage area based on the receipt of each hold command. And the production | presentation control apparatus 82 which received the said hold command controls the corresponding hold light emission part corresponding to the increase in the number of hold memory. In the hold display area 271 of the display control device 212, the first unit area to the fourth unit area corresponding to the upper operation port 33 and the first unit area to the fourth unit area corresponding to the lower operation port 34 are set. ing. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute a process for displaying the hold image in the corresponding hold display area.

  Next, data setting processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the data setting process is a process executed at the start of each game time in the game time control process (FIG. 11).

  In the data setting process in the present embodiment, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S3802 to S3807 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S3808 to S3813.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed means that the first start reserved memory number RaN of the first result display portion reservation area Ra and the second start reservation storage number RbN of the second result display portion reservation area Rb. This is a case where the common hold number CRN which is the total number is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, is the first start pending storage number RaN 1 or more? Regardless of whether or not, the data stored in the second result display area Rb is set for variable display. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display portion reservation area Ra and the second result display portion reservation area Rb, the second result display portion reservation corresponding to the lower operation port 34 is performed. The hold information stored in the area Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display section, first, in step S3802, the number of reserved storages RaN in the first result display section reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S3803, 1 is subtracted from the common holding number CRN. Thereafter, in step S3804, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  After that, in step S3805, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area to the fourth area to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area.

  In a succeeding step S3806, a shift command is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the upper operating port 33. A shift command including information indicating that it corresponds is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S3807 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). In the effect control device 82, based on the received command at the time of shift, a process for changing the display on the first hold light emitting unit in accordance with the decrease in the hold number is executed. Furthermore, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute processing for changing the hold image in the corresponding hold display area.

  In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S3807, 1 is subtracted from the second start reserved memory number RbN of the second result display unit reserved area Rb. In subsequent step S3808, 1 is subtracted from the common holding number CRN. Thereafter, in step S2509, the data stored in the first area of the second result display section reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S3810, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area to the fourth area to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area.

  In the subsequent step S3811, a shift command is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203, it corresponds to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data shift corresponds corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the lower operation port 34. The command at the time of shift including the information indicating that the command is being performed is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S3811 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). In the effect control device 82, based on the received command at the time of shift, a process for changing the display on the second hold lamp unit in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold is executed. Furthermore, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute processing for changing the hold image in the corresponding hold display area.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the hold information based on the winning at the upper working port 33 is stored, the winning at the lower working port 34 is performed at a timing before the held information becomes a target of the determination of whether or not the winning is made. When this occurs, the hold information based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is the target of the determination of success / failure first. For example, when a special reservation notice is executed for the hold information based on the winning to the upper working port 33, when a winning to the lower working port 34 occurs, the time required for elapse of a predetermined set time increases. . That is, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes (becomes higher). In this way, the special hold notice is started by adopting a configuration in which the probability of establishment of the special condition can be changed based on the entry to the predetermined entry part (the lower operation port 34) that is executing the special hold notice. In this case, it is possible not only to watch the game, but also to continue the launch of the game ball actively to enter the specified entry area even during the special hold notice. It becomes.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, not only the hold information subject to the special hold notice but also the information on the variable display time of other hold information contributes to the establishment of the special condition in the special hold notice. In the embodiment, this is changed so that the effect during the game turn in the other hold information contributes to the establishment of the special condition in the special hold notice.

  That is, the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the game round contributes to the success or failure of the special condition in the special reservation notice. Specifically, a special condition is established when a special reservation notice is presented, such as a bingo game, when a predetermined symbol combination is presented and all or a part of the presented symbol combination is stopped in the game round To do. In this way, when a special reservation notice occurs, it is possible to draw attention to the stop symbol of each game time.

  Like the pachinko machine 10, the holding information that is the basis of the lottery is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry part (upper operation port 33 or lower operation port 34), and the hold information Can be stored up to a predetermined number, in addition to the game round effect corresponding to the lottery for each hold information, in addition to a hold notice for the hold information before the lottery (not only a special hold notice but also a hold image) If a production with a high expectation level for jackpots is generated in this hold notice, the degree of attention to the hold information corresponding to the production will increase, but other types of hold will be held. There is a possibility that the degree of attention to information about the game times will be reduced. Therefore, as described above, if a hold notice with a high expectation level for jackpots is generated, the special hold notice effect that is triggered by the hold notice will be associated with the stop symbol of the running game, By increasing the degree of attention to the special reservation notice, it is possible to increase the degree of attention not only to the reservation information that is the subject of the reservation notice but also to the game times effect for other reservation information.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration for associating success / failure of the special condition with the stop symbol of each game time in the special hold notice is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold notice (change of the image for hold) is used as a start opportunity. It is configured that a predetermined effect (special hold notice) is performed in the game times for the hold information other than the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice, and the success or failure of the special condition set in the given effect is determined as the hold What is necessary is just to set it as the structure determined based on hold information other than the hold information used as the object of notice.

  The success or failure of the special condition is related to the game result of the hold information as in the second embodiment, in addition to the stop pattern of each game time for the hold information other than the hold information subject to the hold notice. Or, it may be associated with the number of hold information as in the special hold notice table (for example, FIG. 27A or FIG. 33A) in each of the above embodiments, and the operation that triggered the hold information acquisition. It may be associated with the mouths 33 and 34. Moreover, you may link | relate with the acquisition timing of the holding information. The acquisition timing may be, for example, a difference in acquisition timing between the target hold information and other hold information, or a timing associated with an internal clock using RTC or the like.

  This specific configuration will be described below. 60 to 63 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the outline of the special reservation notice in the present embodiment.

  The special hold notice in this embodiment is started based on the acquisition of predetermined hold information, and is different from the game times related to the hold information that triggered the start (rather than the game times related to the hold information that triggered the start) The game is executed in a situation where a game time related to the hold information (which is a target of the success / failure determination before) is performed. And the success or failure of the special condition in the special reservation notice is determined using the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the game times.

  In this embodiment, as special reservation notice, a special effect A for playing a bingo game using the stop result of each game time and a special effect B for playing a lotto game using the stop result of each game time are provided. Yes. In special effects A and B, special effects A are set so that a special condition is established by a combination of three symbols, and special effects B is set so that a special condition is established by a combination of two symbols. In special production B, special conditions are more easily established than special production A.

  First, the special effect A will be described. As shown in FIG. 60A, it is assumed that the special effect A is started with the hold information about the hold image P2 (B) displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2. As already described, the hold image P2 (B) can be selected regardless of whether the game result is a jackpot result or a miss result, but it is determined that any one of the super reach A to C will be performed. It is an image for.

  In this special effect A, if bingo is established in the bingo game, a special condition is established, and a privilege is given to the player. Specifically, when the special effect A is performed, the bingo card 300 on which any number (symbol) of “1” to “9” is arranged, and the explanation unit 310 that explains the progress of the bingo game. Is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed on the upper display unit GU that is reduced in the upper part of the display screen G as an area that does not overlap with the bingo card 300 and the explanation unit 310, and the vertical symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Z3 is displayed side by side (upper symbol row Z1 is left symbol row Y1, middle symbol row Z2 is middle symbol row Y2, lower symbol row Z3 is right symbol row Y3). Also, the changing direction of each of the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 is changed so as to scroll from top to bottom. Each symbol row Y1 to Y3 stops in the order of the left symbol row Y1, the right symbol row Y3, and the middle symbol row Y2. In the embodiment, the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 are composed only of the main symbols (designated with numbers “1” to “9”), and the sub-designs (numbers “1” to “9” in the above embodiments). Designs not marked with are not included. The symbols (“1” to “9”) that stop in each symbol row Y 1 to Y 3 correspond to the numbers arranged in the cells in the bingo card 300.

  The contents (number array) of the bingo card 300 are determined by lottery or the like, and the special conditions are determined by the determined contents. That is, in the 9 square bingo card 300, a symbol corresponding to a combination of numbers in a total of 8 rows of 3 rows, 3 rows, and 2 diagonal rows corresponds to the special condition. In the bingo card 300 shown in FIG. 60A, a combination of “1”, “2”, “3”, a combination of “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8”, “9” ”,“ 1 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 2 ”,“ 5 ”,“ 8 ”,“ 3 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 9 ”,“ 1 ”, Each of the combination of “5”, “9” and “3”, “5”, “7” is a special condition. Each time the symbol stops in each game, the numeric cell corresponding to the stopped symbol switches to the established cell, and all the cells in any of the 8 columns switch to the established cell. By changing, it becomes a bingo and special conditions are established. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which a sub-symbol is included in the symbol row | line | columns Y1-Y3, and it can make it difficult to satisfy special conditions (bingo) in this case.

  In the present embodiment, even if the game round that has been switched to the established square is finished and the next game round is entered, the established square information is carried over as long as the special hold notice continues. . Therefore, the more the number of game times that are performed in a situation where the special hold notice is being executed, the more easily the special condition is established.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 60B, in the game times executed in a situation where the special effect A is being performed, the main symbols “5” and “8” from the left as the stop results of the symbol rows Y1 to Y3. ”And“ 6 ”are stopped, the numerical squares corresponding to these symbols on the bingo card 300 are displayed as established, for example, in a color different from that before establishment so that the player can identify before and after establishment. indicate. In the case of the bingo card 300 in FIG. 60 (b), when “5”, “8”, and “6” are displayed as established, the game times of this time are not bingo but the special condition is not established. A state before the condition is established (reach state) is the state immediately before the bingo is established. In the state before this condition is satisfied, if the symbol corresponding to “2” or “4” stops in the next game round, bingo is satisfied and a special condition can be satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60C, the fact that the condition is before the condition is established is displayed on the explanation unit 310 and the reach line is displayed on the bingo card 300 in an overlapping manner.

  In the next game round, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), when the main symbols “3”, “2”, “3” are stopped from the left as the stop result of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, For example, one piece of rare image data is given to the player as a privilege that the bingo is established by the symbol “2” and the special condition is established. In the next game round, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), when the main symbols “3”, “7”, and “9” are stopped from the left as the stop result of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, Three rows of bingo are formed by the left symbol “3” and the right symbol “9”. In this case, for example, rare image data is used so that the number of benefits granted to the player according to the number of established rows of bingo (the number of established special conditions) is increased (the benefits are more beneficial to the player). Give 3 sheets. On the other hand, in the next game round, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), when the main symbols “3”, “1”, “3” are stopped from the left as a result of stopping each symbol row Z1 to Z3, In this game round, no bingo is established, and there is no game round related to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination prior to the game round related to the hold information that triggered the start of the special hold notice. Assuming that the special condition is not satisfied, the special reservation notice (special effect A) is terminated. Then, the notification to that effect is performed by the explanation unit 310 (for example, a character display such as “sorry”, see FIG. 61C).

  In special effect B, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), if a lottery is established in the lottery game, a special condition is established, and a privilege is given to the player. Specifically, when the special effect B is performed, a lotto card 320 on which a plurality of numbers (designs) are arranged and an explanation unit 310 that explains the progress of the lotto card are displayed. In addition, about the description part 310, it is set as the structure shared with the thing of the special effect A. This is a device for reducing the storage capacity of the image data for presentation. In this case, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is reduced and displayed on the upper part of the display screen G as an area that does not overlap with the lotto card 320 and the explanation unit 310 (upper display unit GU).

  The contents (number arrangement) of the lotto card 320 are determined by lottery or the like, and the special conditions are determined by the determined contents. That is, in the two-lot lotto card 320, a symbol corresponding to a combination of two numbers corresponds to a special condition. In the lotto card 320 shown in FIG. 62A, the special condition is that the symbols “1” and “6” stop. Each time the symbol stops in each game round, the number cell corresponding to the stopped symbol is switched to the established cell, and both of the two cells of the lotto card 320 are switched to the established cell. The special condition is established.

  In the game times executed in a situation where the special effect B is being performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the stop results of the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 are the main symbols “1” and “6” from the left. In the case of “3”, “1” and “6” stop and become a lottery, a special condition is established, and for example, one piece of rare image data is given to the player as a privilege. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), if the main symbols “1,“ 8 ”,“ 3 ”are stopped from the left as the stop result of each symbol row Y1 to Y3, it will be a lottery in this game round. No special conditions have been established since there are no more game times related to the hold information subject to the determination of success / failure before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the start of the special hold notice. This special hold notice (special effect B) ends. Then, the notification to that effect is performed by the explanation unit 310 (for example, a character display such as “sorry”, see FIG. 62C).

  Here, as described above, the special condition A and the special condition B have different numbers of symbols for satisfying the special condition. That is, in the special effect A, a special condition is established by a combination of three symbols, whereas in the special effect B, a special condition is established by a combination of two symbols, which is a smaller number than the special effect A. For this reason, special effects B are basically easier to establish than special effects B.

  However, even in the special effect A, the special condition may be more easily established than in the special effect B depending on the type of number arrangement (combination of symbols) arranged on the bingo card 300. For example, in the bingo card 300 of special effect A, the numbers in any of the three numbers (designs) are the same, such as “1”, “1”, “6”. When there is a column with a different number (design), the probability of establishment of the special condition in this column is the same as the probability of establishment of the special effect B in the example of FIG. However, in this case, in the special effect A, there are other columns, and the special condition can be established by other combinations of numbers in the other. Therefore, in such a case, the special effect A has a higher probability of establishment of the special condition than the special effect B.

  Details of the effect patterns of the special effects A and B will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 63A, special effects A1, A2, and A3 are set as the effect patterns of the special effect A so that the numerical arrangement of the bingo card 300 is different. In the special effect A1, numbers are arranged in each square so that all nine squares are different. The arrangement of the numbers is randomly determined by lottery or the like. As described above, since the numbers of all nine squares are set to be different, in this special effect A, the success or failure of the special condition is determined by the combination of three numbers in any row of the bingo card 300.

  In the special effect A2, a predetermined square (in the present embodiment, the central square) is a cell that has been established since the start of the production. Specifically, “F” is displayed on the predetermined cell as the established cell. Is done. Therefore, a special condition is established for a column including the established cells (all columns in this embodiment) by a combination of two numbers. As a result, the special effect A2 has more columns than the special effect B in order to satisfy the special condition, but the special effect A has more columns (types of combinations). It becomes easy to be established. Furthermore, in special effect A2, it is set so that two numbers of the combination of three numbers become the same number. Therefore, in the special effect A2, the special condition is established by one type of numbers that are the same numbers in the column including the established squares.

  In the special effect A3, all the cells are cells that have been established since the start of the effect, and specifically, “F” is displayed on all the cells. That is, the special effect A3 is a premier effect in which it is determined that the special condition is satisfied at the start of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), in special effect B, special effects B1, B2, and B3 are set so that the number arrangement of lotto card 320 is different. In the special effect B1, a number is set for each square so that the numbers for the two squares are different. The arrangement of the numbers is randomly determined by lottery or the like. From the relationship with the special effects A1 to A3, the special condition B1 is more likely to satisfy a special condition than the special effects A1, and less likely to satisfy the special condition than the special effects A2 and A3.

  In the special effect B2, the numbers of the two squares are set to be the same number. Therefore, in the special effect B2, the special condition is established by one kind of numbers that are the same numbers. Compared with the special effect A2, the two are similarly configured with special conditions by one kind of numbers, but the special condition A2 is more specific than the special effect B2 by the number of the bingo card 300 columns. easy. In the special effect B2, the same effect can be obtained even if either the left or right cell is “F”.

  In the special effect B3, all the squares have been established since the start of the production, and specifically, “F” is displayed on the left and right squares. That is, the special effect B3 is a premier effect in which it is determined that the special condition is satisfied at the start of the effect.

  In each game time, the number of times the symbols in the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 are stopped varies depending on the length of the variable display time, and the number of times that the symbols are stopped can be increased as the variable display time is increased. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), game times (normally missed) in which the variable display time is set to 5 sec to 10 sec correspond to game times in which no reach occurs, and each symbol row Y1 to Y3 is left, right Since the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 are stopped once each in the middle order, the total number of stops is three. In this case, the types of stop symbols (hereinafter referred to as the number of stop symbol types) are two types (when the left and middle are the same or the middle and right are the same) or three types.

  In the case of game times (normal reach) in which the variable display time is set to 15 sec to 20 sec, first, symbols are stopped in the order of left and right, and the same type of symbols are stopped on the left and right to form a reach line. Is done. In this normal reach, the middle symbol row Y2 is frame-fed from the symbol three symbols before the jackpot symbol (the symbol that forms the reach line). That is, the symbol three symbols before the jackpot symbol, the symbol two symbols before, and the symbol one symbol before stop in order. Then, after the symbol immediately before the jackpot symbol is stopped, a transition effect is performed as to whether the symbol changes to the next symbol (the jackpot symbol) or the game round is ended as it is. In this case, if the game result is a jackpot result, it changes to the next symbol after the roaring effect and stops the jackpot symbol, and if it is a losing result, the game is stopped at the previous symbol as it is and the game round ends. When the jackpot symbol stops in the middle symbol row Y2, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped, and the number of stopped symbol types does not increase. Further, even when the symbol immediately before the jackpot symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row Y2, the number of stopped symbol types does not increase. Therefore, regardless of the game result, the number of stop symbol types is four.

  In the case of the game times (super reach A and B) in which the variable display time is set to 45 sec to 60 sec, after the roaring effect in the above normal reach, it develops into super reach A or super reach B. In other words, in normal reach, after the symbol immediately before the jackpot symbol is stopped, a turn-over effect is performed. Reach production of production is performed. These movie effects and animation effects are performed as background effects of the bingo card 300, the explanation unit 310, the lotto card 320, and the like. Super reach A and super reach B are set so that the contents of the production and the expectation of jackpot are different. And in both of these super reach A and B, after the effect that either the jackpot symbol or one of the symbols ahead of the jackpot symbol stops, if it is a jackpot result, the jackpot symbol will eventually stop, If so, the symbol one symbol ahead of the jackpot symbol stops. That is, if the result is an outlier, the number of stop symbol types increases by one. Therefore, the number of stop symbol types is 4 for the jackpot result, and 5 for the outage result.

  In the case of the game times (super reach C) in which the variable display time is set to 90 sec, after the above super reach A and B are performed, the middle symbol row Y2 is temporarily stopped one point ahead of the jackpot symbol (stop) After the number of symbol types becomes five), the intermediate symbol row Y2 further changes again, and the symbol corresponding to the game result stops. In this case, if the result is a jackpot result, the jackpot symbol is stopped after re-variation, and if it is a missed result, symbols other than the jackpot symbol are randomly stopped regardless of the symbol forming the reach line. In other words, if the result is an outlier, the number of symbols to be stopped may increase by one (a symbol that has been stopped before that may be stopped again due to normal reach or the like). Therefore, the number of stop symbol types is 5 if it is a jackpot result, and 5 or 6 if it is a miss result.

  As described above, the number of symbols to be stopped at each game time is set so as to increase as the variable display time becomes longer. It is easy to be satisfied and special conditions are easily satisfied.

  Next, the hold control command handling process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In steps S3901 to S3903, processing similar to the processing in steps S1201 to S1203 is executed. In step S3904, it is determined whether the pending notice counter is less than “1”. If it is less than “1”, special hold notice setting processing is executed in step S3905. This setting process will be described later in detail. When a negative determination is made in step S3904, or after the process of step S3905 is executed, the hold increasing process is executed in the same manner as the process of step S1208 in step S3906, and then this command response process is terminated.

  It should be noted that, in the process for increasing the hold in the present embodiment, when executing the special hold notice, the display control is performed so that the second hold image P2 (B) is displayed regardless of the hold image determined in step S3903. The device 212 is controlled. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the special reservation notice is executed when a super-reach A to C occurs even if it is a jackpot result or a disapproval result.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3901, the processing from step S3907 to step S3911 is executed in the same manner as the processing from step S1209 to step S1213, and then this command response processing ends.

  Next, the special hold notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4001, “1” is subtracted from the storage number of the hold information other than the hold information acquired this time, specifically, the secondary hold storage number SN, as a process of grasping the hold number before acquiring the current hold information. Execute the process to grasp the numerical value. In subsequent step S4002, a process of grasping the game result of the hold information in the hold command received this time is executed. In step S4003, a lottery process for special hold notice is executed. In the lottery process, the number of hold information other than the hold information acquired this time acquired in step S4001, the game result of the hold information acquired this time acquired in step S4002, and the special hold notice stored in the ROM 243 Whether or not to execute the special hold notice is determined based on the lottery table.

  Here, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process performed in step S4003 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the special hold notice depends on the stored number of other hold information at the time when the hold information is acquired and the acquired hold information. It is set to be determined by the game result. That is, regardless of the acquired hold information, if the number of other hold information stored is 0 (secondary hold storage number SN = 1), the special hold notice is not executed. In addition, when the number of stored other hold information is 1 to 3, regardless of the game result of the hold information acquired this time, the more the number of other hold information stored, the more the special hold notice execution probability (special The winning probability in the lottery process for determining whether or not to hold the hold notice is increased. Even if the number of stored hold information is the same, if the hold information acquired this time is a jackpot result, the execution probability of the special hold notice is higher than when the hold information is a miss result. If the game result is an out-of-game result, the information on the variable display time is specified, and the lottery process at the time of out-of-game is executed when dealing with super reach, otherwise the lottery process itself is not executed. .

  In this embodiment, the game result of the hold information acquired this time is reflected in the execution probability of the special hold notice, but the variable display time related to the hold information acquired this time is specified first (the first embodiment described above). ), And a special hold notice is executed when the game display has a relatively long variable display time that can be specified (for example, a variable display time corresponding to super reach). It is good also as a structure which is easy, and it is good also as a structure which performs special pending | holding advance notice only in the case of the variable display time more than predetermined time. By doing so, the difference in the level of attention between the hold information that triggered the special hold notice and the other hold information can be increased by performing the special hold notice. It is possible to increase the significance of executing the special reservation notice (special effect A or special effect B) in the game times related to the hold information that is different from the hold information that triggers the special hold notice.

  In addition, the variable display time for all the hold information is not specified, but the variable display time for the hold information other than the hold information acquired this time is specified first, and the variable display time for any of the hold information May be configured to facilitate execution of the special hold notice when the display time is a relatively long variable display time. As described above, if the variable display time is long, the number of stop symbol types can be increased. Therefore, if hold information that is such a relatively long variable display time is included, special conditions are satisfied. It becomes easy to do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second hold image P2 (B) is displayed as the hold image related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the special hold notice. However, in order to make it possible to clearly distinguish the hold information that triggered the execution of the special hold notice from the other hold information, the hold image for the hold information that triggered the execution is used for other hold The image may be different (identifiable) from the image.

  Note that if the hold images P1 to P5 that can appear normally are also used during the execution of the special hold notice, the storage capacity can be reduced rather than storing a dedicated hold image, and the normal hold image can be obtained. Even if is displayed, it can be expected that a special reservation notice will occur, and the effect of not interrupting the interest in the production can be expected. In the present embodiment, the bingo card 300 and the lotto card 320 in the special hold notice are displayed at the start of the game times that are started after obtaining the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. The start of the special hold notice is later than the timing (at the time of hold acquisition). Therefore, even when the normal hold image is displayed as described above, the expectation that the special hold notice can be executed after that is further enhanced.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 65, after the lottery process is executed in step S4003, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice is executed in step S4004 based on the result of the lottery process. If not, the setting process is terminated. If so, the process proceeds to step S4005.

  In step S4005, a process of setting an effect pattern in the current special reservation notice is executed. In this process, an effect pattern is set with reference to a jackpot effect pattern table or a removal effect pattern table stored in the ROM 243. In these effect pattern tables, the effect pattern to be executed in the current special reservation notice varies depending on the game result of the hold information acquired this time and the number of other hold information stored at the time when the hold information is acquired. Is set to

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 66 (b) and 66 (c), when the jackpot effect pattern table is compared with the off effect pattern table, the special hit notice is given for the jackpot than for the miss. It is easy to select an effect pattern that easily satisfies the special condition. For special effects A3 and special effects B3 that are determined to satisfy the special condition at the start of the effects, only the jackpot effect pattern table is selected. Also, for special effects A2 and special effects B2 that include a cell that has been established since the start of the effect, the jackpot is more easily selected than the off-target. And as already explained, the special condition is more easily established in the special effect B than in the special effect A, and the ratio of the special effect B being selected for the big hit is higher than the special effect. Yes. For this reason, a special hold notice that allows a special condition to be established more easily than the case where the jackpot result is a missed result is performed in relation to the game result of the hold information acquired this time. As a result, a special condition is established in the special hold notice and the game result of the hold information that triggered the notice is linked, and a privilege (rare image data) is simply granted by the special condition being established. In addition to the joy of the game, it is possible to expect that it will lead to a jackpot, and it is possible to raise interest with respect to both the effects of each game time and the special reservation notice.

  In relation to the number of reserved memories, the special effect A is more easily selected when the number of reserved memories is larger, and the special effect B is more easily selected when the number of reserved memories is smaller. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly change the probability of establishment depending on the situation, regardless of whether the number of reserved memory is large or not, and the player can quickly give up because the reserved memory number is small at the start of the special reservation notice. Can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, from the viewpoint that the special condition is easily established, the special effect B is more likely to be established than the special effect A when the number of reserved storages is the same. However, in the special effects A and B, the special effects A2 is most established except for the special effects A3 and B3, because of the relationship between the detailed effects pattern and the ease of establishment of the special conditions. The special effect A1 is most difficult to be established, and is easily established in the order of A2, B2, B1, and A1. And in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which does not correspond one-to-one with the order of these detailed easiness of establishment and the ease of selection. In this way, for example, the special effect A2 (or A3) can be obtained by looking at the pattern of each square in more detail while assuming that the special condition is not satisfied when the special effect A is started. It is possible to give a joy (a reverse feeling that special conditions are satisfied), and to immerse yourself in the game with a production inflection.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which determines the effect pattern (special effects A1-A3, B1-B3) of special reservation notice by lottery etc. irrespective of the game result of the reservation information used as the opportunity of special reservation notice, as mentioned above. It is good also as a structure provided with both the structure which determines an effect pattern based on a game result. By providing a configuration that determines the production pattern regardless of the game result, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the production of each game time and the special hold notice are separate productions. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such an event that the result of the notice-side effect (success or failure of the special condition) is predicted. In addition, if the above-described configuration is used, it is better to establish special conditions for the performance of the game times (despite the long variation display time, the result of disagreement continues and there is a concern that the degree of attention will decrease. Situations, situations where the probability of special conditions per unit time is low, etc.) or situations where it is better not to do so (such as situations where it is difficult to secure time for granting benefits due to short fluctuation display times of game times, etc.) It is possible to avoid contradictions and inconveniences in production in situations where the probability of establishment of the special condition is high, etc., and the production design can be facilitated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 65, in the subsequent step S4006, based on the effect pattern determined in step S4005, special conditions are set, that is, numbers (designs) to be arranged in each square are determined by lottery or the like. In step S4007, a special reservation notice command including the contents determined in steps S4005 and S4006 is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 reads the image data of the corresponding effect pattern from the character ROM 256 based on the reception of the special reservation notice command, and the symbol display device 41 is configured to execute the special reservation notice based on the data. Control. In this embodiment, the special reservation notice is configured to be performed from the start of the game round. Therefore, the display control device 212 that has received the special hold advance notice command controls the symbol display device 41 so as to make a special hold advance notice from the game times that are being executed at the received timing.

  After executing the process of step S4007, the process of adding “1” to the hold notice counter YK is executed in step S4008, and then this setting process is terminated. By performing the process in step S4008, a negative determination is made in step S3904 in the next hold control command response process. That is, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice is set so as not to be duplicated at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the degree of attention is conversely reduced due to the extreme complexity of the game. Incidentally, the hold notice counter YK is cleared to the initial value “0” at the start of the game times (at the end of the special hold notice) for which the hold information triggered by the special hold notice is the target of the determination.

  Next, the mid-variation process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S4101 whether or not it is a game time in which a special reservation notice is being executed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice is being executed depending on whether or not the executing flag is stored in the RAM 244. This in-execution flag is a flag that is stored in the RAM 244 at the start of the special reservation notice and is deleted at the end. If the special hold notice is not being executed, the normal change processing is executed in step S4102, and the process is terminated. In the process of step S4102, other processes are performed except the process of step S2607 in the mid-variation process of FIG.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the special reservation notice is executed from the start of each game. This special hold notice start process is performed in the change start process (step S2503) of the change display control process (FIG. 38). Although not described in detail with reference to the drawing, in the change start process (step S2503), it is determined whether or not the hold notice counter YK is “1” when the start process is activated, and “1”. If it is, it is determined whether or not a special hold notice is being executed. If not, a special hold notice start process is executed. In this special hold notice start process, the above-mentioned execution flag is stored in the RAM 244, and the special hold notice based on the special hold notice command output and set in step S4007 (from the change display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3). The display control of the symbol display device 41 so as to change to each symbol row Y1 to Y3 variation display on the upper display unit GU, and to perform the effect pattern set in the special hold advance notice setting process and the special hold advance notice of special conditions). Etc. Further, even if the hold notice counter YK is “1”, when the special hold notice is being executed, display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so that the special hold notice effect is continuously executed. Note that the special hold notice end processing is executed at the time of shifting to the game times related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. This process will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined in step S4101 that the game is a special pending notice, processing other than step S2607 in FIG. 39, specifically, steps S2601 to S2606 and steps S2608 to S2616 are processed. In the same manner as in Steps S4103 to S4117, deceleration processing is performed at the deceleration timing of each of the symbol rows Y1 to Y3, stop processing is performed at the stop timing, and other effects that are changing are executed. . Incidentally, in the process of step S4115 in this embodiment, not only the determination of whether or not it is the stop timing of the middle symbol row Y2, but also the determination of whether or not it is the temporary stop timing of the middle symbol row Y2, either If it is the timing of, it is set as the structure which affirms. The temporary stop timing means a timing at which the middle symbol row Y2 is temporarily stopped in the reach effect already described (a temporary stop timing at the time of frame advance effect, etc.).

  As described above, in the game times in which the special hold notice is being executed, the upper symbol row Z1 corresponds to the left symbol row Y1, the middle symbol row Z2 corresponds to the middle symbol row Y2, and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponds to the right symbol row Y3. In addition, the deceleration order and the stop order also correspond to the order in the normal fluctuation display (the same order as in the normal fluctuation display). The deceleration timing and the stop timing also correspond to the timing in the normal fluctuation display (the same as the timing in the normal fluctuation display).

  And in this embodiment, after performing the stop process (step S4112, step S4114, step S4116) of each symbol row | line | column Y1-Y3, the process for special suspension advance notice at the time of a stop is performed in step S4118, and it is changing. The process is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special reservation notice process (step S2607) after the deceleration process of the lower symbol row Z3 is not performed.

  The special hold notice process at the time of stop (step S4118) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S4201, a process of grasping the stop symbol of the symbol sequence stopped in the current stop process is executed. In this process, the symbol sequence stopped this time by grasping the effect pattern and stop symbol set for the current game round in the variation start process (step S2503) executed at the start of each game round. The stop pattern of can be grasped. In addition, it is good also as a structure which confirms the symbol actually stopped at the time of a stop instead of or in addition to the structure which confirms the effect pattern and stop symbol which were set as mentioned above. For example, the design stopped or temporarily stopped in the immediately preceding stop process (step S4112, step S4114, step S4116) may be temporarily stored in the RAM 244 or a register and referred to. A counter or the like that changes in accordance with the fluctuation of the symbol row Y1 to Y3 (Z1 to Z3) is provided, the position of each symbol that is changing can be grasped by the counter, and the symbol that has been stopped this time by checking the counter It is good also as composition which can be grasped.

  In a succeeding step S4202, a process for grasping the special condition in the special hold notice being executed is executed. That is, as a special condition, the number (symbol) arranged in each square is grasped, and whether these squares are established squares is grasped. As a specific configuration of this processing, for example, the RAM 244 is provided with storage areas for the number of squares (9 or 2) set in the special hold notice, and in each of these storage areas, the position of the square, Numbers (designs) arranged as special conditions can be stored. Further, an area for storing a flag for grasping whether or not the cell is established is provided in correspondence with each storage area. For associating each storage area with the position of the square, for example, a loop counter that can be updated from 1 to 9 and returns to the initial value (1) when updated to the maximum value (9) is used. In step S4202, for example, information of numbers (designs) stored in each storage area from the storage area of the square corresponding to the number 1 to the storage area of the square corresponding to the number 9 and the square in which it has been established. Whether or not information is repeatedly collected. If the special hold notice being executed is the special effect B, the numerical information and information on whether or not they are established are collected in the storage areas numbered 1 to 2 among the storage areas.

  In the above-described configuration, it is preferable that the grasping process for determining whether or not the cell is established among the information in each storage area is executed before the process for grasping the information of the numbers (symbols) arranged in the corresponding cell. . Since it is not necessary to grasp the numerical (symbol) information for the established cells, the processing can be omitted, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  After executing the special condition grasping process in step S4202, it is determined in subsequent step S4203 whether or not the symbol stopped this time is a symbol constituting a part of the special condition. In this process, even if a symbol constitutes a part of the special condition, if it corresponds to an established cell, a negative determination is made. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, a response process is executed in step S4204. If a negative determination is made in step S4203, a non-response process is executed in step S4205.

  In the response process in step S4204, a process for changing the cell corresponding to the symbol stopped this time to an established cell is executed. Specifically, a command including the corresponding square information is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command changes the corresponding square so that it can be distinguished from the pre-establishment, for example, the background of the corresponding square is set to a different background from the pre-establishment background, etc. Image data is read from the character ROM 256, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image data.

  On the other hand, in the non-corresponding process in step S4205, a process for notifying that there is no square corresponding to the symbol in the symbol sequence stopped this time is executed. Specifically, a command including information indicating that there is no corresponding cell is output to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 produces an effect indicating that there is no corresponding cell (for example, an effect that displays an image of a predetermined character being disappointed, or “that is ...” in the explanation unit 310. The image data is read from the character ROM 256 so as to perform a display effect or the like, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image data.

  In addition, although there is no square corresponding to the symbol stopped this time, when it corresponds to the already established square, it may be configured to produce an effect different from the above effect. Specifically, for example, it may be an effect of displaying an image in which a predetermined character disappoints while comparing the symbol stopped this time with the established cell corresponding to the symbol. It is also possible to produce an effect that displays “It has been established”. In this way, not only there is no corresponding square this time, but the player can clearly understand that it was overlapping with a previously stopped symbol, and more interested in the special hold notice. Can be made.

  Also, the fact that it has overlapped with the previously stopped symbol means that, for example, when this event occurs in the stop processing of the right symbol column Y3, the symbol that was stopped before corresponds to the left symbol column Y1. If it is a thing, since a reach line is formed by the left and right symbol rows, a reach display will occur in the current game round. Therefore, the occurrence of an event that overlaps with the previously stopped symbol does not contribute to the success or failure of the special condition from the viewpoint of success or failure of the special condition, but from the viewpoint of the game result of the game times The result is more likely to be a jackpot result. For this reason, as described above, if it is overlapped with a previously stopped symbol, if it is configured so as to notify it, the object of interest in the game times can be transferred from the special reservation notice, It is possible to entertain the production while more closely relating the holding notice and the game times.

  In addition, when it overlaps with the previously stopped symbol as described above, the configuration in which the game result of the game round is likely to be a jackpot result is not limited to the case where reach display occurs, the same It may be configured such that the probability of a jackpot result is increased by so-called chance eye display (continuous production) in which symbols and symbols of the same type stop continuously. That is, the game times that are likely to result in a jackpot result are not limited to the game times in which the above-described overlap occurs, and may be game games thereafter. And the overlap of a stop symbol may also be for a symbol that stops over a plurality of game times.

  After executing the process of step S4204 or step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4206. In step S4206, it is determined whether or not a special condition is satisfied by the current stop process. Specifically, in the case of the special effect A, it is determined whether or not a bingo line has been formed by switching to the currently established cell, and in the case of the special effect B, it is switched to the currently established cell. It is determined whether or not a lottery has been established. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4206, a process for storing a condition establishment flag indicating that the special condition is established is stored in the RAM 244, and a privilege is granted based on the establishment of the special condition in step S4207. Privilege grant processing is executed. When it is determined in step S4206 that the special condition is not satisfied, or after the process of step S4207 is executed, the special hold notice process at the time of stop is terminated.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69, the privilege granting process (step S4208) first executes a process of grasping the symbol sequence stopped this time in step S4301. That is, a process is executed to determine whether the symbol sequence stopped this time is the left symbol sequence Y1, the right symbol sequence Y3, or the middle symbol sequence Y2.

  In the subsequent step S4302, it is determined whether the symbol sequence stopped this time is the left symbol sequence Y1 based on the processing result of step S4301. If it is the left symbol row Y1, the assigning process is executed in step S4303. In this giving process, a command indicating that the special condition is satisfied is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads image data for reading data such as a rare image as a privilege from the character ROM 256 so as to give a privilege according to the established special condition, and displays the image. The symbol display device 41 is controlled.

  If it is not the left symbol row Y1 in step S4302, it is determined in step S4304 whether or not it is the right symbol row Y3. If it is the right symbol row Y3, it is determined in step S4305 whether or not a reach line is formed in the left and right symbol rows Y1 and Y3. If the reach line is not formed, the process proceeds to step S4303 and the grant process is executed.

  If it is not the right symbol row Y3 in step S4304 but the middle symbol row Y2, or if the reach line is formed in the left and right symbol rows Y1 and Y3 in step S4305 and the reach display is shown, step S4306 Proceed to In step S4306, a grant carryover process is executed. In this process, during the current game round, a process for carrying over is performed so that a privilege according to the establishment of the special condition is not granted, and it is given thereafter. In the present embodiment, the privilege according to the establishment of the special condition is given at the end of the current game round, not during the current game round. And as a process for carrying over, the RAM 244 executes a process for storing a carry-over flag indicating that the carry-over state in which the special condition is satisfied but the privilege has not been given yet.

  In this carry-over process, a command indicating the above carry-over state is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command displays, for example, a character or a character display such as “I will give you a privilege later” in the explanation unit 310 so as to notify that it is a carryover state. The image data is read from the character ROM 256, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image.

  After executing the grant process in step S4303 or after executing the grant carryover process in step S4306, the privilege grant process is terminated.

  Next, the special hold notice process (step S3910) at the time of shift in the hold control command handling process (FIG. 64) in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4401, it is determined whether special conditions have already been established. In this process, the success or failure of the special condition can be grasped by checking the condition satisfaction flag stored in the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S4206. If the special condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S4402 to determine whether or not a privilege has been granted. In this process, the presence / absence of the carryover flag (stored in the carryover process in step S4306) is ascertained, and if the carryover flag is stored, no privilege is granted, and if the carryover flag is not stored, the privilege Is determined to be granted. If the carryover flag is stored and no privilege is granted, the grant process is executed in step S4403. This process is the same as the process in step S4303.

  However, when a privilege is granted in the grant process in step S4403, an image for granting a privilege is continuously displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) even after the game times after the shift are started. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience that the privilege (code) cannot be read although the privilege is given (the code is displayed). In this case, it is good to set it as the structure which displays continuously the image for providing a privilege irrespective of the length of the fluctuation | variation display time of the game times after the said shift. In this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the image display for giving is ended based on the end of the game times after the shift.

  If it is determined in step S4401 that the special condition is not satisfied, if the privilege has been granted in step S4402 (if the carryover flag is not stored), or after executing the process of step S4403, step S4404 is performed. Proceed to In step S4404, it is determined whether or not the current shift is a shift to hold information triggered by a special hold notice, that is, whether or not the next game time is a game time related to the hold information triggered by a special hold notice. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4404, the process advances to step S4405 to execute a special hold notice end process. Specifically, a command indicating that the special hold notice ends is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command performs processing for ending the special hold notice. For example, the image data indicating the end of the special hold notice such as “Please play again!” Is read from the character ROM 256 in the explanation unit 310 or the like, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image data. In addition, in the special hold notice end process, various flags (in-progress flag, established flag, carryover flag, etc.) and various counters (hold notice counter YK, etc.) used in this special hold notice are initialized (cleared). I do. Thereafter, the special hold notice processing at the time of shifting is terminated.

  The effect at the end of the special reservation notice may be configured to continue for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the shift (after the start of the next game). Thereby, not only is it suppressed that the effect at the end is overlooked, but the game times at which the effect at the end is performed are game times related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, The player can be clearly grasped.

  In addition, when the effect at the end of the special reservation notice overlaps with the providing process in step S4403, the effect of the giving process is given priority, and then the effect at the end of the special reservation notice is performed. In this case, in the special reservation advance notice lottery process (step S4003), the variation display time of the game times related to the hold information acquired this time is specified and the image for giving the above-mentioned privilege is continuously displayed or longer. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the special hold notice can be executed when the length is (that is, a configuration in which the special hold notice can be executed in other cases except when the fluctuation display time of the direct hit B is short). In this way, the display for granting a privilege can be ended before the end of the game times related to the hold information triggered by the special hold notice, for example, a new special at the next game time. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience that processing and display are duplicated, such as when a holding notice is generated. In addition, for a player who expects to generate super reach A to C due to a holding image, the situation where normal reach before super reach is being performed may be a so-called waiting time that may cause a relatively low level of attention. There is sex. Therefore, if a privilege is given in such a situation (that is, a situation before the development to super reach), the waiting time can be effectively used on the special reservation notice side, and the degree of attention can be increased in a balanced manner.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4404, the process proceeds to step S4406, and it is determined whether or not it is a pre-condition condition in which a special condition can be satisfied during the next game round. If it is a state before the condition is established, a process for notifying that the condition is not established is executed in subsequent step S4407. Specifically, a command indicating that the condition is not satisfied is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads out from the character ROM 256 image data (for example, “reach”, see FIG. 60C) for indicating in the explanation unit 310 that the condition is not met. Then, the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image data. Thereafter, the special hold notice processing at the time of shifting is terminated.

  Here, the state before the condition is satisfied, for example, a state where bingo or lottery is satisfied in one more square may be set as the state before the condition is satisfied, or set as the state before the condition is satisfied according to the number of symbols to be stopped at the next game round It may be configured to In this case, when a shift command is received, a game times command (variation command or type command) is also received, so that the number of stop symbol types may be grasped based on information included in those commands. In the present embodiment, as the variable display time is longer as described above, the number of stop symbol types increases, so if the grasped stop symbol type increases, the state before the condition is established becomes easier. By being set, it is possible to predict that the next game time has a high expectation level for jackpots and a long variation display time.

  In addition, as described above, since the notification of the state before the condition is established in the special hold notice is not performed during the game round but at the time of the shift, each game round has an effect for the game round and the special hold notice. You can focus your attention on whether or not a special condition is met. In other words, assuming that the state before the condition is established in the special hold notice is configured to be performed in the middle of the game round, a reach display for notifying the stage before the jackpot result is announced in each game round, and a notice of the state before the condition is established. , Could be confused. Thus, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to concentrate on each production in a configuration in which each production (game game production and special reservation notice) is performed in parallel.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes the timing which alert | reports said condition pre-condition establishment according to the number of pending | holding information. Specifically, there is still a game number to be executed before the game number related to the hold information subject to the special hold notice when the special hold notice is in a state before the condition is established. For example, as in the present embodiment, it is configured to notify the state before the condition is satisfied when shifting to the game times executed before, and if there is no game time executed before that, It is good also as a structure which alert | reports that during the game round based on becoming. However, in this case, it is determined that there is no possibility that the special condition will be satisfied if the symbol is further stopped during the game round when the condition is established. It is preferable that the state before the condition is established is not notified. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the symbol does not stop and the special condition is not satisfied at all after the notification of the state before the condition is satisfied.

  Further, in the special reservation notice process at the time of shifting, the game result before shifting is not referred to. This is because, for example, even in the case of a jackpot result in a game round in which a special hold notice is being executed, the continuation of the special hold notice will be executed after the game round and the opening / closing execution mode that resulted in the jackpot result. I mean. By doing so, for example, the special hold notice is ended by the game result on the game turn side (because it is a jackpot result) even though the special condition is satisfied a little more (pre-condition condition) It is possible to avoid such an event that the game result is too much, and it is also possible to avoid an event that the game result on the side of the game times is desired to be satisfied and that the special condition is satisfied. In addition, in this way, it is possible to clearly distinguish the privilege (image data) given in the special reservation notice and the privilege (prize ball) given at each game time, and given at each game time. When changing game conditions that directly affect the player's interests, such as a lot of benefits, it is not necessary to re-set the special conditions on the special hold notice side. Etc. are facilitated.

  In addition, as a timing for granting a privilege based on the establishment of special conditions, there are provided a case where the privilege is given during game play and a case where the privilege is given when the hold information is shifted. Specifically, when the left symbol row Y1 is stopped or when the right symbol row Y3 stops without reaching, a privilege based on establishment of a special condition is given during the game round. Other than that, it was configured to give at the time of shift. In the game round, the player expects that the reach display will occur first, and considering that the reach display occurs after the right symbol row Y3 stops, It can be a waiting time for the player until the right symbol row Y3 stops. In addition, when the right symbol row Y3 is stopped but no reach display is generated, the waiting time for the player can be kept until the middle symbol row Y2 stops and the game round is ended. In particular, during the execution of the special reservation notice as described above, since the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is reduced and displayed on the upper display unit GU, compared with the situation where the special reservation notice is not executed. The element of watching and enjoying the pattern variation can be reduced. Therefore, if it is configured to give a privilege based on establishment of special conditions using these waiting times, it is possible to efficiently use the waiting time during the game turn and suppress the interest in the game from diminishing. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the right symbol row Y3 is stopped and the reach display is generated, it is considered that the jackpot result can be notified at the game time, and the interest in the effect on the game time side is increased. Therefore, when the right symbol row Y3 stops and reach display occurs, even if the special condition is satisfied and there is still time to grant a privilege based on the establishment (then, the display time of the game times is changed) Even if it remains, a privilege is not given during the game round (granted when shifting to the next game round). For this reason, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the attention is dispersed between the reach display of the game times and the special reservation notice, and the effect cannot be enjoyed.

  When the special condition is satisfied by stopping the middle symbol row Y2, it is given not at the game time but at the time of shifting to the next game time. After the middle symbol row Y2 is stopped, the remaining time of the variable display time of the game time is small, and even if a privilege is given, the player cannot recognize it or cannot read the code indicating the privilege. There is a possibility that the privilege cannot be received. Then, if it is set as the structure which provides a privilege at the time of the next game time shift (at the time of a start), the above inconveniences can be avoided.

  Note that the special hold notice end process (step S4405) may be performed by the change start process (step S2503) or the change end process (step S2506). In this way, it is not necessary to perform the special hold notice processing at a timing when the processing load can be extremely increased, such as when the hold information is shifted, and the processing load can be distributed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined hold image (second hold image P2) is selected as the hold notice, the special effect A or the special effect B is executed as the special hold notice with a predetermined probability. This special hold notice is executed as a game time that is different from the game time related to the hold information triggered by the special hold notice, in the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information triggered. The Here, by making a hold notice, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice, while the game related to the hold information that is the target. As the degree of attention to the game times increases, the degree of attention to other game times may decrease. In other words, as a result of the game times, there is a high possibility that a privilege (prize ball) will be given, so the player expects that the game times will be performed early, and then, for game times before that, You may feel annoying. Therefore, as described above, a special hold notice is made at a game time that is different from (or executed before) the game time related to the hold information that triggered the hold notice. If the person's interest is given, it is possible to entertain the game even during the game times that can be felt troublesome. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

  Since a special condition is set in the special reservation notice and a privilege is given based on the establishment of the special condition, the degree of attention to the special reservation notice can be suitably increased. Since the special condition can be established in relation to the stop result in the game game being executed, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the stop result on the game game side.

  Due to the relationship between the game result on the game turn side and the stop result, the number of types of stop symbols as the stop result is larger when the game result on the game turn side is a disapproval result than when it is a jackpot result. Therefore, the special condition is more easily established when the game result on the game turn side is a losing result than when the game result is a jackpot result. Thereby, even in a situation where the degree of attention to the game times side can be lowered, it is possible to make the special reservation notice side interested, and the degree of attention can be increased in a balanced manner.

  The number of times each symbol row Y1 to Y3 stops in each game time is set so as to increase as the variation display time of the game time becomes longer. Therefore, the longer the variation display time of the game times executed in a situation where the special hold notice is being performed, the more easily the special condition is established in the special hold notice. By doing so, it is possible to suppress slackness due to prolonged game times. In particular, the situation in which the special hold notice is being performed is a situation in which the game times that are the targets of the hold notice (second hold image P2) that has been triggered are subsequently reserved. The game times that are the subject of the reservation notice are expected too much, and if the previous game times are prolonged, there is a possibility that the game times become more troublesome as it is prolonged. Therefore, as described above, the longer the game times are, the easier the special conditions on the special hold notice side are established. Is possible.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of this embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to other embodiments and modifications thereof, or may be applied to other embodiments and modifications thereof by combining some or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in each embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration composed of combinations of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  In the above embodiment, the probability of establishment of the special condition can be different depending on the number of times that the symbol stops depending on the variable display time, but the special condition can be changed by changing the number of times the symbol stops even if the variable display time is the same. It is good also as a structure where the establishment probability of may differ. For example, in a so-called pseudo-continuous effect in which each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is displayed and stopped a plurality of times during one game, the change display time during one game can be changed by shortening the time of one change display. It is possible to increase the number of symbol stops. Generally, the pseudo-continuous effects as described above are set such that the greater the number of variable displays and stops during one game time, the higher the expectation that the game time will be a big hit result. Therefore, assuming such a configuration, a special condition is likely to be satisfied if an effect with a high degree of expectation resulting in a jackpot is generated in the game times in which the special hold notice is being executed regardless of the length of the variable display time. It becomes composition. Therefore, even if the production with high expectation resulting in the jackpot result is a result of losing, the easiness of establishment on the special condition side is guaranteed (the special condition is easily established), and the game times It is possible to compensate for the situation where the attention level may decrease in the production of the side by the special reservation notice side, and to maintain the balance of the overall attention level.

  In the production on the game times side, the number of stoppages (number of stop symbol types) is increased by developing into a super-reach with a high expectation resulting in a jackpot result. Alternatively, the number of symbol stops (the number of symbol types) may be increased. For example, in addition to the above-described super reach A, B, and C, a super reach D is provided, and when it is distributed to the super reach D, the expectation resulting in a jackpot result is low, but the frame advance effect of the middle symbol row Y2 (once (Stop effect) is set so as to be repeated for a long time (pause for a large number of times). In this way, even when the attention level on the game times side can be reduced by performing an effect with a low degree of expectation, it is possible to make the special hold notice side interested.

  In an effect in which the symbols in reach (particularly the middle symbol row Y2) are frame-advanced, the stop symbol type may be different depending on the start position (design) or end position (design) of the frame-advance. That is, for example, in the case of an effect in which the symbols from 3 to 1 before the symbol forming the reach line are frame-advanced, the number of stopped symbols in the middle symbol row Y2 is 3, When the symbols from five to one before the symbol forming the reach line are frame-advanced, the number of stop symbol types in the middle symbol row Y2 is five. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to change the establishment probability of special conditions, without increasing the kind of reach, and diversification of production is achieved. As such a configuration, the start position (symbol) of frame advance may be associated with the jackpot expectation degree of the game times. For example, if the position where the frame advance is earlier (the greater the number of stop symbol types), the higher the expectation level of jackpot, the lower the degree of attention on the game times side will be compensated on the special hold notice side, On the other hand, when the position for frame advance is earlier (the greater the number of stop symbol types), the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots, the degree of attention of both effects can be increased. In these configurations, the frame feed start / end position (symbol) may be associated with the variable display time. That is, the longer the period in which the frame advance effect is performed, the longer the variable display time, and the number of stop symbol types increases. Therefore, expecting the effect of avoiding a decrease in the degree of attention to the increase in the display time of the game times related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold notice by lengthening the frame advance effect. Can do.

  As an effect for game times, there is an effect that suggests that the same symbol or the same type of symbols will be likely to result in a jackpot result over multiple game times or in a pseudo-continuous effect during one game time, etc. It is good also as a structure. By performing this effect, the degree of attention increases with respect to the stop symbol on the game turn side or its type, while the degree of attention may decrease when a different symbol or a different type of symbol stops. On the other hand, in the special hold notice, the more the types of symbols to be stopped, the more easily the special conditions are established. It becomes possible to increase the overall attention level in a balanced manner.

  Although it is configured to reflect the number of stop symbols in each game round in special conditions, the special hold notice production is not limited to the above (BINGO or LOTO), and other productions may be used. It is sufficient if the production is reflected in the special conditions. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of times of a predetermined effect is reflected in special conditions. As the predetermined effect, the player intervenes (the operation of the operation unit 75, the operation of the firing handle 54, the player's predetermined operation by a motion sensor, etc.). (For example, using the detection result) can be an effect that can be performed, or an effect that cannot be intervened. In the case of an effect in which the player can intervene, for example, the configuration in which the probability of establishment of the special condition changes based on the number of operations and the operation timing of the operation unit 75, or the operation unit based on an instruction (mission) from the pachinko machine 10 side. A configuration in which the probability of establishment of the special condition changes depending on the number of times that the 75 can be operated / cannot be considered.

  As an effect in the special reservation notice, a predetermined image (for example, a rare image) is displayed in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize / not visible at the start of the special reservation notice, and the predetermined image is easily visible by operating the operation unit 75. / It may be a so-called scratch effect that changes to a visually recognizable state. In this way, if an effect that allows the player to intervene is executed in the game times related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the special condition is established as the operation unit 75 is operated. If it is easy to do, even if the degree of attention to the game times related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered it may be temporarily reduced, A decrease can be avoided. Even in these cases, the variable display time may be associated with the number of occurrences and the number of operations of these effects, and the number of occurrences and the number of operations of the effects are independent of the variable display time. Depending on the configuration, the probability that the special condition is satisfied may be changed.

  Even if it is the effect which a player cannot intervene, the structure which reflects the kind of characters etc. which appear as an effect during a game turn on the success or failure of special conditions may be sufficient, for example. Specifically, for example, a configuration in which a plurality of characters can appear as an effect during the game is played, and a degree of expectation that the result of the game is a jackpot result differs depending on the type of the appearing character. If the special effect A is the bingo card, and if the special effect B is the lotto card, the plurality of characters are arranged, and the cell in which the character that appears during the game is arranged is set as the established cell. . Then, when the established masses are gathered and a bingo (Lotto) is established, a special condition is established and a privilege is given. In this way, even if the effect is different from the variation symbol of each game time, it can be associated with the special reservation notice, and the effect during the game time and the special reservation notice can be related. In the above configuration, if a special condition is more likely to be established as a character with a low expectation value resulting in a jackpot result appears as a result of a game round, the special hold notice side indicates a situation where the degree of attention of the game round may decrease. It is preferable that the configuration is supplemented by

  As the special reservation notice, for example, a privilege of a predetermined image (for example, a rare image) may be given regardless of whether the special condition is successful. In this way, it is possible to provide pleasure different from the game-game-side effects such as viewing at least a predetermined image, and it is possible to guarantee a decrease in the attention level on the game-game side on the special reservation notice side.

  The start timing of the special hold notice is the start of the game times after the acquisition of the hold information that triggers the special hold notice, but it may start before or after that Also good. Since the number of stop symbol types may vary depending on the start timing of the special reservation notice, the probability of establishment of the special condition may be changed using this. Specifically, for example, although it is informed in advance that a special reservation notice will be made, the number of stop symbol types may be reduced by delaying the start timing. In such a case, it is possible to pay attention to the start timing of the special reservation notice, and further improvement in the degree of attention can be expected.

  As an effect of the special reservation notice, an effect (for example, a movie effect or the like) continued for a predetermined period may be displayed. Specifically, based on the acquisition of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the above-mentioned movie effect is started, and according to the variable display time of the game times related to the hold information other than the hold information that became the trigger The period during which the movie production can be viewed is different. In this way, for a player who wants to watch a movie effect for a long time, it is preferable that the display time of the game times is long, and the inconvenience due to the long display time of the game can be avoided. . In this case, a plurality of movie effects may be stored according to the length of the variable display time of each game time, and a movie effect having the same time as the variable display time may be selected, or a length close to the variable display time. Select a movie production and adjust the difference in length on the movie production side (for example, adjust the start timing and end timing, or add or reduce a short adjustment movie production to the selected movie production) Or the like).

  The special hold notice may be configured to shift to an acquisition state in which a player can obtain a privilege with a predetermined hold notice as a trigger. Specifically, for example, based on the display of a predetermined hold image (second hold image P2), the player shifts to an acquisition state in which a player can acquire a predetermined privilege (rare image, item, etc.). And it is good also as a structure which makes the privilege select or acquire. In this way, the longer the variation display time of the game times related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the longer the period of the state for selecting / acquiring the above-mentioned benefits. It is preferable for the person. In this case, the privilege may be selectable / obtainable in a state other than that state, and the state that can be selected / acquired in a state other than that state is different from the privilege that can be selected / acquired in that state. The superiority of becoming can be increased. If the operation unit 75 is used for selection / acquisition of a privilege, it is possible to prompt the player to actively participate. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which changes the privilege which can be selected / acquired by the point etc. which a player holds. In this case, points or the like may be given based on the number of game times, given based on the occurrence of a predetermined effect during the game times, or given based on the number of visits to the game hall. . The points may be diverted between different game tables or on different days, and the number of points is read by a portable terminal or the like possessed by the player, and the number of points is stored by a portable terminal or the management server. Good. If the acquired privilege is one that can be used during the game round (for example, if the acquired item is used, the game round production changes to a production different from the normal one), the special hold notice side bonus and the game round side It is possible to increase the relevance of the production.

  As a privilege to be granted based on the establishment of the special condition, for example, in the special production A, the number of privileges (number of rare image data) and the quality of the privilege (rare degree of the rare image) are varied according to the number of bingo lines established. Or, depending on the type of symbol that forms the established special condition (bingo line or lottery), the privilege to be given is different (if 7 symbols that are easily associated with jackpots are included, a higher privilege is given, etc.) May be.

  Depending on the game situation at the time of establishment (the level of support mode or lottery mode, the number of reserved memories, etc.), the privilege to be granted this time is varied, or the privilege to be granted this time is varied according to special conditions established before that May be. As a configuration in which the privilege to be given depending on the game situation is different, the lower the expectation level of the privilege (prize ball) on each game turn side (as a result of the success / failure lottery based on the winning at the operation ports 33 and 34), the special condition If the benefit based on establishment is increased, the special degree of advance notice can compensate for the decline in the degree of attention to the game times due to the low expectation of the benefits on each game side. The higher the level of expectation, the higher the benefits based on the establishment of special conditions, the special hold notice will be made in a situation where the degree of attention is relatively high, and the degree of attention to the special hold notice can be easily increased In the above-described embodiment, since the second holding image P2 in which the jackpot result or super reach is determined is used as the execution condition for the special hold notice, the execution rate of the special hold notice can be increased. Moreover, in the structure which changes the privilege given this time according to the special conditions established previously, the data of the granted privilege are memorize | stored in the gaming machine (RAM244), and the privilege given this time based on the data is stored. In a configuration for determining (for example, a configuration that makes it difficult to grant a privilege that has already been granted), or a configuration in which a player can input game data or the like stored in a mobile terminal or an external server to a gaming machine. It is good also as a structure which determines the privilege provided this time with reference to the privilege memorize | stored in a person's portable terminal or server. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the privilege provided according to a time slot | zone, a day of the week, a date, etc. differs using a real time clock (RTC) function.

  In the special condition setting (step S4006) in the special reservation notice setting process (FIG. 65), the numbers (designs) to be placed on each square are based on the number of reservations and the game result of the reservation information that triggered the special reservation notice. Although the configuration is determined, the configuration may be such that pending information already stored is referred to. For example, as in the timer input process (FIG. 29) at the time specifying pattern in the first embodiment, a configuration that specifies the effect pattern of the hold information first is used. Then, when setting the special condition, the effect pattern and the stop result of the stored on-hold information are specified in advance, and the number (symbol) to be arranged in each square is determined based on the specified pattern. By doing in this way, based on the result specified previously, it is also possible to produce an effect in which the special condition is satisfied, or an effect in which the special condition is not satisfied.

  The special hold notice may be extended when the special condition is not satisfied in the special hold notice. Specifically, for example, at the time of shifting to the game times related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice (step S4405), the special hold notice is related to the subsequent hold information based on the subsequent hold information. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to extend the game times (when shifting). When the lottery is won, the special reservation notice is extended. For example, when the subsequent hold information is a jackpot result, if the special hold notice is configured to be extended, the special hold notice is extended so that not only the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. , It can be expected that the subsequent hold information will be a jackpot result, and the degree of attention can be suitably increased.

  As special special notice, special production A or special production B, the special condition is established during the special special notice, but the special condition is established during the special special notice. It may not be possible. For example, it is good also as a structure by which a point is provided by performing special reservation advance notice, and a privilege becomes easy to be provided by accumulating the point. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the point provided by the special reservation advance notice differs according to the number of reservations at that time. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which gives a point when the lottery of whether to give a point is performed and the lottery is won. In these cases, depending on the number of points, the privilege to be given may be different (image data having a different degree of rareness is given).

  During the execution of the special hold notice, all the game times executed until the game times related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice are started as the targets of success or failure of the special condition. It is good also as a structure which can select the game times used as the object. For example, it is set as the structure from which the probability which becomes object (selection) differs with the image for suspension. More specifically, the holding image having a lower degree of expectation of jackpot is configured to have a higher probability of being selected (selected). In this way, it is possible to suitably supplement the degree of attention to the game times, which is predicted as a holding image in advance that the expected degree of jackpot is low, on the special holding notice side.

  Needless to say, the number of digits (the number of squares) of the bingo card 300 and the lotto card 320 in the special effects A and B is not limited to the above. When changing the establishment probability of the special condition, the number of digits may be changed. For example, a bingo card 300 or lotto card 320 having a larger number of digits (number of squares) is more easily selected as the number of reserved memories is larger, and a bingo card 300 or lotto card having a smaller number of digits (number of squares) is smaller as the number of reserved memories is smaller. 320 may be easily selected. In addition, in the bingo card 300 or the lotto card 320, an effect in which there is only one square may be set.

  The symbols (numbers) to be arranged in each square correspond to the main symbols of the variable display on a one-to-one basis. However, for example, squares corresponding to a plurality of symbols may be provided. In this case, for example, it may be based on the type of numbers such as “odd number” or “even number”, or may be defined in a range such as “1-5” or “6-9”.

  Although a square that has been established since the start of the special hold notice (a square in which “F” is displayed) is provided, it may be configured to switch to this established square at a predetermined timing after the start. For example, when a predetermined effect (for example, reach display) occurs during execution of a special hold notice, or when the number of hold memories has reached the upper limit, etc. Good. In this case, it is preferable to read the stop symbol of the game game being executed at the switching timing from the variation pattern and switch the square corresponding to the symbol that is not stopped to the established square. This is because, even if the square is already established, if the square is a square corresponding to the symbol that should have been stopped and displayed during the game, the player feels lost.

  In the non-corresponding process of step S4205 in the special hold notice process at the time of stop, there is no square corresponding to the symbol of the symbol sequence stopped this time, but the symbol stopped this time corresponds to the square that has already been switched to established If it is, the established cell may be switched (returned) to a non-established cell, or it may be determined by lottery or the like whether or not to switch to the non-established cell. If it does in this way, while it becomes difficult for special conditions to be satisfied, diversification of special production can be attained. In the case of a configuration in which whether or not to switch to a non-established cell is determined by lottery, the probability may vary depending on the stopped symbol or gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the special reservation notice is not executed redundantly, but may be configured to be executed redundantly. For example, if the hold information acquired this time is a predetermined result (a jackpot result), duplication is allowed, but if not, duplication is restricted, and whether or not there is duplication of special hold notices The game result of the held information can be associated (the player can grasp that the result is a predetermined result by overlapping the special hold notice). The same can be said for the other embodiments regarding the presence or absence of duplication of special hold notices.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect A and the special effect B are configured to start at the start of the game times (fluctuation start processing) that starts after acquisition of the hold information that triggers the special effects A and B. In relation to the stop timing of each of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 of the game times, at least after the start of the game times and until the first symbol is stopped (until the upper symbol sequence Z1 is stopped). That's fine. In other words, the presentation timing of the special condition in the special reservation notice is not limited to the start of the game round, but may be any configuration as long as it is presented until at least the first symbol is stopped. Also, even after any of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is stopped in the game round, if there is a changing symbol row, the special effects A and B are started during the game round (special conditions are set). (Shown) may be configured. In these cases, the already stopped symbol may be reflected in the special effects A and B (if there is a square corresponding to the stopped symbol, it is switched to the established square), or the configuration may not be reflected. Good. However, as the number of remaining symbols in the game is larger, the special effects A and B can be fully enjoyed. Therefore, at least the first symbol is started as described above. Is preferred.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the above-described eighth embodiment, the special reservation notice is used as an opportunity, and the effects of game times other than the game times related to the hold information that has been triggered are reflected in the special conditions in the special hold notice. In the form, information related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggers the special hold notice is reflected in the special conditions as well as the game times.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the special effect A, any one of the holding images P1 to P5 is arranged in each square. Then, if the hold image related to the hold information acquired during execution of the special hold notice is the hold image corresponding to the bingo card, the box is set as a completed box. If bingo is established by arranging the established cells, a corresponding privilege is given.

  For example, in FIG. 71A, it is assumed that the fourth hold image P4 (D) in the first unit hold display area Ga1 is the target of the special hold notice (in this embodiment, the trigger for executing the special hold notice). Is not limited to the second holding image P2. The bingo card 300 includes, for example, a second hold image P2 (B), a third hold image P3 (C), a fourth hold image P4 (D), and a fifth hold image P5 (E). Each is arranged. In the explanation unit 310, a special hold notice for establishing a special condition (BINGO) in the hold image is explained.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (b), the hold image related to the hold information that triggers the execution of the special hold notice is the fourth hold image P4 (D), and the hold information of the game times being executed Since the holding image (holding image in the execution display area Gb) is the fifth holding image P5 (E), the fourth holding image P4 (D) in the bingo card 300 at the start of the special holding notice. And the square of the fifth holding image P5 (E) is the established square. In this example, since it is in a state before the condition is established (reach state) at the start of the special hold notice, a description to that effect is given in the explanation unit 310. In the present embodiment, the special hold notice is started not when the game times are started but when the hold information is acquired. Therefore, it is also possible to reflect information on the game times being executed in a situation in which it is determined to execute the special hold notice (the hold image related to the game times).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the hold image corresponding to the hold information acquired thereafter is displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the hold image is displayed in the second hold image P2 ( In the case of B), the square of the second holding image P2 (B) in the bingo card 300 is changed to the established square. As a result, in the case of this example, BINGO is obtained when the established cells are gathered, and a notification that the special condition is satisfied and a privilege based on the establishment are given (notified by the explanation unit 310). ).

  In this way, it is possible to give pleasure for acquiring the hold information after the start of the special hold notice. At the start of the special hold notice, the hold image related to the hold information that has already been acquired is reflected in the special conditions (the hold information related to the hold information that has already been acquired and is the subject of the pass / fail judgment) Image or acquired hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination and corresponds to the hold image relating to the game time being executed may be configured as a configuration). The hold image related to the hold information that has become may or may not be the target. In this way, the more the hold information stored at the start of the special hold notice, the easier the special condition is established, and the significance of storing a lot of hold information during the game can be enhanced.

  The processing in this case will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Similar to steps S3901 to S3904 in the hold control command handling process of FIG. 64 described above, the processes of steps S4501 to S4504 are executed. In the special hold advance notice setting process in step S4505, a process for determining whether or not to execute the special hold advance notice is performed. The determining process is performed, and the information is output to the display control device 212.

  About the kind and arrangement | positioning of the image for hold | maintenance of each square in the bingo card 300, it is good also as a structure determined by lottery etc., and may be determined by the relationship with the image for hold | maintain based on the acquired hold information. If it is easy to satisfy the special condition (BINGO), the arrangement of the cells may be determined so that the reserved images related to the acquired reserved information are arranged as much as possible, and the special condition (BINGO) is satisfied. In order to make it difficult, it is only necessary to determine the arrangement of the cells so that the holding images related to the acquired holding information are not arranged as much as possible.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which changes the kind and arrangement | positioning of the image for hold | maintenance of each square also according to a game state. For example, as already described, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the high probability mode and the low probability mode in which the probability of the success / failure lottery is relatively high and low are set as the gaming state, and the high probability mode is the jackpot result Therefore, the type of holding image to be selected is a holding image (such as the first holding image P1 (A) or the second holding image P2 (B)) that is likely to be a jackpot result. Since it is considered that it is easier to select, and the probability that the jackpot result will be lower in the low probability mode, on the other hand, the type of the reserved image that is selected is less likely to be a jackpot result (the fifth image) It is considered that the hold image P5 (E), the fourth hold image P4 (D), etc.) are easily selected. Therefore, if the type and arrangement of the hold image to be placed on the bingo card 300 are determined in accordance with these modes, the game machine will adjust the ease / hardness of the special condition to some extent at the start of the special hold notice. can do.

  In addition, when a hold image that is easily selected is arranged on a square that easily contributes to the establishment of the special condition, such as the central square of the bingo card 300, the special condition is easily established and the reserve image that is difficult to select. If the configuration is arranged, the special condition is hardly established. Thus, it is good also as a structure which changes the establishment probability of special conditions with the position of the cell to arrange | position.

  The process in step S4506 is the same as the process in step S3906. When the command received from the main control device 81 in step S4501 is not a pending command, it is determined whether or not it is a shift command in the process of step S4507, as in the process of step S3907. In step S3908 and step S3911, the secondary reserved storage number SN is reduced in step S4508, and shift processing is performed in step S4509. After performing the hold increase process in step S4506 or executing the shift process in step S4509, the hold determination process is executed in step S4510, and then this command response process is terminated. In the hold determination process in step S4510, the presence / absence of a cell corresponding to the hold image related to the increased / decreased hold information is determined, and if the corresponding cell exists, a process of setting as an established cell is performed. .

  In step S4510, if the holding image related to the reduced holding information (the holding image displayed in the execution display area Gb before the reduction) corresponds to the established cell, the holding information It is good also as a structure which continues as a state which is a completed cell even if it is digested, or a configuration where the established cell for which the hold information is digested is returned to a cell in the original state which is not a completed cell. In the former case, special conditions are easily established, and the game of the special hold notice itself is easy to understand, so even beginners who are not familiar with the game can fully enjoy the game of the special hold notice. Become. In the latter case, the special condition is less likely to be satisfied, so that it is possible not only to immerse yourself in the game, but also to establish a special condition before the established mass is no longer an established mass. It is conceivable that the game ball is continuously fired so as to acquire the hold information, so that so-called stoppage can be suppressed.

  In particular, when the configuration of this embodiment is applied to a gaming machine equipped with priority means for making a determination to give and hold game information acquired later and game times, as in the seventh embodiment, the trigger for holding notice It is possible to more effectively utilize the period until the game result related to the hold information is notified. That is, it is considered that a player who has grasped that there is holding information with a high expectation level for jackpots from the holding notice is desired to quickly play the game related to the holding information. Therefore, in the case of the configuration including the priority means as described above, if the hold information is further acquired while the hold notice is being executed, the game times related to the hold notice may be delayed. This may be a motivation for not wanting to further acquire the hold information. Therefore, as described above, the hold information acquired later in the special hold notice can be further reflected in the success or failure of the special condition, so that it is possible to generate the hold information. Can be more suitably suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the holding image is applied to the BINGO game (special effect A). However, points are given according to the type of the holding image during the special holding notice, and a privilege is given according to the point. It is good also as a structure to be made. For example, if the configuration is such that the number of points given to the fifth holding image P5 is higher than the first holding image P1, and the points to be given are higher as the jackpot expectation is lower, Even if the image for holding related to the holding information other than the holding information that has become the one with a low expectation degree of jackpot, it can give a joy (a lot of points are given) different from the jackpot result, and the degree of attention Can be improved in a well-balanced manner. A configuration may be adopted in which points based on the image for holding are given by lottery or the like, and this point may be carried over after the end of the special reservation notice.

  In the hold display setting process (step S4503) of the hold control command response process (FIG. 72), the hold image may be determined by lottery or the like regardless of whether or not the special hold notice is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the current holding image is determined with reference to the holding image of each square in the special reservation notice, or a configuration in which both are used depending on conditions such as a gaming state.

  In the embodiment described above, the configuration related to the change in the holding image shown in the other embodiments may be applied. That is, when the holding image changes at a predetermined timing, if there is a square corresponding to the changed holding image, the square is switched to the established square. If it does in this way, the production using each cell and the image for reservation in this embodiment and the production about change of the image for reservation in other embodiments can be related appropriately. Then, not only the game associated with the hold information that predicts the game result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image by changing the hold image, but also the hold image after the change It becomes possible to perform a multi-stage game such as granting a privilege by using it for other effects (special hold notice in this embodiment), and the game result on the hold information corresponding to the hold image after the change is a game Even if it is not preferable for the player, the player can be prevented from being discouraged.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the ninth embodiment, the hold image is reflected in the special condition as information related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. However, in the present embodiment, the hold information being executed is The number is reflected in special conditions.

  As shown in FIG. 73A, numbers 1 to 4 are arranged on the bingo card 300. For example, if the number of pieces of hold information at the start of the special hold notice is “2”, the square in which “2” is arranged is set as the established square. In this case, if there is no addition of the hold information before the game times related to the hold information triggered by the special hold notice, the number of the hold information changes from “2” to “1”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), if no hold information is added, a square “1” other than the square “2” is also an established square. Corresponding to the number if there is additional information during the execution of the special reservation notice (the entrance to the operation port 33, 34 occurs), and the number of information is "3" or "4" The cell to be made is the established cell. In FIG. 73 (c), after the number of hold information becomes one (from the state of FIG. 73 (b)), two pieces of hold information are further added, the number of hold information becomes “3”, and the corresponding squares are displayed. It changes to the established cell and shows that BINGO has been established.

  In this way, during the execution of the special hold notice, the special hold notice can be enjoyed with a simple configuration such as increase or decrease of the number of hold information. As described above, the significance of adding the hold information after the start of the special reservation notice also arises, and the degree of attention to the game during the special reservation notice can be suitably increased.

  Further, since the number of the hold information changes due to the shift of the hold information (digestion of game times), even if no hold information is added after the special hold notice is started (the operation port 33, 34), the special condition can be established. That is, for example, when the number of hold information at the start of the special hold notice is “3”, any column of each square of the bingo card 300 is arranged with “3”, “2”, “1”. If it is a row, a special condition is satisfied if no hold information is added after the start of the special hold notice. In this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that causes the player to become frustrated without easily entering the operation ports 33 and 34, and special conditions are already established at the start. Compared to the performance (for example, the special effects A3 and B3 in the eighth embodiment), the special condition is satisfied while confirming that the special condition is satisfied (provided that no holding information is added). It will be possible to entertain you.

  In addition, as the number of hold information at the start of the special hold notice increases, the special condition is more likely to be satisfied (for example, “4” which is the storage upper limit of the hold information is arranged in a plurality of squares, or “4” is bingo. It is good also as a structure which arrange | positions in the center square of the card | curd 300. In this way, it can be motivated to store as much hold information as possible before the start of the special hold notice, and can be motivated to add hold information even after the start.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the hold information acquired after the start of the special hold notice is reflected in the special conditions, the hold information acquisition opportunity (entering the operation ports 33 and 34) exceeding the storage limit of the hold information has occurred. In some cases, the holding information is not acquired, but the occurrence of the acquisition trigger may be reflected in the special condition. In this case, the bingo card 300 is arranged with numbers “5”, “6”, and the like exceeding the storage conditions.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 74, in the winning process for the operating port on the main control device 81 side, the processing of steps S4601 to S4608 is performed in the same manner as the processing of steps S201 to S208. If it is determined in step S4603 that the stored storage number N is “4” or more, the process advances to step S4609. In step S4609, a process of setting an upper limit command indicating that a trigger for acquiring the hold information exceeding the storage upper limit has occurred is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82. After performing the process of step S4609, the process proceeds to the process for the lower working port of step S4607.

  In addition, when the winning to the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 overlaps, it is good also as a structure by which multiple said upper limit commands are set, and the structure in which the said overlapping information is included in one upper limit command. Also good. The former configuration is preferable from the viewpoint of simplification of the processing configuration, and the latter configuration is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing an increase in the number of input / output commands.

  As the processing on the side of the effect control device 82, in the hold control command corresponding process in FIG. 75, the process when the hold command is received (steps S4701 to 4706 which are the same processes as steps S4501 to S4506), the shift command is used. In addition to the processing when received (steps S4707 to S4709, which are the same as steps S4507 to S4509), if the command received from the main controller 81 is not a hold command or shift command, step S4710 It is determined whether or not it is the above upper limit command. In the case of an upper limit command, in step S4711, for example, the number of minutes exceeding the storage upper limit is processed as a process for reflecting the information that triggered the acquisition of the hold information exceeding the storage upper limit to the special hold notice. A process of adding “1” to the counter for storing is executed. This counter is cleared to “0” in the shift process (step S4709).

  Then, after performing any of the processing in step S4706, step S4709, and step S4711, as a hold determination process in step S4712, in addition to the hold image and the number of holds, the presence / absence of a cell exceeding the storage upper limit is determined. In addition to determining, if they exist, a process of changing to an established cell is executed.

  In this way, in a configuration that performs production using information related to hold information other than the hold information that triggers the special hold notice, it is possible to suppress the interest from being extremely reduced due to the fact that the hold information is not acquired. It becomes possible to do.

  As a general gaming machine, for example, in a configuration in which a winning / losing lottery is performed based on the entrance to the operation ports 33 and 34 and a winning ball is awarded based on the entering ball, holding information for the winning / losing lottery In the situation where is the upper limit of storage, the winning / failing lottery is not performed based on the balls entering the operation ports 33 and 34, and only the winning balls are obtained. In this case, if there are many prize balls based on the entrance to the operation ports 33 and 34, it is considered that there are not a few merits to enter the operation ports 33 and 34 even if the winning / no-win lottery is not performed. However, there are few prize balls based on the entrance to the operation ports 33, 34, the same number of prize balls as the entrance (one prize ball for each entry), or no prize balls. In the case of the configuration, the merit of entering the operation ports 33 and 34 in a situation where the upper limit of storage is reached can be extremely reduced. On the other hand, increasing the number of award balls or increasing the upper limit of memory may be undesirable for the management of the game play rate. Therefore, as described above, if it is configured such that a privilege (image data, game item, etc.) that is not directly related to the profit such as a prize ball is easily given based on the entry exceeding the upper limit of storage, It is possible to make the player feel a merit even if the ball exceeds the upper limit of storage.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the special hold notice using the time display image Gp described in the first embodiment and the like, the privilege based on the establishment of the special condition is changed by the change of the hold image for the target hold information. Instead, the item A as shown in the sixth embodiment is applied. Then, the special hold notice is set on the main controller 81 side. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the confirmation process of the hold notice in the present embodiment. As already described, the confirmation process of the hold notice is a process performed as one process (step S206) in the winning process for the operation opening (FIG. 7) in the main controller 81, and is activated when the hold information is acquired. Process.

  In the confirmation process of the hold notice in the present embodiment, as in the above-described steps S1001 to S1009, in the processes of steps S4801 to S4809, whether or not to determine whether or not the hold information is acquired this time, and whether or not the lottery mode is set for the hold information. Process. After performing the processing of step S4807 and step S4809, or when it is determined in step S4808 that the result is a detachment result, the process proceeds to step S4810.

  In step S4810, the main special hold notice setting process is executed. Although this process will be described in detail later, special hold notice is set on the main control device 81 side by this process. In step S4811, a hold command setting process is executed, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is ended.

  Next, the main special reservation notice setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4901, a hold information grasping process is executed. In this process, not only the current hold information but also other hold information already stored in the hold ball storage area 232 is grasped. Specifically, similarly to the hold information grasping process on the side of the production control device 82 in FIG. 23, first, whether or not there is unconfirmed hold information among the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 is determined. judge. If there is unconfirmed hold information, processing for determining whether or not the hold information is appropriate (judging random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2) and information about the variable display time (reach random number counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS) Do. The grasped contents may be temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202, or may be stored in the area for checking the hold information provided in the RAM 204. The area for checking the register and the hold information may be configured such that each hold information in the hold ball storage area 232 can be stored separately. Then, the grasping process is repeated until there is unconfirmed pending information, and the grasping process is terminated when there is no unconfirmed pending information.

  After executing the hold information grasping process in step S4901, in step S4902, it is determined whether or not any jackpot result exists in the hold information that is subject to the determination of the assignment prior to the current hold information. judge. If any jackpot result exists, the special special hold notice setting process is terminated on the assumption that the special special notice is not executed based on the hold information acquired this time. If any jackpot result does not exist, the process proceeds to step S4903.

  In step S4903, it is confirmed whether or not a pending notice execution flag is stored. The hold notice execution flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to grasp that the special hold notice has been executed in the process on the main controller 81 side, and is a flag stored in the subsequent step S4914. . If the hold notice execution flag is stored, the main special hold notice setting process is terminated as it is. That is, the special reservation notice set on the main control device 81 side is not executed redundantly.

  If it is determined in step S4903 that the pending notice execution flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4904. In step S4904, it is determined whether or not the hold information acquired this time is any jackpot result. If it is any jackpot result, a special holding notice lottery process for jackpot is executed in step S4905, and if it is a losing result, a special holding notice lottery process for losing is executed in step S4906. . In this embodiment, the winning probability in these lottery processes is such that the winning jackpot is won at 70% and the winning prize is won at 1%. In the lottery process for losing, the winning probability is higher in the case where the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of reach among the hold information grasped in step S4901 than in the case where the reach is not. It may be set.

  Further, in the lottery processing in step S4905 and step S4906, it is determined whether or not a special condition is established in the current special reservation notice when the special reservation notice is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the item A is given. In this embodiment, the probability that the special condition is satisfied is 90% in the special reservation notice at the time of jackpot, and 50% in the special reservation notice at the time of losing. It should be noted that the special condition may be set so that the probability of establishment of the special condition is higher when the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of reach as described above than when it is not. . In these configurations, when the special condition is established, the establishment flag is stored in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204, and when the special condition is not established, the establishment flag is not stored, thereby storing the success or failure of the special condition. Good.

  After executing the processing of step S4905 or step S4906, it is determined in step S4907 whether or not to execute the special hold notice based on the processing results of steps S4905 and S4906. If it is determined that the special hold notice is not to be executed, that is, if it is not won in the lottery process, the main special hold notice setting process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special hold notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S4908.

  Incidentally, in this embodiment, when there is no holding information other than the holding information acquired this time, that is, when the holding information acquired this time is the start timing of the game times in the immediately following game times control process (FIG. 9). In step S4907, it is determined that the special hold notice is not executed. For this reason, even when winning in the lottery process of step S4905 or step S4906, the special reservation advance notice may not be performed. For example, when there is no hold information to be grasped in step S4901, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the subsequent processing is not performed (even processing such as execution lottery for the special hold notice is not performed). In this way, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration. On the other hand, if the same process is performed regardless of the number of hold information as in the present embodiment, for example, the production occurrence timing may be shifted depending on the presence or absence of the process. It is possible to avoid such an event that the presence or absence of occurrence is grasped.

  In step S4908, a hold number grasping process excluding the hold information acquired this time is executed. In this process, the value of the current reserved memory number N is acquired, and 1 is subtracted from the reserved memory number N, thereby grasping the number of held objects excluding the currently acquired reserved information. As already described, the number N of pending storages is a state in which the number of pending information acquired this time in the immediately preceding step S204 is added. In a succeeding step S4909, a process of acquiring a set time table corresponding to the number of reservations from the ROM 203 is executed. The set time table has a one-to-one correspondence between the set time input to the timer counter T on the production control device 82 side when executing the special hold notice and the variable display time of each game time during which the special hold notice is being executed. A plurality of patterns are defined so as to satisfy the relationship. A table including the plurality of patterns is set in accordance with the number of reserved items.

  In step S4910, a counter for set time is acquired from the RAM 204, and using the counter and the set time table acquired in step S4909, the set time and its pattern to be used for this special hold notice are obtained. The process to determine is executed.

  The counter for the set time is, for example, a loop counter that can be updated one by one in a predetermined cycle from 0 to 999. In addition, it is also possible to use other counters (for example, variation type counter CS or electric accessory release counter C4). If the counter used in this way is shared, the storage area can be reduced. In addition, if the counter included in the hold information is used as the shared counter, such as the variation type counter CS, since this counter is grasped in step S4901, a newly acquired process is set. There is no need to do this, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  78 and 79 are explanatory diagrams showing a set time table in the present embodiment.

  For example, if the number of holdings is 1, as shown in the set time table shown in FIG. 78 (a), the set times are 50 sec, 55 sec, 60 sec,... 80 sec, and a plurality of set times in 5 sec increments. Patterns are set, and address information A (1) to A (8) is set so as to correspond to them one-to-one. In step S4910, one pattern is randomly selected from these set time patterns according to the set time counter to be acquired, and the corresponding address information is stored in the address information storage area of the RAM 204. Run. The set time of the selected pattern is set as a value input to the timer counter T in the special hold notice.

  Incidentally, a value different from the set time may be input to the timer counter T, which will be described later. In addition, in the selected pattern, a pattern of variable display times of game times is set for each piece of hold information for which special hold notice is being made including the hold information acquired this time. Further, when executing the special hold notice, the super-reach A to C is set to be executed for the hold information acquired this time.

  As described above, the fluctuation display time of each game time is normally set according to the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS (see FIG. 13). On the other hand, in this embodiment, the variable display time during execution of the special hold notice is set with reference to the set time table regardless of the reach random number counter C3 or the fluctuation type counter CS. Therefore, the method for setting the variable display time differs depending on whether or not the special hold notice is being executed.

  For example, when a setting time of 55 sec (A (2)) is selected, a numerical value corresponding to 55 sec is input to the timer counter T in the special hold notice. Then, the game time fluctuation display time for the hold information acquired this time is set to 45 sec (super reach A), and the game time change display time for the hold information immediately before the hold information acquired this time is set to 10 sec (reach). Set as non-occurring). Also, when 65 sec (A (4) or A (5)) is selected as the set time, a value corresponding to 65 sec is input to the timer counter T in the special hold notice. If the selected pattern is the address A (4), the variable display time for the hold information acquired this time is 45 sec (super reach A), and if the selected pattern is the address A (5), the current acquisition is performed. The variable display time for the hold information is 60 sec (super reach B). When the hold information acquired this time is 45 sec, the previous hold information is 20 sec (normal reach), and when the hold information acquired this time is 60 sec, the previous hold information is 5 sec (no reach). .

  When the number of holds is two, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), as the set time, 55sec, 60sec,... 100sec, a pattern of multiple set times is set in 5sec increments. The address information B (1) to B (20) is set so as to correspond to them on a one-to-one basis. For example, when 55 sec (B (1)) is selected as the set time, the variable display time related to the hold information acquired this time is set as 45 sec (super reach A), and the hold information immediately before that is 5 sec (reach). Non-occurrence) and the previous hold information is also set as 5 sec (no reach occurrence).

  When the number of holdings is 3, as shown in FIG. 79, as the setting time, 65 sec, 70 sec,... 120 sec, and a plurality of setting time patterns are set every 5 sec. Address information C (1) to C (39) is set so as to correspond to them on a one-to-one basis. For example, when 120 sec (C (39)) is set as the set time, the variable display time related to the hold information acquired this time is set as 60 sec (super reach C), and the variable display time related to the previous three hold information Are set as 20 sec (normal reach).

  Here, in each set time table in the present embodiment, reach information is more likely to occur as the number of the hold information increases with respect to the hold information digested before the hold information subject to the special hold notice. ing. Specifically, the hold information whose fluctuation display time is set to 15 seconds or more corresponds to the occurrence of reach (see FIG. 13), and is subject to the special hold notice when the number of hold is one. The rate at which reach occurs in the game game one before the holding information is 4/8, which is 50.0% of the total. Further, when the number of holdings is two, the ratio of the reach occurring in the game game one before the holding information subject to the special holding notice is 14/20, which is 70% of the whole. And, when the number of holds is 3, the ratio that the reach occurs in the game game one before the hold information subject to the special hold notice is 32/39, which is about 82.1% of the total. It is. In this way, the situation where the reach is likely to occur can be said to be a situation where a fatigue may occur due to the frequent occurrence of the detachment reach. In that respect, the item A or the like is given when the special reservation notice is given, so that another enjoyment can be given and the above-mentioned fatigue can be reduced. Not only that, it is possible to entertain the player with a prediction that a special hold notice will be executed, and that the probability of winning the jackpot is high due to frequent outreach. Therefore, by giving a special hold notice and frequently reaching in the previous game round, the situation that would otherwise give a sense of fatigue can be changed to a situation where a sense of expectation can be raised. It is possible to increase the degree of attention.

  Furthermore, in each set time table in the present embodiment, the longer the variable display time for the hold information acquired this time, the easier it is to select as the number of hold at the time of setting the special hold notice increases. Specifically, either 45 sec (super reach A) or 60 sec (super reach B) is selected as the variable display time for the hold information acquired this time. When the number of hold is 1, the ratio of 60 sec on the long side is selected as the variable display time for the hold information acquired this time is 3/8, which is 37.5% of the total. When the number of holdings is 2, the ratio of 60 sec on the long side being selected as the variable display time for the holding information acquired this time is 10/20, which is 50.0% of the whole. When the number of holds is 3, the ratio of 60 sec on the long side is selected as the variable display time for the hold information acquired this time is 21/39, which is about 53.8% of the total. In this way, by setting the variable display time to be selected for the hold information acquired this time as the number of holds increases, the variable display time related to the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice becomes longer. The game of whether or not the item A is finally given can be fully enjoyed.

  Returning to the description of the main-side special hold advance notice setting process, after determining the set time pattern used for the current special hold advance notice in step S4910, the process proceeds to step S4911. In step S4911, it is determined whether or not a special condition is satisfied in the current special reservation notice. In this determination, it is ascertained whether or not it has been determined in step S4905 or step S4906 that the special condition has been established (the presence or absence of the establishment flag is confirmed). If the special condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S4912, and a process of adding a predetermined time (for example, 5 sec) set in advance to the set time (for example, 60 sec) determined in step S4910 is executed. Thereby, the value input to the timer counter T on the side of the effect control device 82 becomes a value corresponding to a time longer by a predetermined time than the set time (a special condition is not established).

  If it is determined in step S4911 that the special condition is satisfied, or after the processing of step S4912, the reservation obtained this time is stored in the reservation number counter HK provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 in step S4913. A process of inputting the value of the current number of holdings including information (holding storage number N) is executed. The hold number counter HK is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp the game times related to the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice. Then, in step S4914, a process for storing the hold notice execution flag in the various flag storage areas 234 is performed, and then the main special hold notice setting process is terminated. By performing this process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4903 after the next time.

  Next, the hold command setting process (step S4811) in the hold notice confirmation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S5001, processing for grasping information related to game results is executed for the hold information acquired this time. In step S5002, processing for grasping information related to the variable display time is executed for the hold information acquired this time. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S1101 and S1102.

  In a succeeding step S5003, it is determined whether or not a pending notice execution flag is stored. If it is stored, that is, if a special hold notice is set by the main special hold notice setting process, the process advances to step S5004. In step S5004, a set time grasping process is executed. In this process, a process is executed for grasping the set time for the current special reservation notice determined in step S4910 or the set time after adding the predetermined time in step S4912.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5003, that is, if the special hold notice is not set on the main control device 81 side, or after the process of step S5004 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5005. In step S5005, a hold command is set. In this process, in addition to the information grasped in steps S5001 and S5002, in the case where the set time (or set time after addition) is grasped in step S5004, information on the time, and If the hold information acquired this time is the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the hold command is set so that the information is included in the hold command. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Next, as a process on the side of the effect control device 82, a hold control command response process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the hold control command handling process in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received in step S5101 as in step S1201, and the process proceeds to step S5102 if received. In step S5102, the sub-hold storage number SN is added in the same manner as in step S1202. In step S5103, hold display setting processing is executed in the same manner as in step S1203.

  In the subsequent step S5104, unlike the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not a special hold notice is being executed. If not, the process advances to step S5105 to determine whether or not execution of the special hold notice has been decided on the main controller 81 side. In this processing, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time includes information that is determined to execute the special hold notice on the main control device 81 side. If it has not been determined on the main control device 81 side, the process advances to step S5106 to execute a special hold notice setting process. This process is the same as the process in step S1205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5105 that the main controller 81 has already determined, the process proceeds to step S5107, and the special hold notice setting process determined on the main side is executed. This process will be described in detail later.

  When it is determined in step S5104 that the special hold notice is being executed, or after any of the processes in steps S5106 and S5107 is executed, after the hold increasing process is executed in step S5108, this corresponding process Exit. The process in step S5108 is the same as the process in step S1208. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the processing in step S5109 to step S5113 is executed in the same manner as the processing in steps S1209 to S1213, and then the corresponding processing is terminated.

  The special hold notice setting process determined on the main side in step S5107 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In this setting process, first, in step S5201, a process of grasping information on the set time (or information on the set time after addition) in the special hold notice included in the hold command received this time is executed. In step S5202, a process of inputting numerical information corresponding to the grasped set time information to the timer counter T is executed. In a succeeding step S5203, a process for setting the special reservation notice command as an output target to the display control device 212 is executed, and the setting process is ended.

  That is, in the present embodiment, execution of the special hold notice may be determined on the main control device 81 side, or execution of the special hold notice may be determined on the effect control device 82 side. When the execution of the special hold notice is decided on the production control device 82 side, the success or failure of the special condition is decided on the main control device 81 side as described above. The success or failure of the special condition in the special reservation notice is set simply by inputting.

  In the present embodiment, the special hold notice is configured to be started when the next hold information after the hold command is acquired (at the start of the next game round). For this reason, the numerical value input to the timer counter T and the change display time of each game time after the start of the special hold notice are completely linked.

  Incidentally, when set on the production control device 82 side, various subtraction patterns such as subtraction at the time of shift can be set, but when determined on the main control device 81 side, it is set on the main control device 81 side. The special hold notice is executed using the set time as it is. In that respect, the processing configuration is simplified.

  However, the special hold notice determined on the main control device 81 side may also be configured to set subtraction upon shifting, specific timing subtraction, and the like. In this case, for example, when the set time determined on the main control device 81 side is 60 sec, if subtracting 10 sec at the time of shift, the numerical information input to the timer counter T is set to 70 sec obtained by adding 10 sec to the set time 60 sec. It may be configured such that the subtraction value of subtraction at the time of shift or specific timing subtraction is added in advance and input to the timer counter T, such as corresponding numerical information. In this case, in the subtraction at the time of shift, it is preferable to make a configuration such that a lottery process at the time of shift subtraction is always won, or a subtraction is performed without going through the lottery process, and the above-mentioned added amount is always subtracted. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the special hold notice determined by the main control device 81 or the special hold notice decided by the effect control device 82, and the special hold notice. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not the special condition is established or not, that is, whether or not the special condition is set without considering the success or failure of the special condition.

  Next, the variable display time setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the variable display time setting process is a process (step S608) executed in the variable start process at the start of one game round as a process on the main controller 881 side.

  In the present embodiment, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not a pending notice execution flag is stored. If the special hold notice is not stored and at least the special hold notice determined on the main control device 81 side is not being executed, in steps S5302 to S5305, the processing in steps S701 to S704 is performed. Similarly, the usual process for setting the variable display time is performed. That is, a process of setting the variation display time is executed based on the game result, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5301 that the hold advance notice execution flag is stored, in step S5306, the variable display time setting process at the time of the hold advance notice is executed. Then, the time set in the setting process is set in step S5305, and the variable display time setting process is terminated.

  The process for setting the variable display time during the execution of the hold notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S5401, the current set time pattern reading process is executed. Specifically, the process of reading the address information (A, B, C) of the set time pattern determined in step S4910 from the set time tables of FIGS. 78 and 79 from the address information storage area of the RAM 204 is executed. . In a succeeding step S5402, a process for grasping the hold number counter HK is executed. In step S5403, the variation display time corresponding to the set time pattern grasped in step S5401 and the hold number counter HK grasped in step S5402 is grasped as the variation display time of the current game time. To do.

  Specifically, for example, if the address information of the set time pattern read out in step S5401 is A (3), the set time is 60 sec, and the current hold number counter HK is 2, the current variable display time Is set to 15 sec. In this setting, the value of the variation type counter CS for the current hold information is not referred to. If the fluctuation display time is 15 seconds, it is a fluctuation display time corresponding to the occurrence of normal reach B. In this case, the game times corresponding to the occurrence of normal reach B are set regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Is called.

  In a succeeding step S5404, a process of subtracting 1 from the hold number counter HK is executed. In step S5405, it is determined whether or not the hold number counter HK after subtraction is 0. If it is 0, the hold notice execution flag is deleted in step S5406. Exit.

  The difference in the method for setting the variable display time due to the different triggers for executing the special hold notice will be described with reference to the table in FIG.

  That is, when it is determined by the production control device 82 to execute the special hold notice, the variable display time is determined based on the counter at the time of holding information acquisition such as the variable type counter CS and the variable display time table as usual. . When setting the special conditions in the special hold notice determined on the side of the production control device 82, the success / failure may be determined with reference to the variable display time on the game times side, or the variable display time may not be referred to. In some cases, the success or failure is determined, and the relevance between the special reservation notice and the game time is shown to be low, or the relevance is high.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the main control device 81 to execute the special hold notice, the variation display time of each game time during that time is set based on the set time counter and the set time table. In this case, when the special condition is set in the special hold notice, the variable display time is not referred to, and the variable display time is set according to the success or failure of the special condition. By doing this, the special conditions in the special hold notice will be completely linked to the variable display time of each game time, and if you want to establish or do not want to establish the special conditions, you can produce as designed. It becomes possible.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 81 determines to execute the special hold notice, so that the execution time of the special hold notice and the game during the execution of the special hold notice are performed. It is possible to link the fluctuation display times of the times, and it is possible to intentionally adjust the success or failure of the special conditions in the special hold notice.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice is set on the main control device 81 side, while the special hold notice setting is also made on the effect control device 82 side. Therefore, there are cases where the special conditions are set without regard to the success or failure of the special conditions regardless of the fluctuation display time of each game time, or the success or failure of the special conditions based on the hold information before digestion. In some cases, special conditions may be set. In this way, by providing both, it is possible to make adjustments so that inconvenience does not occur in cases where it is desired to satisfy or not want to satisfy the special condition, while having randomness regarding the success or failure of the special condition. Become.

  As a configuration to set the special condition based on the success or failure of the special condition, after determining the validity determination result of the hold information that triggers the special hold notice, decide whether to establish the special condition accordingly, The variation display time on the game times side is determined based on the special conditions. That is, the special condition that the probability of establishment may differ according to the length of the fluctuation display time on the game times side is determined based on the success / fail judgment result of the game times, and on the game times side based on the determined success / failure The production was performed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to associate the special condition associated with the length of the game display variation display time with the game result of the game times for the special reservation notice. In other words, even if the special condition in the special hold notice is associated with the game result, there may be a case where there is a contradiction in relation to the variable display time of the game time, and conversely, In some cases, a contradiction may occur in relation to the game results of the game times. And in order to eliminate such an event, in each said embodiment, it was set as the structure which performs various adjustments on production on the production control device 82 side. On the other hand, in this embodiment, such various adjustments are not required, and both the variable display time and the game result can be associated with the special condition, and the special hold notice can be realized with a simpler configuration. Is possible.

  The success or failure of the special condition (set time) is determined on the main control device 81 side, and based on this, the variable display time during execution of the special hold notice is determined on the main control device 81 side. If the effect control device 82 side determines whether the special condition is successful or not, and the main control device 81 side sets the game display side variation display time according to the special condition, the effect control device 82 controls the main control. It is necessary to output information about the success or failure of the special condition to the device 81. At present, the exchange of information between the main control device 81 and the production control device 82 is configured to have only one-sided output from the main control device 81 to the production control device 82. If it is attempted to output information to the control device 81, it is necessary to provide a new connection path (cable or the like), which is not preferable from the viewpoint of simplifying the configuration. In addition, the main control device 81 is performing a determination process that is particularly relevant to the interests of the player, and information is input from other devices to the main control device 81 that performs the determination related to such benefits. In such a configuration, it may be difficult to find an action or the like for manipulating the result of the above-described determination processing for illegal purposes. Therefore, if the main controller 81 determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied as described above, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect by executing the special hold notice while avoiding such inconvenience. It becomes possible.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 82 is configured to perform a process of setting a special condition without referring to the game time variation display time. In this way, while the effect of generating randomness in the success or failure of the special condition is further exerted, the setting of the special condition is shared by the respective control devices 81 and 82, so that the local processing load is locally increased. Increase can be suppressed.

  The main special hold notice setting process is configured so that when setting special conditions, it can be set so that the special condition is satisfied, but it is also possible not to set the special condition. did. In this way, for example, even if the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information is correct is a result that is unfavorable for the player, it is possible to follow the fact that the special result is satisfied and that the result is that the result is out (If item A is given), and conversely, if the result of determination of whether or not the hold information is successful is a jackpot result and a favorable result for the player, the jackpot is not established without special conditions. It is possible to make adjustments such as concentrating on.

  In addition to / in place of the configuration for setting the success / failure of the special condition according to the jackpot result / loss result as the game result, the configuration for setting the success / failure of the special condition according to the type of the jackpot result or the type of the loss result may be used. Good. The type of jackpot result may be set such that, for example, a special condition is established for a probable jackpot result, while a special condition is not established for a normal jackpot result, or vice versa. In addition, jackpot results with different numbers of consecutive rounds (for example, 8-round jackpot results and 16-round jackpot results, etc.) are set as the types of jackpot results. The special condition may not be satisfied if the jackpot result on the side with the smaller number of rounds may be set, or vice versa. If special conditions are easily established in the case of a result that is advantageous to the player (in the above example, a probable jackpot result or a 16-round jackpot result), it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special hold notice. However, as a converse configuration, if it is difficult to establish a special condition in the case of a result that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to follow a disappointed player by establishing a special condition (granting benefits such as item A). It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the willingness to play.

  Further, as a type of the jackpot result, to an opening / closing execution mode (for example, a two-round opening / closing execution mode or an opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing in a state where it is difficult to win / not win the prize winning opening 32a). After that, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode or maintains the previous support mode (so-called latent probability change result), and the above-mentioned prize As a result of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the number of balls is less than normal, the result of the lottery mode transitions to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode or maintains the previous support mode (so-called sudden (Probability change result) may be set, and the success or failure of the special condition may be set including these results. For example, by adding the above-mentioned latent probability change result to the type of jackpot result, it is possible to add pleasure to predict whether or not the lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode, while the latent probability change result depending on the success or failure of special conditions. If it is grasped that it is, there is a possibility that the enjoyment may be erased. Therefore, if the latent probability change result is obtained, if the special condition is not satisfied / is difficult to be satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the success / failure lottery mode from the special hold notice, and various game results can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to achieve both the effect of improving the interest and the effect of improving the interest by performing the special reservation notice. In addition, in the above-described sudden probability change result, the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode shift to an advantageous side for the player, while the opening / closing execution mode itself that shifts based on the jackpot result has few prize balls. Therefore, it is expected that the next jackpot result will be expected as soon as possible. Therefore, if it is configured to give a privilege based on the establishment of a special condition (such as selecting item A) as a connection effect until the next jackpot result, it becomes possible to suppress the delay of the effect.

  Furthermore, in addition to the normal losing result that does not shift to the opening / closing execution mode as a losing result, a special losing result that does not shift to the gaming state (win / fail lottery mode and support mode) is set as well as to the opening / closing execution mode of only one round, It is good also as a structure which sets the success or failure of special conditions also including these results. In this case, if the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening 32a is the same as or the same as the above-described latent probability change result, and the effect of the display screen G after the opening / closing execution mode is the same or the same, the player can execute the opening / closing The pleasure of predicting whether the game result that triggered the mode is a latent probability change result or a special outlier result increases. In such a configuration, for example, a special condition is established with a predetermined probability even if the result is a latent probability change result or a special outlier result. If it is configured so that the probability of establishment is different (for example, the latent probability change result is higher), it is possible to predict whether the result is a latent probability change result or a special failure result from the success or failure of special conditions in the special reservation notice. The game can be diversified by increasing the number of prediction branches.

  In the configuration in which the success or failure of the special condition varies depending on the type of the jackpot result as described above, the success or failure of the special condition may be set depending on the presence or absence of the promotion effect in the effect after the jackpot, during the jackpot or after the jackpot . For example, even if the jackpot result is advantageous to the player (for example, a promising jackpot result or a 16-round jackpot result), when the jackpot is established, an unfavorable jackpot result (a normal jackpot result or an 8-round jackpot result) is notified on the display screen G. In addition, special conditions are easily established in the special reservation notice. Thereafter, a promotion effect is generated as an effect during the jackpot to notify that the jackpot result is advantageous to the player. In this way, it can be expected that the promotion effect will be generated when the special condition is satisfied, and even if it is a jackpot result that is disadvantageous to the player, it suppresses the decrease in interest in the game Can do. Conversely, a special condition may be easily established when no promotion effect is generated. This is because it is considered that giving a privilege (item A or the like) to a player may lead to an increase in the player's interest rather than showing a promotion effect (promotion failure production) that cannot be expected very much.

  In place of / in addition to the configuration in which the success / failure probability of the special condition is changed according to the type of the game result as described above, the execution probability of the special pending notice may be changed according to the type of the game result. Specifically, if the special condition is difficult to be satisfied, the probability of the special hold notice may be lowered. If the special condition is likely to be satisfied, the special hold notice is generated. The probability may be increased. In this way, in the first place, it is not necessary to bother to execute the special hold notice in a situation where the special condition is difficult to be satisfied (for example, a situation where the latent probability change result), and the success rate of the special condition relative to the execution rate of the special hold notice. Can be secured.

  In the main special hold advance notice setting process, the game result of the hold information that is not the target of the determination of the success / failure in the game times is grasped before the determination of the success / failure, and the fluctuation display time of the subsequent game times is calculated based on the result. The configuration was determined. By doing in this way, the success or failure of said special conditions can be set on the main control device 81 side, and diversification of game effects can be realized.

  In the special side special hold advance notice setting process, when the special hold notice is set and the set time is determined as the success or failure of the special condition, in the subsequent variable display time setting process, each game time is referred to the set time table. The variable display time is determined. Normally, the variable display time is set based on the variable type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3 acquired as the hold information and the variable display time table. If the change type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3 are changed when changing, whether the values of the counters CS and C3 have been changed based on the success or failure of the special condition as described above, It can be difficult to determine if it has been altered by fraud. Therefore, by changing the table to be referred to and changing the variable display time while leaving these counters CS and C3, the fluctuations can be avoided while avoiding the above-mentioned inconveniences. The change of the display time can be suitably realized.

  In the variable display time setting process (FIG. 83), the selected variable display time table is different by determining whether or not the special hold notice is being executed (the normal variable display time table and the set time). Any one of the tables is selected). In this way, it is possible to realize the change in the variable display time with a very simple configuration.

  In particular, since the variable display time can be referred to by the variable display time table or the set time table, the variable display time is determined at the game timing start timing at the latest regardless of whether or not the special hold notice is executed. Yes. Therefore, the variable display time is not changed (extended or shortened) after the game is started, and an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

  In each set time table, the variable display time of each game time is pre-allocated including the hold information that triggered the special hold notice within the set time range. By doing this, the display time of each game is displayed at the start of the special hold notice, and the special hold notice is executed while avoiding inconveniences such as inconsistencies in the success or failure of special conditions in the special hold notice. The process of setting the variable display time for each game time can be greatly simplified.

  In the special special hold notice setting process on the main side, the special hold notice is not executed when the jackpot result is included in the hold information. Thereby, it is not necessary to set a special condition as a period including the jackpot result (opening / closing execution mode) in the special reservation notice, and the configuration can be simplified. In addition, as described above, when the jackpot result is included, the special hold notice setting is not performed in the main special hold notice setting process. On the other hand, in the production control device 82, the special condition may be set and the special hold notice may be executed without considering the success or failure of the special condition. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the jackpot result is included.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of this embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to other embodiments and modifications thereof, or may be applied to other embodiments and modifications thereof by combining some or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in each embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration composed of combinations of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  In the main special hold notice setting process, the address information of the set time table corresponding to the current set time is stored, and the variable display time of each game time is set by reading the address information at each game time. However, it may be changed as follows. FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special storage area 235 provided in the RAM 204 of this modification.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the special holding storage area 235 is associated with the first holding area RE1, the second holding area RE2, the third holding area RE3, and the fourth holding area RE4 of the holding ball storage area 232. A first holding area 235a, a second holding area 235b, a third holding area 235c, and a fourth holding area 235d are provided. Then, when the set time in this special hold notice is determined in step S4910, the variable display time information assigned to each hold information in the set time table or the corresponding numerical information (dedicated random number) is handled. Processing to be stored in the holding areas 235a to 235d to be performed is performed. Then, in the setting process of the variable display time at the time of executing the hold notice, the information on the variable display time of the current game time is acquired from the special storage area 235. This also makes it possible to store information on the variable display time when the special hold notice is executed without changing the variable type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3.

  In particular, with the present modification, the degree of freedom in setting the variable display time is improved as compared with a configuration that is uniquely determined in the set time table. That is, for example, even when the special hold notice is executed, if the variable display time is changed (for example, when the change is made in accordance with the change in the number N of hold memories), the change is performed. What is necessary is just to change the value of the said areas for holding 235a-235d. In this case, in order to match the special conditions in the special hold notice, the variable display time of the other special hold storage area 235 is increased or decreased by that amount, or the information in which the change display time is changed is displayed. It is good to set it as the structure adjusted by the output control apparatus 82 side, such as outputting to the production control apparatus 82.

  In the above-described embodiment, even when the variable display time is set when the hold notice is executed, the values of the change type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3 may be temporarily acquired from the hold ball storage area 232. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event that the significance of the pending storage of the variation type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3 is lost. As this configuration, for example, the values of the variation type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, it is determined whether or not the values of these counters are not less than a predetermined value (for example, 1000) exceeding the update upper limit value, and the pending execution flag Is stored and is less than the predetermined value, the variable display time at the time of the hold notice is set, and if the hold execution flag is stored but the predetermined value or more, the error process is executed. . In this way, when the fluctuation type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3 at the time of obtaining the hold information are abnormal values, it is possible to perform processing corresponding to the values.

  As the setting time table, the variation type counter CS, the reach random number counter C3, and the setting time are uniquely associated with each other, and the variable display time may be set for each pending number. In this way, it is not necessary to provide a new random number for determining the set time, and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  In the embodiment described above, the effect using the time display image Gp or the like in the first embodiment or the like has been described as an example of the special hold notice. However, as a special condition, whether or not other conditions are satisfied is set, and accordingly Thus, any configuration may be used as long as the change display time is changed. For example, using the point that the fluctuation display time and the reach display are related as the fluctuation pattern, the success or failure is determined as a special condition that the reach display is generated a predetermined number of times (continuous), and the fluctuation display time is adjusted accordingly. It is good also as a structure which sets. Further, if the variable display time is long, a predetermined effect (such as the appearance of a character) is likely to occur, and the success or failure is determined as a special condition that the predetermined effect occurs a predetermined number of times, and the variable display time is accordingly adjusted. It is good also as a structure which sets.

  In the said embodiment, although it was set as the structure to which the item A is provided based on special condition establishment, the privilege provided is not limited to this, Other privileges may be sufficient. For example, it may be a privilege related to a player's profit so that a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out as a privilege, or may be a rare image or the like. Moreover, it is good also as a structure where a pending | holding image changes like 1st Embodiment. Especially in the configuration where the hold image changes, a special condition is set to change the hold image for the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, specifically, the special hold notice was triggered. It is preferable to set a variable display time for each game time up to the game time immediately before the hold information as a target of the special condition. In this way, it is ensured that the hold image for the hold information that triggers the special hold notice changes.

  Like the seventh embodiment, the hold information (holding information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit) that is preferentially determined regardless of the acquisition order of the hold information, and the postponement In the configuration having the hold information (holding information stored in the first result display holding area Ra), the following may be performed. For example, the timer subtraction process (timer management process, step S2203 in FIG. 35) may be stopped when the hold information that is the priority determination target is acquired during execution of the special hold notice. Good. In this way, contradictions in special conditions can be avoided with a relatively simple configuration.

  When the hold information that is the target of the determination of priority is acquired and the hold information is a predetermined result (for example, a jackpot result), an effect of forcibly establishing a special condition ( For example, the time display image Gp may be exploded to produce “0:00”.

  A configuration for performing processing to change the address information of the set time pattern stored in correspondence with the increase in the hold information so as not to change the set time when the hold information that is the target of the determination of priority is acquired. It is good. For example, in a situation where address A (8) is stored and 80 sec is set as the set time, if one hold information that is a target of the determination of priority is acquired preferentially, the set time is held at 80 sec. A process of changing the stored address to B (11) to B (13) in correspondence with the increase in the number of reservations is executed. In this way, since the set time is not changed, there is no contradiction in special conditions.

  When the hold information that is the target of the determination of priority is acquired preferentially, the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice may be shifted. That is, for example, in the situation where three pieces of hold information are stored in the first result display portion hold area Ra, and the third hold information is the subject of the special hold notice, for the second result display portion When one piece of hold information is acquired in the hold area Rb, the second hold information in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit may be shifted as a target of the special hold notice. In this way, even if the address information of the set time pattern is not changed, the success or failure of the special condition does not change and no contradiction occurs.

  In the special hold notice, the end timing of the special condition, that is, the timing of setting the timer to “0:00” is not limited to the end of the change of the game times, and may be another timing during the game times. In this case, it may be configured to change (subtract / increase) the set time in the set time table in accordance with the other timing.

  In the present embodiment, the subtraction start timing of the timer subtraction process is the start time of the game for the hold information that is first digested after the special hold notice is set. It may be configured such that the subtraction of the timer subtraction process or the special hold notice itself is started with a predetermined period shifted from that timing. In this case, in the main side special hold advance notice setting process of the main control device 81, a process for grasping the remaining fluctuation display time of the currently executed game time is added, and the remaining fluctuation display is performed at the set time determined from the set time table. It may be configured to add time or subtract a predetermined period shifted from the added time.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the following effects are set using the configuration for changing the variable display time as in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram for explaining special game times in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, when the acquired hold information is a jackpot result and the previous hold information is a missed result, the hold information acquired this time is set as a special game number, and the one previous to the special game number. In the game round, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (b), a super reach as a result of losing is executed. Then, as the next special game round after the super-reach that resulted in the losing result, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the upper symbol row Z1 that formed the reach line in the super-reach resulting in the losing result and the lower While the symbol row Z3 is stopped, only the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed, the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is moved to the reach line, and the special game round is ended.

  That is, in the special game times, a so-called re-variation effect in reach display can be realized by different game times (following game times). And the structure which changes the variable display time shown to the said 11th Embodiment is utilized for realization of this special game round.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a winning process for an operation port in the present embodiment.

  The winning process of the present embodiment is basically the same as the winning process for the operation port (FIG. 7) shown in the first embodiment, but between the process of step S205 and the process of step S206. A process for setting a special game time has been added. In other words, in the present embodiment, similar to the processing of step S201 to step S205, after the processing of step S5501 to step S5505 is executed, the processing for special game is executed in step S5506. After executing the process of step S5506, the process of step S5507 to step S5509 is executed in the same manner as the process of step S206 to step S208. If a negative determination is made in step S5508, the main winning process is terminated.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the special game turning process in step S5506.

  The first half of the special game round process is basically the same as the above-described confirmation process for holding notice. That is, in step S5601 to step S5609, for example, similar to the processing in step S4801 to step S4809, the determination process for determining whether or not the hold information is acquired this time and the process for shifting to the determination of the lottery mode for the hold information are performed. It should be noted that a high probability flag for holding may be separately provided for the special game times process in relation to the subsequent confirmation process for holding notice (step S5507).

  If the hold information acquired this time is a detachment result (step S5608: NO), the special game turning process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is any probability variation jackpot result or normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S5610 after the process of step S5607 or step S5609. In step S5610, it is determined whether or not the pending storage number N is greater than 1 (2 or more). That is, it is determined whether or not there is pending information that is the target of the determination of the success / failure before the currently acquired pending information and the game times have not yet started. If the number N of reserved memories is 1, the special game turn process is terminated as it is.

  If the number N of reserved memories is greater than 1, it is determined in step S5611 whether or not the jackpot result is included in the held information that is the target of the determination before the currently acquired held information. If the jackpot result is included, the special game recovery process is terminated as it is.

  If the jackpot result is not included, special game times lottery processing is executed in step S5612. In this embodiment, the winning probability of the lottery process is set to 10%. In other words, one out of every 10 jackpot results is set as a special game.

  The winning probability of the special game times is arbitrary, and may be higher or lower than 10%. Further, the winning probability may be set differently depending on the gaming state. In particular, during the low probability mode, since the probability of a miss result is high even if it is not set as a special game round, the occurrence frequency of super reach is higher than in the high probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for super reach by increasing the winning probability during the low probability mode. Conversely, lowering the winning probability during the high-probability mode can reduce the frequency of useless productions (productions in which a super-reach resulting in a losing result is performed before the game round that results in a big hit). Is preferred.

  In step S5613, it is determined whether or not a special game round is won. If it is not won, the special game recovery process is terminated. If it has been won, in step S5614, a process for determining the set time for the current special game round is executed. In this process, the number of holds excluding the hold information acquired this time is grasped, and the setting time table for special game times is acquired from the ROM 203, and the current special game times and fluctuations of game times to be digested before that are obtained. Set the display time. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (c), a set time table corresponding to the number of holdings is provided as a set time table for performing special game times. In the set time table, a plurality of patterns are defined such that the special game times and the variation display time of the previous game times and the effect patterns of each game time have a one-to-one relationship. Address information is stored so as to have a one-to-one relationship with each pattern.

  For example, when the address D (1) in FIG. 90A is selected as a pattern to be selected when the number of reservations is 1 (two when the number of reservations acquired this time is added), the current acquisition is performed. The game times for the held information are designated as special game times (variable display time is 20 seconds, production pattern is re-variable production), and Super Reach A (variable display time is 45 seconds) which is the result of the previous game round. Is set to be executed.

  For example, when the address E (3) in FIG. 90B is selected as a pattern to be selected when the number of reservations is two (three when the number of reservations acquired this time is added), the current acquisition is performed. The game times for the held information are designated as special game times, and the super-reach C (variable display time is 90 sec), which is a result of losing in the previous game time, is executed. It is set so that a completely out-of-game game time (variable display time is 5 sec) that does not generate reach is executed.

  For example, when the number of reservations is 3 (4 when the number of reservations acquired this time is added), when address F (9) is selected in FIG. 90C, the current acquisition is performed. The game times for the held information are designated as special game times, and super-reach C (variable display time is 90 sec) is set to be executed in any of the previous three game times.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of reserves increases, it is easy to select an effect pattern in which reach detachment continues before the special game round. More specifically, when the number of game times before the game time set as the special game time is 2 (the number of holdings is 2), the probability of missed reach is 3/6 (50.0%) Occurs continuously. On the other hand, when the number of game times before the game time set as the special game time is 3 (the number of holdings is 3), the reach failure is continuously with a probability of 6/9 (66.7%). Occur. Further, in the case where there is a continuous reach failure when the previous game number is 3, the reach loss is 3 consecutive with a probability of 3/6 (50.0%). In this way, by continuing the missed reach, it can be expected that the player will hit the next time, and even the reach that is missed can be interested.

  For example, in a configuration in which super reach is continuous as in addresses F (7) to F (9), super reach A → super reach B → super reach C in order so that the expectation of jackpot increases in order. An effect pattern for super reach may be set. In this way, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation that the next will come true.

  In addition, instead of executing super reach in each game time, an effect that straddles a plurality of game times (for example, an effect using animation, a moving image, or the like like story reach) may be set. If such an effect over a plurality of game times is executed, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation that a big hit result will be obtained at that game time (the last game time).

  In step S5614, using the number of holding information and the random number counter for lottery for the set time for the current special game round, it is determined which effect pattern is to be used, and the determined effect pattern is supported. A process of storing the address information in the address information storage area of the RAM 204 is executed.

  In a succeeding step S5615, a process of inputting the current number of reservations to the reservation number counter HK is executed. In step S5616, a process for storing a special game number flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 is executed, and then the special game number process is terminated. The special game times flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to recognize that the special game times are set.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time in the present embodiment.

  In the setting process of the present embodiment, basically the same process as the setting process of the variable display time in the eleventh embodiment is performed. That is, in steps S5701 to S5705, the same processing as the processing in steps S5301 to S5305 is performed. In step S5701, the presence / absence of the special game turn flag is confirmed instead of the process of confirming the presence / absence of the pending notice execution flag. If the special game times flag is stored in step S5701, the variable display time is set in step S5706, and then the variable display time is set in step S5705. Do.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time when the special game round is executed in step S5706.

  In this setting process, basically, the same process as the process of the variable display time setting process (FIG. 84) at the time of the hold notice execution is performed. That is, in step S5801, address information corresponding to the effect pattern is read as the current set time pattern, and in step S5802, the hold number counter HK is grasped. In step S5803, a process for grasping the corresponding variable display time is executed. In step S5804, a process of decrementing the hold number counter HK by 1 is performed. In step S5805, it is determined whether or not the hold number counter HK after subtraction has become zero. If it is 0, the special game times flag is erased in step S5806, and if it is not 0, the present setting process is terminated.

  Here, in the change command or type command set in the change start process (FIG. 11) in this embodiment, information indicating whether or not the current game time is a special game time is set. Then, in the variation starting process on the side of the effect control device 82, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 93, in step S5901, it is determined whether or not the game time to be started this time is a special game time. In step S5902, a normal variation start process is executed. In this case, various settings are performed so that game turn effects corresponding to information on the game results included in the change command and the type command and information on the change display time are executed. On the other hand, if it is a special game round, a re-variation process is executed in step S5903. In the processing for re-variation, on the premise that the super reach that is the result of losing is executed at the game times before the current game time, various changes are made so that the jackpot symbols are aligned by changing only the middle symbol row Z2. Set up.

  As described above, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the result was a jackpot at the time of obtaining the hold information, the change display time of each game time is changed so as to change the effect pattern of the subsequent game times. As a result, it is possible to make the effects for game times even more diverse, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  When changing the production pattern, the super reach display that is out of play in the game round before the jackpot result is performed, and the variable display time is set according to the contents of the super reach. In this case, on the side of the production control device 82, since the variable display time and the production content are set to be uniquely determined, it is not necessary to force the production control device 82 to change excessively, and it is simple. With the configuration, it is possible to link the change of the change display time and the change of the effect pattern.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of this embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to other embodiments and modifications thereof, or may be applied to other embodiments and modifications thereof by combining some or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in each embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration composed of combinations of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  Although the re-variation effect is executed as the specific game time, the normal reach or the direct hit effect may be used. That is, normally, an effect that does not expect the player to receive a jackpot result may be executed in the special game round, and the result may be a jackpot result. In this way, it is possible to enhance the surprising effect of having a jackpot result in the special game times.

  As an effect of the previous stage of performing the re-variation effect, a roaring effect in which the name is expected to re-variate by changing the middle symbol row Z2 or the like may be set. And it is good also as a structure which performs this roaring production also after the normal losing reach (super-reach which becomes losing) in the game time which is not a special game time next time. If it does in this way, it will become possible to raise expectation that a re-variation production may be performed after a roaring production.

  Although the special game times are executed after the super reach, the special game times may be executed after the normal reach. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a special game number is executed after a non-reach game time (normally missed). The game times after non-reach is, for example, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a so-called chance eye that does not form a reach line and stops the same kind of symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3). Set the stop result of the game times before the special game times. And in special game times, it sets so that each symbol row Z1-Z3 may be changed again and it may become a jackpot result. Even in these cases, when it is determined to execute the special game times (at the time of holding acquisition), it is preferable to set (change) the change display time of the game times before the special game times.

  The special game times have been described on the premise that the game times will be the jackpot result, but the game times that are the result of losing may be set as the special game times. In this way, even if a re-changing effect is generated, the jackpot is not confirmed, and the effect can be focused until the end.

  Depending on the type of jackpot result, it may be configured to include a jackpot result that is not set as a special game time. For example, although it is possible to set a special game number if it is a probable jackpot result, it is not set to a special game time if it is a normal jackpot result. If it does in this way, if it becomes a big hit by a re-variation production, it will be decided that it is a probability change big hit result, and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree with respect to special game times more.

  At the time of acquisition of hold information, when the jackpot result is included in the hold information digested before the acquired hold information, it is configured not to set the special game times, but the hold to be digested before that In the game times related to the information, when a predetermined effect (reach effect, notice effect, etc.) is set, the special game times may not be set. In this way, it is possible to avoid the complexity of the process of having to set the effect again by changing the variable display time even though the predetermined effect has been set. .

  Further, when a predetermined effect is set, a special game number may be set positively. For example, when the game result of the hold information acquired this time is a predetermined result (a jackpot result), and the effect set for the game times to be digested immediately before is a predetermined effect (super reach), The lottery probability of the special game times may be set so that the special game times are easier than usual. In this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load by reducing the frequency of the rewrite processing of the game time variation display time by setting the special game times.

  Even if the special game times are set at the time of holding acquisition, the game may be canceled based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. For example, as in the seventh embodiment, in the configuration in which superiority or inferiority is set in the digestion of the hold information, after the special game times are set, the hold information set in the special game times and the hold information are immediately before the hold information. It is assumed that the hold information on the side that is preferentially digested is acquired so as to be interrupted and digested with the expected hold information. That is, the game information has already started for the hold information immediately before the hold information set for the special game times, and is preferentially digested after the start of the game times and before the start of the special game times. Suppose that the hold information on the receiving side is acquired. In this case, in the game times related to the previous holding information, although there is no production contradiction even if super reach that is left out as it is, depending on the holding information on the side that is preferentially digested, An inconvenience may occur in the production on the special game times side. That is, in the special game times, the re-variation effect of the special game times is set on the premise of the stoppage result of the reach loss (change display of only the middle symbol row Z2). If the game times are non-reachable, the re-variation effect is changed in the production (the game time on the interrupted side is changed from non-reach to non-reach, or in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3) It is necessary to change to execute a re-variation effect. Therefore, if an interrupt such as that described above occurs, the special game times setting is canceled (that is, the normal game times effect is executed based on the variation type counter CS or the like acquired when the hold information is acquired). It is possible to avoid an extreme increase in processing load due to a change in production.

  In the configuration in which the interruption of the holding information on the priority side can be generated as in the above configuration, as shown in the modification of the eleventh embodiment, the interrupting holding information with the special game times being enabled A configuration may be adopted in which the reserved number counter HK is increased and a corresponding table is referred to. Further, if the interrupted hold information is hold information corresponding to the setting of the special game times (a jackpot result), the game times related to the interrupted hold information may be set as the special game times. In this case, it may be configured to cancel the setting of the special game times for the hold information related to the original special game times (return to the game times that will be a jackpot result through a normal game time effect).

  In the configuration in which the interruption of the hold information on the priority side can occur as in the above configuration, the game information is being executed, and the information acquired this time corresponds to the next game operation (in the situation where the number of reservations is 0) If the hold information is a predetermined result, etc. (a jackpot result), the game time related to the acquired hold information is set as a special game time and interrupted before the start of the special game time. If the occurrence occurs, the game time related to the interrupted hold information is set as the game time (super reach) before the special game time, and the special game time may be canceled if no interruption occurs. In this way, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the special game times are executed, with the possibility that the hold information acquired with the hold number 0 is also set as the special game times. In this case, the probability of making a special game round in a situation where the number of holdings is 0 may be varied depending on a situation where an interruption is likely to occur (a level of support mode). More specifically, the hold information acquired when the number of hold is 0 is more special in the situation where interruption is more likely to occur (high frequency support mode) than in the situation where interruption is less likely to occur (low frequency support mode). Increasing the probability of game times can reduce the frequency with which special game times are canceled without interruption.

  You may implement combining the special reservation notice which gives a privilege according to special conditions establishment like 1st Embodiment etc., and the special game times in the said embodiment. For example, if special game times are set easily during execution of special hold notices when special conditions are met (easily winning lotteries for special game times), the relationship between special hold notices and special game times is increased, It is possible to further increase the attention level of the special reservation notice being executed. In the special game times, the higher the expectation (for example, super reach) in the previous game times (the production of the result of losing results), the greater the surprise when the special game times occur. . Therefore, as a special condition establishment privilege in the special hold notice, the type of the hold image is changed to a higher expectation side as in the first embodiment, while the special hold notice has been targeted. If the next game time is a special game time, even if the game time that was the subject of the special hold notice is missed, the expectation that the next game time will be won continues. It becomes possible to make it.

  Contrary to the above configuration, the special game times may be easily set at the time of execution of the special reservation notice that the special condition is not satisfied. In this way, for example, even if it is predicted that the special condition will not be established early in the special reservation notice (by the set time) due to the production, it can be expected that a special game round will occur thereafter. It is possible to maintain the degree of attention during execution of the special hold notice.

  In addition, a configuration that makes it easy to set / make it difficult to set the special game times according to the number of holds corresponding to the special hold notice (the number of hold information that is digested up to the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice) It is good. Since the total variation display time tends to be longer as the number of reserved items increases, the special condition in the special reservation notice is more likely to be established. For this reason, for example, when the number of reserved items corresponding to the special reservation notice increases, the special game times can be set more easily, and the situation in which special conditions are easily established can be linked to the ease of setting the special game times. . On the other hand, when the number of reserved games corresponding to the special reservation notice increases, the special game times are less likely to be set, and the effect of increasing the degree of attention by providing a privilege (item A or the like) different from the winning ball due to the jackpot etc. Can be suitably achieved. In this case, for example, if a special bonus corresponding to the special hold notice is given before the start of the special game round (previous game round), the special game round and the special grant notice will not be batting. Can be enjoyed in a balanced manner.

  In the special hold advance notice, the special hold notice can be executed regardless of the number of acquired hold information, and the game times can be interrupted (can be terminated) with the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. . And in the situation where there is no hold information next to the hold information subject to special hold notice, if new hold information is acquired and the acquired hold information is a jackpot result, the acquired hold The game times related to the information may be configured to be easy / hard to make the special game times. In this case, the special hold notice was scheduled to end before the acquired hold information until the hold information, which is a jackpot result, was acquired. It cannot be changed depending on the hold information acquired. Therefore, there is a concern that an act of enjoying only the effect until the end of the special reservation notice, that is, an action of so-called stop is performed so as not to acquire new reservation information. Therefore, if the special hold notice is ended as it is, and a special game round is likely to occur with respect to the newly obtained hold information, a new special notice will be made at the end of the special hold notice (during the game play to be finished) It is possible to feel a special feeling of acquiring the hold information, and the above-mentioned stopping action can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that special game times are unlikely to occur depending on the hold information acquired during the game round when the special hold notice ends, the impression that the special hold notice and special game round are separate effects will be raised, In addition to being able to entertain, it is possible to select from various types of effects instead of limited effects such as special game times for the next game times after the end of the special hold notice. The production can be diversified. Moreover, if the privilege in the special hold notice is not only the provision of the item A or the like but also the change of the hold image as in the first embodiment, it causes the significance of obtaining hold information just before the end of the special hold notice. This also makes it possible to suppress the stopping action.

  Further, for the hold information acquired during execution of the special hold notice, a variable display time for the acquired hold information is set in relation to the game result of the hold information and the special condition in the special hold notice being executed. It is good. In this case, the configuration in which the order of the determination of the acquisition of the special information acquired is prioritized and the order of the determination of the acquisition as the acquisition order so that the variable display time for the acquired reservation information can be involved in the special conditions in the special reservation notice. However, it is preferable that the special hold notice being executed can be extended. And, for example, when executing a special hold notice such as the first embodiment in which special conditions are not satisfied, if hold information that is a jackpot result is acquired, the special conditions in the special hold notice being executed are In order to be established, the remaining time in the special hold notice being executed is referred to, and the game time variable display time related to the acquired hold information is set to be equal to or longer than the remaining time. In this way, it is possible to bring about the significance of newly acquiring hold information during execution of the special hold notice.

  In addition, you may change this embodiment as follows. FIG. 94A is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process of the present modification. As already described, the hold display setting process is a process executed when a hold command is received in the hold control command corresponding process of the effect control device 82, and the hold image corresponding to the hold information acquired this time is displayed. This is a process for setting.

  In step S6001, a process for grasping the game result is executed based on the received hold command, and in step S6002, a process for grasping the variable display time is executed. Through these processes, it is possible to grasp what kind of effects (the presence or absence of reach, the type thereof, etc.) are executed in the game times for the hold information acquired this time. In step S6003, a process of acquiring a holding image selection table from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 is executed.

  As the holding image selection table, as shown in FIGS. 94 (b) to 94 (e), different tables are provided depending on the game result and whether or not it is a special game round. In the hold image selection table for the hold information that is the jackpot result at the normal time, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the first hold image P1 (A) is 2% and the second hold image P2 (B). Is 30%, the third hold image P3 (C) is 40%, the fourth hold image P4 (D) is 20%, and the fifth hold image P5 (E) is selected with a probability of 8%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 94 (d), in the hold image selection table for the hold information that is the result of the detachment at the normal time, the first hold image P1 (A) is 0% and the second hold image. The image P2 (B) has a probability of 10%, the third hold image P3 (C) has a probability of 20%, the fourth hold image P4 (D) has a probability of 30%, and the fifth hold image P5 (E) has a probability of 40%. Selected. As already described, the hold image is set such that the first hold image P1 has the highest jackpot expectation level, and the fifth hold image P5 has the lowest jackpot expectation level. P1, P2, P3 , P4, and P5 are set so that the degree of jackpot expectation increases. Therefore, during normal times, the holding information that is the jackpot result is easier to select the holding image with the smaller number, and the holding information that is the result of losing is easier to select the holding image with the larger number. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), in the hold image selection table for the hold information (hold information that is the target of the special game turn) that is the jackpot result at the time of the special game, The image P1 (A) is 0%, the second hold image P2 (B) is 0%, the third hold image P3 (C) is 10%, the fourth hold image P4 (D) is 30%, the fifth The holding image P5 (E) is selected with a probability of 60%. In other words, at the time of the special game round, despite the fact that it is a jackpot result, it is set so that the image for holding has a low jackpot expectation level is easily selected, and the jackpot expectation level is higher than the normal loss result. It is set so that a low one can be easily selected.

  By doing in this way, it is predicted that it is a jackpot result in advance for the game times set as the special game times, and the re-variation effect itself is expected, so the earlier It is possible to avoid an event in which attention cannot be paid to the production, that is, the super reach in the game times immediately before the special game times. And by making the game times set as the special game times predict in advance as a result of losing in the first place, it is possible to further enhance the surprise effect due to the re-variation effect being performed as the special game times. .

  Here, as already explained, in the game times related to the hold information that is the jackpot result in the normal game times instead of the special game times, the variation display time is out of the game times related to the hold information that is the result (out) ( For example, see FIG. In addition, in the game times related to the hold information that is a jackpot result in the normal game times, the super reach A to C is selected rather than the probability that the reach is not generated or the normal reach is selected (reach random number counter C3 = 0 to 19). (Reach random number counter C3 = 20 to 99) is higher. Therefore, normally, it is considered that the variable display time (45 sec to 60 sec) corresponding to the super reach A to C is set in the game times related to the hold information that is the jackpot result. On the other hand, in the special game times, a variable display time shorter than the variable display time corresponding to super reach A to C is set (20 sec, see FIG. 90). In other words, the special game times can be said to be game times having a variable display time shorter than the other game times that result in the jackpot.

  On the other hand, as described above, it is easy to select a variation display time of the game times in which the game result is out of the game result, as described above. If normal, the probability that super reach A to C is selected (reach random number counter C3 = 90 to 99) rather than the probability that reach is not generated or normal reach is selected (reach random number counter C3 = 0 to 89). Is lower. On the other hand, in the game times before the special game times, the super reach A to C is selected even though the game result is a missed result. Therefore, the game times (especially one before) before the special game times can be said to be game times having a longer variable display time than usual even if the result is a missed result.

  In other words, when the variable display time is long → short and the hold information continues in the order of the game result is lost → hit, the hold image is a high hold expectation image → a low hold image. It is easy to set the order. By doing so, the player expects the previous hold information (out) side as described above, and the player does not expect the next hold information (win) side. For a player who expects the previous hold information (out), it is highly expected that even if the game time for the hold information is prolonged, it will be a jackpot result. It is thought that the feeling of prolonged feeling will fade. On the other hand, if the game round ends with a miss, the degree of discouragement can be significant. And if the next game time becomes an effect of a long variation display time, it is assumed that it will be lost again due to the result of the previous game time (long time and off), and it will simply change Even if the display time is long, the degree of attention to the next game round (winning) may decrease. In that respect, since the variable display time is set short for the next game time, not only can the decline in attention be suppressed, but the emotion of disappointment → surprise can be greatly shaken, greatly enhancing interest. be able to.

  Note that it is low when the hold information is a jackpot result and the variation display time of the game times related to the hold information is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, an average change display time in other game times). The hold image on the expectation side may be easily selected. Also, it is high when the hold information is a result of losing, and the variation display time of the game times related to the hold information is longer than a predetermined period (for example, longer than the average change display time in other game times). The hold image on the expectation side may be easily selected.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 94 (d), in the hold image selection table for the hold information that is the result of losing one time before the special game, the first hold image P1 (A) is 0%, The holding image P2 (B) is 30%, the third holding image P3 (C) is 40%, the fourth holding image P4 (D) is 20%, and the fifth holding image P5 (E) is 10%. Selected by probability. In other words, it is easy to select a holding image with a high expectation level for the big hit, even though the holding image for the gaming time that is the result of the previous gaming game losing result is a losing result. Is set.

  By doing in this way, it is possible to predict in advance that the jackpot result will be made one time before the special game times, and to pay attention to the super reach before the special game times. After that, by executing the re-variation effect as the special game times, it is possible to further enhance the surprising effect.

  Moreover, you may apply the said embodiment to each 1st-11th embodiment. 95 (a) and 95 (b) are explanatory diagrams showing a holding image selection table in the present modification, and FIG. 95 (c) shows an overview of a special holding notice table at the time of detachment in the present modification. It is explanatory drawing shown. As already described, the special reservation notice table at the time of detachment is a table that is referred to at step S2001 in the effect setting processing at the time of detachment in the effect control device 82 (FIG. 32).

  FIG. 95 (a) is the same as the table of FIG. 94 (d), and shows the selection rate of the hold image for the hold information for detachment at the normal time. FIG. 95 (b) shows the selection rate of the holding image for the holding information one time before the special game times, and in this modification, the fourth holding image P4 has a high probability (100% probability). To be selected. Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), in the present modification, a special short notice for a short time during which a special condition is likely to be satisfied is easily executed in the game times one time before the special game times. In this modification, the privilege based on the establishment of the special condition for the special reservation notice is a change in the reservation image shown in the first embodiment.

  By doing as described above, it is easy to establish the special condition of the special reservation notice in the game game one time before the special game time, thereby changing the image for holding as if the game game one time before the special game time. Can be expected to be a jackpot result. As a result, the surprising effect of performing the re-variation effect after that can be made more prominent, and the fatigue caused by the long-time effect can be eliminated in the previous game round. It becomes possible.

  The effect pattern of the special game times is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. Modification examples of the effect pattern and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following drawings, symbols and the like used for various effects on the display screen G are simplified.

  FIG. 96 shows a case where an outlier reach is generated in an even number of main symbols (non-specific symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result) in the game times before the special game times. FIG. 96 (a) shows a case where the game result of the special game times is a probable jackpot result. As described above, the game results before the special game times are different from the game results of the special game times. An outreach display corresponding to is performed. Therefore, in the special game times, although the game results are different from the game results of the special game times, it is re-established to establish an even number of main symbol combinations by using the stop result of the outreach display of the previous game times. Perform fluctuating effects. Thereafter, a so-called promotion effect is performed in which the result notified as the normal jackpot result is promoted to the probability variation jackpot result, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the game result of the special game times is stopped and displayed. If it does in this way, it can control that the effect pattern of the reach display before special game times becomes limited by the game result in special game times. Furthermore, in a configuration in which different types of benefits are obtained for players, such as a promising jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, even if the occurrence of a re-shifting effect is detected in advance, If a player is perceived to have few benefits, he will not be able to enjoy it even if he predicts in advance that it will be a big hit, especially before the special game. Since the display times of game times are easily set to be long, the above-mentioned non-enjoyable period can be long. Therefore, by providing a promotion effect as described above, even if the effect (reach display) in the game times before the special game times suggests an unfavorable game result for the player, The degree of attention can be suitably maintained without interruption.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), as the re-variation effect, an effect of stopping a symbol (“V” symbol in the figure) different from the main symbol forming the reach line is performed. After that, an effect that informs the type of jackpot (such as a battle effect or the like, if the main character wins the battle results in a promising jackpot result, and if it loses the battle, it usually results in a jackpot result) The combination of symbols corresponding to the result is notified. Even in this case, it is possible to avoid an event that the sense of expectation is lowered depending on the type of reach display in the game times before the special game times.

  The promotion effect and the effect of notifying the jackpot type may be performed after the special game round. That is, these effects may be performed during the opening period at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, during the opening / closing execution mode, or during the ending period at the end.

  In FIG. 97, as a reach display before the special game round, a reach display having the possibility of any jackpot result (for example, a cross-line reach in which a reach by a specific symbol and a reach by a non-specific symbol are performed in parallel) is displayed. Do. Then, the reach display in the game times before the special game times is a stop result corresponding to the result of losing. When it is a special game time, a re-variation effect is performed so that symbols corresponding to the game result of the special game time are aligned on the reach line, and the type of the jackpot result is notified. That is, if the result is a normal jackpot result, a re-variation effect is performed so that even-numbered main symbols are aligned, and if it is a probable variation jackpot result, a re-change effect is performed so that odd-numbered main symbols are aligned. In this way, it is possible to detect that a jackpot result is obtained by the occurrence of a re-variation effect, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the re-change effect from the viewpoint of which symbols are available.

  FIG. 98 shows an effect pattern in which the re-variation effect is not performed in the special game times. For example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), in the game times before the special game times, a symbol corresponding to the result of losing is displayed to end the game times. When it comes to special game times, these symbols are displayed with a display effect (bubbles, smoke, etc.) and a shield effect that shields them (difficult to see or cannot be visually recognized), then a combination of symbols corresponding to the special game times Is displayed to notify the game result of the special game times. In this way, it is possible to further improve the degree of freedom of the stop position of the symbol corresponding to the reach display symbol in the game times before the special game times and the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. That is, the symbols forming the reach line can affect the game result of the special game times as described above. For example, in the re-variation effect in the special game times, the period during which the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed is displayed. Assuming the predetermined period, the amount of deviation between the reach line and the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 in the reach display in the game times before the special game times depends on the predetermined period. Then, only the reach display with the predetermined deviation amount is difficult to be generated in the game times before the special game times, leading to monotonization of the effect pattern of the reach display, and easy prediction in advance of the presence or absence of the special game times is facilitated. In other words, the surprising effects of special game times may be reduced. Therefore, if the symbols are aligned during the shielding effect as described above, the position of the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is irrelevant, and any reach display effect pattern in the game times before the special game times, Subsequent game times can be displayed with the symbols aligned.

  In addition, if the shielding effect is performed in the special game times, it is not necessary to generate reach display even in the game times before the special game times. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), even if the chance is stopped and displayed in the game times before the special game times, the shielding effect is performed in the next game time (special game times). It is possible to display the symbols in alignment.

  As the shielding effect, for example, the entire display screen G may be displayed in black (blacked out) so that not only the entire symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 but also the background and the like are not visible. The greater the difference in visibility from before being visible in a state where the symbols are aligned, the greater the surprise effect when it becomes visible.

  In addition, you may provide a roaring effect before effects, such as a shielding effect. For example, if the moving effect is used to perform a shielding effect, as a pre-operation that may cause an operation to shield the display screen G by the movable character, for example, an effect of rattling the movable character is performed. To do. In addition, as a pre-operation, an effect may be generated on the display screen G near the movable accessory.

  FIG. 99 shows another form of the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 that is changed in the special game round. That is, in the said embodiment, although the structure which fluctuates the middle symbol row | line | column Z2 was shown, it is good not only as this but the structure which displays all the symbol row | line | columns Z1-Z3 variably, and displays a symbol in alignment, The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (for example, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3) may be variably displayed, or the symbol rows Z1 and Z3 different from the middle symbol row Z2 may be variably displayed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which changes the fluctuation speed of the symbol row | line | columns Z1-Z3 to be varied. In the figure, the difference in fluctuation speed is expressed by the difference in the thickness of the arrows. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which changes a fluctuation direction with each symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3. In the figure, the difference in the fluctuation direction is expressed by the difference in the direction of the arrow. Furthermore, the fluctuation direction is not limited to either the left-right direction (normal fluctuation direction), but fluctuates in the front-rear direction (a pattern that fluctuates so as to be sucked into the back side and a pattern that fluctuates so as to protrude toward the front side) It is good also as a structure to make it change, and it is good also as a structure from which the fluctuation direction of these back sides and this side differs according to each symbol. These patterns may be combined in combination. Furthermore, for example, each of these patterns is associated with the types of symbols arranged in the special game round (specifically, when there are a large number of fluctuating symbol sequences, a pattern and speed at which a specific symbol (odd symbol) is easily aligned) It is possible to pay attention to which pattern causes re-variation, such as a pattern that is easy to align with a specific pattern if it is fast, a pattern that a specific pattern is easy to align if the direction of change is different, or their reverse pattern). Can be used to improve interest.

  It is good also as a structure which changes the symbol sequence Z1-Z3 changed, and its speed and direction according to the stop result of the game round before a special game round. In FIG. 100, for example, the main symbol with “7” stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 in the middle line L2 is used as a reference symbol, and the amount of deviation from the other symbol rows Z2 and Z3 is calculated. Based on the above, the variation speeds and directions of the other symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are made different. For example, if the amount of deviation is greater than a predetermined amount, the speed of fluctuation is increased, or if the left and right deviation amounts are compared and the side with the smaller deviation amount is set as the fluctuation direction, the time required for re-variation is shortened. be able to. In the figure, the middle symbol row Z2 is fluctuated leftward, the lower symbol row Z3 is fluctuated rightward, and the fluctuation rate of the lower symbol row Z3 is faster than the fluctuation rate of the middle symbol row Z2. Is shown.

  The reference symbols are not limited to those of the above symbol row Z1, and may be those of other symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, in FIG. 100, the main symbol to which “2” is stopped may be used as the reference symbol in the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. In this case, different symbols (main symbols with “2”) from the main symbol with “7” are used as reference symbols. Also, the re-variable symbol sequence and its speed and direction are different from those described above. In the figure, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed in the left direction, the middle symbol row Z2 is changed in the right direction, and the change rates of both the symbol sequences Z1 and Z2 are the same. Furthermore, it may be configured such that any of the main symbols is selected as a reference symbol in a symbol row in which a plurality of main symbols are stopped on the display screen G (middle symbol row Z2 in FIG. 100). . For example, in FIG. 100, when the main symbol to which “6” is attached in the middle symbol row Z2 is used as the reference symbol, and when the main symbol to which “7” is attached is used as the reference symbol, the symbol row Z1 to be changed is changed. , Z3 have different fluctuation directions and speeds, as well as different symbols.

  It is good also as a structure accompanied with the effect (for example, changing a color, changing, making it light, etc.) which makes a player recognize which stop symbol is made into a standard symbol. This is because the player is interested in the reference symbols if the symbols arranged according to the reference symbols are different as described above.

  In FIG. 101, an effect pattern that suggests the occurrence of a special game time by interposing an effect that cannot occur when each game time is performed continuously between the special game time and the previous game time. Is shown. That is, when each game time occurs continuously, the game time by the variable display is changed until the unreserved pending information is exhausted, such as start of change display → change display → stop of confirmation → start of change display →. Unfolded. On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 101 (a), at the start of the special game times, the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is predetermined even though the hold information corresponding to the special game times exists. The configuration does not start over a period (for example, 3 sec). That is, in the special game times, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started with a delay of a predetermined period than usual. In this way, it becomes possible to detect the occurrence of a re-change effect by making it feel uncomfortable that the change display does not start despite the presence of unreserved pending information, and a novel effect. It can be.

  In the example of FIG. 101 (b), a demonstration screen is displayed (for example, a manufacturer's logo or energy saving mode) at the start of a special game round. In this way, not only does the player feel uncomfortable that the change display does not start despite the presence of unsettled hold information, but the player misunderstands that the game has ended (there is no hold information). Immediately after trying to stand up, a re-changing effect or the like is generated, and it is possible to further enhance the surprising effect of the special game times. It should be noted that the re-variation effect or the like may occur in a period shorter than an assumed period (for example, 5 seconds) until the player leaves the game after leaving the game.

  In the example of FIG. 101 (c), an information communication screen between the portable terminal of the player and the gaming machine is displayed at the start of the special game round. In this way, a re-variation effect or the like will occur immediately after the player has picked up the mobile terminal or the like to communicate, and in addition to the surprising effect described above, It is possible to perform a preparatory operation for taking a picture without detecting the occurrence of a re-variation effect or the like. Note that the above-described information communication screen may not be generated when unreserved pending information exists.

  In the case of performing an effect at the start of these special game rounds, the variable display on the display screen G is not started, but the variable display on the main display unit 43 side is preferably started as usual. In this way, the main display unit 43 can determine whether each of the above-mentioned effects is performed as a special game time effect, or whether the gaming machine is out of order, or the like. As a result, it is possible to entertain the game mainly as a game hall manager who will mainly watch the main display unit 43 side while enjoying the game as a novel effect to the player who will mainly watch the display screen G. It becomes possible to make the state of the machine clear.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 101, an effect that cannot occur when each game time is performed continuously as an effect pattern that suggests the occurrence of a special game time has been described. It is only necessary to have an effect that is expected, and it is only necessary that the difference from the end effect of the game times can be clearly understood. That is, in each game time, as the end effect of the game time, the fixed display is usually performed in a state where the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are completely stopped. Specifically, even after the change display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed, the possibility that the development effect and the re-change effect after the stop can be temporarily performed in the game times thereafter is left. While the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has been completed, the configuration is such that it is perturbed (not completely stopped), or the symbol or background part is in operation, etc., and matches the game result of that game time The completion of one game round can be grasped (game result is notified) by performing a definite display in which a state where the symbol combination (at least a part of the symbols) is completely stopped is performed. On the other hand, it is possible to expect the occurrence of the above-mentioned special game times by performing an expected sustained effect straddling the game times that keeps the expectation for the next game times apart from the confirmation display. The expected sustained effect includes, for example, an effect in which some symbols (main symbols, sub-symbols, background characters, etc. and parts thereof) are operating even during the fixed stop period. The effect that some of the symbols operate even during the fixed stop period may be configured to be performed with a predetermined probability other than the case where the special game times occur. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the special game times will be generated in the next game time not only before the game times where the special game times are generated but also in other game times. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs not only the production | presentation in which some symbols operate | move but the expected continuous production in the display screen G whole. As this production, for example, the background is different from the normal, each design is different from the normal (for example, it is usually a fish-type main design, whereas in the expected sustained production, the dog-type main design It is conceivable that the operation is stopped at a change). In this way, not only can the expectation that the special game times occur be increased, but also the possibility that the expected sustained effect will be missed can be reduced.

  In the example of FIG. 102, an effect that suggests the occurrence of a special game time is performed using a period between the special game time and the game time before the special game time. That is, each game time is continuously performed as described above, such as start of change display → change display → determined display → start of change display,... There is a waiting period in the period until it is done. During this waiting period, an effect that suggests the occurrence of special game times is performed. As the production, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), for example, an operation instruction production of the operation unit 75 (for example, a character display “Press the button!”) Is performed. In this operation instruction effect, an operation instruction period for accepting an operation of the operation unit 75 is provided, and if the operation unit 75 is operated during the operation instruction period, the effect is developed. As the development effect, the shielding effect shown in FIG. 98 may be used. Then, if the next game time is a special game time, a re-variation effect is generated or the symbols are displayed as they are. Let In this way, it is possible to perform a novel effect using a waiting period between game times.

  If it demonstrates in relation to the fluctuation | variation display of the main display part 43, as shown in FIG.102 (b), an operation instruction | indication effect will be performed in the predetermined period in the period when the fluctuation | variation display of the main display part 43 has stopped. May be. That is, the variation display of the game times before the special game times ends at the timing of t1, and the variation display on the main display unit 43 also ends. Thereafter, an operation instruction effect is generated with the operation instruction period from the timing t2 to the timing t3. The variable display corresponding to the special game times (or the normal game times) is started at a timing t4 which is a timing later than the timing t3. In this way, it is possible to ensure a period (timing from t3 to t4) during which an effect (shielding effect or the like) corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 75 performed during the operation instruction period is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 102 (c), a standby period (a period from the timing t1 to the timing t3, for example) that is different (shorter) than the normal standby period (period from the timing t1 to the timing t4). It is good also as an effect which suggests generation | occurrence | production of special game times. That is, it is possible to suggest the occurrence of special game times by changing the length of the waiting period on the main display unit 43 side.

  In addition, the said operation instruction | indication effect is not limited to the structure performed in a standby | waiting period, It is good also as a structure started from the timing at which a fixed display and the temporary stop display before it are performed.

  FIG. 103 shows the relationship with the chance effect (expectation suggestion effect) that can occur in each game round. That is, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), as a chance effect, for example, an effect generated based on an operation of the operation unit 75 at a predetermined timing during a game time (reach display), and the expectation level of the game time It is assumed that a chance effect A having a high degree of expectation and a chance effect B having a low degree of expectation are provided so as to be relatively high and low. That is, when the chance effect A occurs, it is easy to obtain a jackpot result in the game times, and when the chance effect B occurs, the probability of the jackpot result is lower than when the chance effect A occurs. Then, the game times in which the chance effect A has occurred are likely to be a jackpot result, and the next game times are likely to be performed after the jackpot (opening / closing execution mode) in which the chance effect A has occurred and shifted, and the game in which the chance effect B has occurred. It can be said that the number of times is likely to be a missed result, and the next game time is likely to be continued (continuously) after the game time in which the chance effect B is generated. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the game times before the special game times, the chance effect B is set to occur more easily than the chance effect A. In this way, even if it is expected that the chance effect B will occur and the result will be lost in the game times, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the next game time will be a special game time. Become.

  Here, as the chance production as described above, it is clear that it is easier to attract the player's attention if the chance production A with high expectation is generated. On the other hand, if the occurrence frequency of the chance production A is increased, For example, the expectation of the chance effect A may be reduced, and as a result, the chance effect A may not be noticed even if the chance effect A is generated. That is, the chance effect A has a high expectation level because the occurrence frequency is low, and in that respect, the balance between the chance effect A and the chance effect B is important as the chance effect. It can be said that the higher the expectation of chance production A is, the higher. Therefore, if the chance effect B is likely to occur in the game times before the special game times, it is possible to achieve a good balance of expectations in relation to the chance effect A.

  Further, even in the case of the chance effect B, it is considered that it is necessary to generate it somewhat in a scene that leads to a jackpot result. However, if the occurrence frequency in the game round that is the jackpot result is too high, the balance of expectation may be lost due to the chance effect A. Therefore, if the occurrence frequency in the game times before the special game times is increased, the game result of the game times before the special game times is a losing result. However, on the other hand, it is possible to increase the occurrence frequency in a scene that leads to a jackpot result, and to improve the balance between the expectation level and the occurrence frequency of the chance effect B.

  Here, not only the chance production as described above, but also the combination of the types of reach display (super reach A to C, normal reach, etc.) and the respective expectations of the hold image, the game times are expected to be combined. Sophistication of the suggestion suggestion is promoted. And in FIG. 104, the combination pattern of the image for a pending | holding and a chance effect is illustrated as a part of combination of suggestion effects. That is, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), as the hold images for the game times before the special game times, the first hold image P1 (A) to the third hold image P3 (C ) Is selected with a probability of 70%, and the fourth hold image P4 (D) to the fifth hold image P5 (E) having a low expectation level are selected with a probability of 30%, and a high expectation hold image is selected. Is easier to select (see FIG. 94 for more details). Then, the chance effect A and the chance effect B in the game times before the special game times are set so that the selection rates differ depending on the selected holding images, as shown in FIG. 104 (b). Specifically, in FIG. 104 (b-1), the selection rate of the chance effect when the first hold image P1 (A) to the third hold image P3 (C) having high expectation are selected. The chance effect B having a low degree of expectation is set more easily than the chance effect A having a high expectation. In other words, in the reach display of the game times before the special game times executed in a situation where the expectation level is increased by the image for holding, the chance effect B on the side with a low expectation level is likely to occur, and the expectation level is high or low. And suggestive effects occur in the order of high → low. Further, FIG. 104 (b-2) shows the selection rate of the chance effect when the fourth hold image P4 (D) to the fifth hold image P5 (E) having a low expectation are selected. The chance effect A having a high expectation level is set more easily than the chance effect B having a low expectation value. In other words, in the reach display of the game times before the special game times executed in a situation where the expectation level is not so high by the holding image, the chance effect A on the higher expectation side is likely to occur, and the expectation level is high or low. In other words, suggestive effects occur in the order of low → high.

  In general, as a combination of suggestion effects, a pattern that is combined so that the degree of expectation gradually increases is set such that the total expectation degree is likely to be higher like a so-called chance-up (step-up) effect. And as what is set as such also as a player, it is thought that it expects and expects that the expectation degree becomes high gradually about the combination of a some suggestion production. In that respect, since the pattern of FIG. 104 (b-2) is a pattern in which the degree of expectation gradually increases, the player can enjoy the game times with peace of mind. However, since the game times are a result of losing, the result is contrary to the player's expectation. In such a situation, a re-changing effect or the like is generated at the next game time (special game time), so that the surprising effect can be extremely enhanced.

  On the other hand, if only the combinations whose degree of expectation is gradually increased are generated, the total degree of expectation can be lowered due to the occurrence frequency of the combination becoming high. In other words, because a combination different from the combination that gradually increases the degree of expectation occurs, the total expectation of the combination that gradually increases the degree of expectation increases. In that respect, since the pattern of FIG. 104 (b-2) is less likely to occur in the first place and the pattern of FIG. 104 (b-1) is more likely to occur, the expectation in the game times not related to the special game times is expected. It is possible to obtain a surprising effect by the pattern of FIG. 104 (b-2) without breaking the balance of the degree.

  In addition, when the chance effect B occurs in the game times that have been viewed as having a high degree of expectation as in the pattern of FIG. 104 (b-1), it is considered that the interest in the game times can be extremely reduced. In particular, since the game times (game times before the special game times) are easy to select a long display time, the game times that are digested in a situation where the degree of attention is low will continue for a long time. Seems to be greatly discouraged. In such a situation, it is considered that if a re-variation effect or the like is generated in the next game time (special game time), the effect of surprise is further enhanced.

  In other words, in any pattern, while the surprising effect by the re-variation production etc. in the next game round can be obtained, the route to the surprise is different (after deviating in a state where expectation was extremely enhanced) Patterns that produce re-variation effects, patterns that are disappointing while expecting halfway, and re-creation effects occur after a disappointing state continues for a long time). It is possible to increase.

  Note that the degree-of-expectation suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of each game time, such as the image for holding and the chance effect, is not limited to the image for holding or the chance effect, and may be other effects. And in order to show the effect by the level of expectation as described above, it is only necessary that the order thereof is the above relationship (the order of the hold image → the chance effect).

  FIG. 105 (a) shows a variation of the variation start process performed at the start of variation of each game time. That is, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a special game time. If the current game time is not a special game time, normal variation start processing is performed in step S6102, and the game time is a special game time. In step S6103, the re-variation process is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S5901 to S5903. After executing the normal variation start process in step S6102, it is determined in step S6104 whether the next variation is a special game round. In this process, it is possible to determine whether or not the game number is before the special game number by referring to the value of the holding number counter HK. If it is a game time before the special game times, a character generation process for generating a predetermined character in the game times is executed in step S6105, and then the variation start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6104 that the next change is not a special game round, it is determined in step S6106 whether there is pending information for the next change. If there is no hold information for the next change, the change start process is terminated as it is. If there is pending information, in step S6107, a character generation lottery process for determining whether or not to generate the predetermined character in the game time is executed. After executing the processing of step S6105, the variation start processing is terminated. If it is determined that the winning is not made in step S6108, the variation start process is terminated as it is.

  In this way, if a predetermined character is generated in the game times before the special game times, the player can grasp that the re-variation effect can occur in the next game times. On the other hand, even if there is no hold information corresponding to the next change, if the predetermined character is generated, it is easily recognized that it is a so-called gasse effect, and attention is paid even if the effect is performed. It will be a factor to reduce the degree. Therefore, when there is holding information corresponding to the next change as shown in FIG. 105 (b), a predetermined character may be generated, while holding information corresponding to the next change is shown as shown in FIG. 105 (c). If there is a configuration in which a predetermined character cannot be generated when the character does not exist (regulation / restriction of the occurrence), it is possible to suitably achieve the effect of generating the predetermined character.

<13th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the configuration for executing the special game times of the twelfth embodiment, a configuration (seventh embodiment) in which the priority order is determined in the digestion order by the type of the reserved information acquired, The effect pattern when the priority side hold information is acquired will be described in more detail.

  Specifically, in the situation where special game times are set, when the priority side hold information is acquired, the effect pattern of the subsequent game times is used as the game time effect pattern related to the priority side hold information. (More specifically, the subsequent display times of the game times are referred to) and an effect corresponding to that is set. For example, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), when the priority-side holding information is acquired in the game times before the special game times, the game times (game times in which the reach display is being executed) are as initially set. The reach display is terminated so as to obtain a result of losing. Then, in the next game round (priority side game round), a re-variation effect is executed so as to result in a losing result (for example, the re-variable middle symbol row Z2 stops past the reach line). As the fluctuation display time of the outlier revariation effect, the fluctuation display time that should have been set at the next game time (special game time) is set. Then, in the next game time (special game time), a re-variation effect is executed so as to obtain a jackpot result.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 106 (b), although the game result of the game times set as the special game times is a probable big hit result, the game times before the special game times usually have a reach display corresponding to the jackpot result. And a situation where a promotion effect is set in a special game round or thereafter. When the priority side hold information is acquired during the reach display, the reach display is terminated so as to result in a detachment result as initially set in the same manner as described above. Then, in the next game round (priority side game round), the reach line (upper and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3) is re-variably displayed, and the reach line re-variation effect is made to stop the reach line so as to result in a miss. Run. In this reach line re-variation production, the top and bottom symbols are set so that the result of stoppage of reach failure due to the even number of main symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result becomes the result of stoppage of reach failure due to the odd number of main symbols corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. The rows Z1 and Z3 are changed again. Thereafter, in the next game round (special game round), the middle symbol row Z2 is changed again so that the reach symbol stops at the reach line corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. Regarding the reach line re-change effect, the change display time of the game time related to the reach line re-change effect is set with reference to the change display time of the next game time (special game time).

  Changes in the processing for performing the above-described effects shown in FIG. 106 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the confirmation process for holding notice in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the following processing is performed between the main special hold notice setting process in step S4810 and the hold command setting process in step S4811. That is, after performing the process of step S4810, it is checked in step S6201 whether or not a special game number flag is stored, and it is determined whether or not a special game number has been set. If the special game times have been set, the process advances to step S6202 to determine whether or not the hold information acquired this time is the hold information on the priority side. That is, it is determined whether or not the hold information is based on a winning to the lower working port 34. If it is the priority side hold information, the process advances to step S6203 to execute processing for storing the priority flag in the RAM 204. The priority flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to grasp that the priority side hold information has been acquired in a situation where the special game times have been set. If a negative determination is made in step S6201 or step S6202, or after the processing of step S6203 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4811. In step S4811, a hold command is set so that information indicating that the priority flag is stored is included.

  Although detailed description with reference to the drawing is omitted, when the hold control is received on the side of the production control device 82 and the information indicating that the priority flag is set is included in the hold command, the main control is performed. Similar to the device 81 side, the priority flag is stored in the RAM 244 and the information is stored in the storage area 250 for hold so that the hold information (game times) triggered by the priority flag can be grasped.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time during execution of the special game times in this embodiment. A change from the process of FIG. 92 is that after executing the process of grasping the variable display time according to the hold number counter HK in step S5803, it is determined whether or not the priority flag is stored in step S6301. Is a point. If the priority flag is not stored in step S6301, processing such as subtraction of the holding number counter HK after step S5804 is performed in the same manner as the processing in FIG. On the other hand, if the priority flag is stored, the process after step S5804 is not performed, and the priority flag is deleted and the setting process is terminated. In step S5705 of FIG. 91, the variable display time is set.

  That is, when the game time to be executed this time is a game time related to the hold information on the priority side acquired in the situation where the special game time is set (when the game time interruption occurs), the game time As the fluctuation display time, the fluctuation display time of the game times related to the hold information that should have been consumed this time if no interruption occurs is set as the current fluctuation display time. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 106, in the situation where the game times before the special game times are being executed, that is, in the situation where the holding number counter HK = 1, it should have been set in the next special game times. The fluctuation display time (20 sec) is used as it is as the fluctuation display time of the interrupted game time. Also, for example, in the situation where the hold number counter HK = 3, the variable display time that should have been set in the next game round (see the set time table in FIG. 90, for example, the address F (6) is set) If it is, 90 sec) is used as it is as the variable display time of the interrupted game times.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the change start processing in the present embodiment. In step S6401, it is determined whether or not the game time started this time is a special game time. If not, it is determined whether or not a priority flag is stored in step S6402. If not stored, normal fluctuation start processing is executed in step S6403. If the priority flag is stored, that is, if it is an interrupted game start process, a special game turn preparation effect is set in step S6404. If the current game time is a special game time, a re-variation process is executed in step S6405. After executing any one of steps S6403 to S6405, the variation start processing is terminated.

  As the special game times preparation effect, an effect is selected according to the set variable display time. In other words, an effect corresponding to the effect of the game times that should have been executed if no interruption of the priority game times has occurred is selected. For example, when a priority-side interrupt occurs in the situation where the hold number counter HK = 1 (the situation shown in FIG. 106), a variable display time of 20 sec that should have been set for the subsequent special game times is set. The game time effect is set with an effect corresponding to the variation display time. As this effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 106, an off-re-change effect or a reach line re-change effect can be considered. Also, as described above, for example, when the priority side interrupt is generated in the situation where the address is F (6) and the holding number counter HK = 3, 90 sec that should have been set to the subsequent game times The variable display time is set, and an effect corresponding to the variable display time is set as an effect of game times. For example, when Super Reach C is executed, the continuous display of reach display set in the set time table can be used as it is. In addition, an effect pattern table in which the effect pattern for interruption and the effect pattern (variable display time) of the subsequent game times at the time of interruption are stored in the ROM 243 on a one-to-one basis, and this effect pattern table is referred to this time. The special game times preparation effect may be determined.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the variable display times of a plurality of game times are set in advance by the set time table, when the hold information on the priority side is acquired, the variable display times set for the subsequent game times are set. The variable display time for the priority-side hold information is set with reference to the configuration. As a result, even in a situation where the variable display time of each game time is set for the special game time (the situation where one address is selected from the set time table), the priority side hold information Therefore, it is not necessary to set the variable display time for the game or change the variable display time for other game times, thereby reducing the processing load.

  In addition, with reference to the variable display time and effect pattern set in the subsequent game times, the variable display time and effect pattern of the game time on the interrupting side (priority side) is set, so the game that has been set Even if an interruption occurs in a situation where none of the times (the game times of a series of productions in which a special game time is finally generated) has started, the interrupted game time is used as the subsequent game time. The variable display time and the production pattern can be set in association with each other. For example, if it is configured to refer to the variable display time and production pattern set for the previous game times, the side that interrupted even though none of the game times for which a series of productions were set has started In a situation where the game times are to be executed (for example, a situation where an interruption occurs before a new game time is started after the special game times flag is stored), The variation display time and the production pattern of the game time on the side that interrupted with reference to no game time will be set. On the other hand, if it is set as the structure which refers to subsequent game times like this embodiment, it will become possible to perform the production | presentation relevant to a series of productions also in the above situations.

  In particular, when a special game number is set, as described above, the player's attention level is set not to the special game time but to concentrate on the game time immediately before, and the game time immediately before It is configured so that it is notified as a result of detachment, and immediately after that, a re-change effect or the like is performed with a short change display time to provide the player with surprise and surprise. Therefore, for example, when an interruption occurs between the immediately preceding game number and the special game number in spite of paying attention to the game number immediately before the special game number, If you make a presentation with reference to the number of times of game), you will see the same effect again for the players who are interested in the previous game time. The production may be delayed. Therefore, by referring to the rear side as described above, when interrupting immediately before the special game times, the effects for just before the special game times (outgoing re-change effect or reach line re-change effect) are performed. Thus, the above-described delay can be reduced, and the change display time can be shortened. And, if you interrupt before the special game times instead of just before the special game times, the continuous reach display for the game times immediately before the special game times will be performed, so the degree of attention to the game times immediately before the special game times will be raised Can be used as an effect for the purpose. Although different effects are set depending on the interrupt timing in this way and the effects of the effects are different, different effects as described above can be set with the same processing configuration such as referring to the variation display time and effect pattern of the subsequent game times. Therefore, it can be said that the effects of each effect can be achieved with a simple processing configuration.

  Note that, when an interrupt occurs, the same variable display time as that of the rear game times is set. However, the change display time of the rear game times is referred to and corresponding to it (different) It is good also as a structure which sets a variable display time. In this case, for example, if a table in which the information on the fluctuation display time of the rear game time and the information on the fluctuation display time of the interrupted game time are stored on a one-to-one basis is set, With reference to the variable display time, the variable display time of the interrupted game time can be grasped. If the corresponding fluctuation display time is set to be shorter than the fluctuation display time of the rear game time, there is a relationship between short fluctuation display time → long fluctuation display time when interrupted during continuous reach display. If it is maintained and interrupted immediately before the special game time, the delay before the special game time can be reduced as the game time of the shorter variable display time before the special game time of the short variable display time. Also, depending on the interrupted status (whether interrupted during continuous reach display or interrupted immediately before special game times, etc.), the relationship with the variable display time of the rear game times (same length or different length) It may be configured differently.

  In the above-described embodiment, the priority side hold information acquired in a situation where the special game times are set is described as one. However, a plurality of priority hold information may be acquired. In this case, when main controller 81 deletes the priority flag (when an affirmative determination is made in step S6301), the presence / absence of other priority side hold information is confirmed, and other priority side hold information exists. It is preferable that the priority flag is not erased (the priority flag is erased if no other priority flag exists).

  In place of or in addition to the configuration in which the priority flag is deleted, a counter is provided for grasping the number of priority side hold information acquired in a situation where special game times are set. It is good also as a structure which sets the fluctuation | variation display time about the pending | holding information of the priority side in the condition where game times are set. More specifically, the above counter is incremented by 1 when the priority side hold information is acquired in a situation in which special game times are set, and the counter is decremented by 1 when an affirmative determination is made in step S6301. To do. In this way, by referring to the counter, it is possible to grasp not only the presence / absence of the priority-side hold information in the situation where the special game times are set, but also the number thereof. The above configuration may be applied to the sub-side control device (effect control device 82). This is because, as described above, in the control device on the sub side, it is necessary to set the effect of the game times related to the hold information on the priority side in the situation where the special game times are set.

  In the configuration in which the priority side game times are executed before the special game times, the effect mode in the priority side game times is not limited to the above. For example, as shown in FIG. 110, the game times before the special game times are terminated in a stop mode in which the reach effect performed with the main symbol with “7” is missed. Then, in the priority side game round that interrupts before the special game round after that, the priority is changed again so that the main symbol with “7” in the middle symbol row Z2 passes the reach line (middle line L2). It is also possible to end the game game on the side, re-variate the middle symbol row Z2 again in the special game time, stop the reach on the reach line, and align the main symbols with “7”. In addition, after the detachment of the main symbol marked with “7” above, one symbol row (upper symbol row Z1 in the figure) forming the reach line is re-varied as the priority side off game times. It is also possible to make the display screen G display a different symbol (a main symbol attached with “8”) than a symbol forming the reach line (a main symbol attached with “7”). Then, in the special game times, a pattern that is re-variable so as to align the symbols that have formed the reach line, and a pattern that is re-variable so as to align the symbols that are different from the symbols that have formed the reach line are: It becomes possible to set.

  As described above, when a plurality of priority-side hold information is acquired, further diversification of effects is achieved. For example, as shown in FIG. 111, in a plurality of priority side off game times, different symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are re-varied and stopped so as to result in an off result. Specifically, the single line reach failure due to the main symbol with “7” as the game number before the special game number is stopped. In the first priority side off game times, for example, a symbol (“8”) different from the symbol in which the lower symbol row Z3 is re-variably displayed and the reach line is formed in the game times before the special game times is displayed. The attached main symbol) is displayed on the display screen G. Note that the main symbol that has formed the reach line (the main symbol with “7”) is also stopped so as to remain on the display screen G. In the second priority off game game, the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed again and the symbols different from the symbols forming the reach line (the main symbol with “8”) are displayed. The main symbol that has formed the reach line (the main symbol with “7”) is also stopped. As a result, the stop result that causes the double line (“7” and “8”) to be out of reach by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is displayed by the two priority side off game times. After that, in the special game round, it is changed again so as to align any of the symbols in the double line. As the pattern forming the double line, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed again in the first priority side off-game game to stop “7” and “8”, and the lower symbol row Z3 is changed again. 8 ”once appears (“ 7 ”is not displayed on the display screen G). In the second priority off game game, the lower symbol row Z3 is changed again to stop “7” and “8”. Even in such a case, the stop result that causes the double line reach failure by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is displayed by the two priority side off game times. As described above, the period required for re-variation in each game time is further shortened by changing the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 to be re-variable in each game time, or changing the re-variation direction and the amount of deviation. It becomes possible to do. Needless to say, the re-variation pattern in each priority side out-of-game game is not limited to the above.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated on the assumption that the winning frequency to the lower operation port 34 is low like the normal game state (low frequency support mode) (a state in which priority side hold information is relatively difficult to acquire). It may be executed in a state where the winning frequency to the lower working port 34 is improved (a high frequency support mode, a state where priority side hold information is relatively easily acquired). Further, although the description has been made on the assumption that the setting of the special game times is performed based on the non-priority side hold information, it may be configured based on the priority side hold information. When the special game times are set based on the priority side hold information, the number of priority side hold information may be input in the process of inputting the hold number to the hold number counter HK in step S5615. In addition, a flag or the like for grasping that the special game times have been set based on the priority side hold information is stored. In this case, even if the priority side hold information is acquired thereafter, the acquired hold information is digested after the game times related to a series of effects set in the special game times. Further, even if the non-priority side hold information is acquired thereafter, the acquired hold information is also digested after the game times related to a series of effects set in the special game times. Therefore, even if the hold information is acquired thereafter, the priority flag is not stored based on the flag or the like (forced to NO in step S6201 or step S6202). Thereby, while enabling the setting of special game times based on the hold information on the priority side, the game times related to the series of effects set as the special game times in the configuration in which each of the priority / non-priority hold information exists. An effect can be suitably realized.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration composed of combinations of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the variable display time specifying process on the production control device 82 side, the variable display time is specified based on the counters C3 and CS and the variable display time table for the hold information of the hold number non-corresponding pattern. The variable display time may be stored in the hold storage area 250 in the process at the time of receiving the hold command (for example, the hold increase processing step S1208), or the hold command output from the main control device 81 may have the variable display time It may be configured to include information.

  (2) In the timer input process at the time specifying pattern (FIG. 29), in step S1710, the subtraction start timing of the timer counter T may be changed based on the time specified in steps S1701 to S1709. That is, the special condition is less likely to be satisfied by delaying the subtraction start timing, and the special condition is easily satisfied by increasing the subtraction start timing. In this way, by changing the subtraction start timing, the special hold notice can be suitably executed without changing the specified time by adjusting the probability of success or failure of the special condition.

  Further, in the fluctuation start process (step S1303) of the fluctuation display control process (FIG. 38), the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is finished in accordance with the end timing of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice. The production pattern may be set. In this case, the effect pattern may be set so that the special condition is satisfied, or the effect pattern may be set so as not to be satisfied. In this case, the success or failure of the special condition may be determined according to the game result of the current game round, or the success or failure of the special condition may be determined according to the game result of other hold information. Further, the success or failure of the special condition may be determined based on the gaming state (the level of the winning / failing lottery mode or the support mode, the number of hold information, etc.).

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, the variable display time has been described as including the fixed time in each game time. It is good also as a structure which performs etc. For example, this configuration may be applied to a gaming machine having a configuration in which the fixed time can be changed according to each game time or gaming state.

  (4) The display of the time display area GE is not limited to the above display, and may be another display. For example, the information may be displayed in a region (for example, the upper right part of the display screen G) that is separate from the image P for the hold information about the special hold notice. Further, for example, the entire display screen G may be displayed so as to overlap with the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is preferable that the time display area GE is displayed behind each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Further, the display of the time display image Gp is not limited to the above display, and may be another display. That is, the number of digits of display is not limited to the above, that is, the minimum unit of subtraction is not limited to the above. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which displays not a Arabic numeral but a Chinese numeral, and it is good also as an analog display instead of a digital display.

  (5) Although the configuration is such that the type of the holding image P is changed based on the establishment of the special condition, it may be configured to determine whether the special condition is satisfied a plurality of times. In other words, in the above embodiment, the special condition is satisfied that the predetermined set time elapses to 0, but this is changed, and the predetermined set time elapses to 0 or A configuration may be adopted in which winning a lottery at a timing satisfies the special condition.

  For example, a plurality of determination timings are set in the remaining time of a predetermined setting time (for example, five types of determination timings of the remaining 30 sec, 20 sec, 10 sec, 5 sec, and 0 sec are set). Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the holding image P is changed at each determination timing. If it is determined that the holding image P is to be changed, the holding image P is changed. That is, the possibility of changing the number of determination timings is increased. By doing in this way, the opportunity that special conditions are satisfied increases, and it can also increase the frequency | count that special reservation notice is watched.

  (6) The hold image P may be changed gradually in accordance with the passage of a predetermined set time (in accordance with the change in the probability of establishment of the special condition). For example, image data of a plurality of holding images P is provided so that the change from the fourth holding image P4 (yellow) to the third holding image P3 (red) is performed in stages, and a predetermined set time The image data of the hold image P may be updated so that the fourth hold image P4 approaches the third hold image P3 as the value approaches 0. In this case, if the color is different depending on the type of the holding image P as in the above embodiments, the color is updated so that the color gradually approaches the color of the holding image P after the change from before the change to after the change. If the configuration differs depending on the type of the holding image P, the shape may be updated so that the shape gradually approaches the shape of the holding image P after the change from before the change to after the change.

  In these cases, the time input to the timer counter T at the start of the special hold notice is divided by the number to be updated stepwise (for example, 5), and the hold image P is updated every time the divided unit time elapses. It is good to have a configuration to do.

  In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the color and shape of the reserve image P are changed in stages, the player can grasp the probability of establishment of the special condition based on the color and shape of the reserve image P. Therefore, it is good also as a structure which does not display the time display image Gp in the time display area GE. By doing in this way, compared with the structure which can grasp | ascertain remaining time in real time by the time display image Gp, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain remaining time intuitively and can make production easy to understand. Moreover, by doing in this way, it becomes possible to make it difficult to be understood even if the elapsed speed of the remaining time of the set time and the remaining time are changed, and it is also possible to suitably adjust during the production. In addition, the amount of image data stored in advance can be reduced by the amount that the time display area GE and the time display image Gp are not displayed.

  In addition, the effect indicating the probability of establishment of the special condition can be changed as follows. As shown in FIG. 58 (a), an effect imitating the sunrise of Mt. Fuji may be executed as an effect indicating the probability of establishment of the special condition for the special reservation notice. In this case, an image in which the day has begun to appear from Mt. Fuji is displayed at the start timing (FIG. 59 (a1)), and an image in which the day has completely finished from Mt. Fuji is displayed at the end timing (FIG. 59 (a2)). Thereby, the establishment probability of the special condition can be grasped according to the sunrise condition. In particular, by applying an effect such as sunrise, which the player would potentially recognize without waiting for a relatively long time, to an effect indicating the probability of establishment of the special condition, Even if the production is unfolded for a long time, it is possible to make it look uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which performs the establishment probability of special conditions by the alerting | reporting means (for example, the display light emission part 63 etc.) different from the display screen G. Further, as a different notification means, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), a notification may be made on the screen PG of the portable terminal. In this case, as in the sixth embodiment, the special condition at the time of displaying the code may be displayed on the mobile terminal by reading the code of the special condition, or augmented reality (AR). It is good also as a structure which displays the change of establishment probability in real time on the screen PG of a portable terminal using a technique etc. In this case, the augmented reality markers AR1 to AR4 may be displayed on the special reserve notice image (for example, the time display area GE), or the normal game times image (for example, the background image or the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3). ) May be displayed. When the markers AR1 to AR4 are updated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 sec cycle), the change in the establishment probability can be displayed on the mobile terminal.

  When displaying using a portable terminal etc., it is good also as a structure (FIG. 59 (b1)) which displays the establishment probability of special conditions directly on the display screen G, and abstractly on the screen PG of a portable terminal, Conversely, the display screen G may be abstractly displayed and directly displayed on the screen PG of the mobile terminal (FIG. 59 (b2)).

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, the number of special hold notices that can be executed in duplicate is adjusted using the hold notice counter YK, but this may be changed. That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the special hold notice based on the hold information of the outlier result is executed in duplicate up to two, and the special hold notice based on the hold information of the jackpot result is executed up to one ( (No overlap) This may be executed by duplicating the number of stored hold information. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing a reduction in the degree of attention and understanding of one special reservation notice due to the overlap of special reservation notices, a configuration that adjusts the number of possible overlaps as in the above embodiment is preferable.

  (8) Character PM and item A are not limited to the above. For example, the character PM may not always be displayed, or a plurality of character PM types may be set so that the player can select which character PM is displayed. Needless to say, the position and size of the character PM displayed are not limited to those described above.

  The item A given as a privilege based on the establishment of the special condition may be, for example, the level of the character PM or an experience value for raising the level.

  (9) As a special condition, the condition is established that a predetermined set time has elapsed and becomes “00.00”. However, the condition is not limited as long as the condition establishment probability changes based on the passage of time. . For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a set time is provided in units of game times such as “30 seconds elapse in the next game time” or “40 seconds elapse within 2 game times”.

  Further, a special condition may be that the number of executions of a predetermined effect that may occur during a game round reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, as a predetermined effect, a reach display may be used, or a notice effect such as a bubble notice or a school of fish notice during a game may be performed. May be a so-called pseudo-continuous effect, or may be an operation instruction effect for the operation button or the like in a gaming machine having an operation button or the like. These effects may be set so that the number of occurrences increases as the variable display time increases. Thereby, it can be set as the conditions from which establishment probability changes based on progress of time. In this case, as a display of the special condition in the special hold notice, for example, a character display such as “Let the XX production appear X times! The hold will change!” Is considered.

  In this case, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the number of occurrences of a predetermined effect necessary for satisfying the condition may be set based on the lottery counter and the number of hold information. A configuration may be adopted in which a production pattern is grasped based on the value of the type counter CS and the like, and the number of occurrences of a predetermined production is grasped, and then the number of times necessary for establishing the condition is set. In any case, the special hold notice can be diversified by making it possible to set whether the condition is satisfied or not.

  (10) While the special hold notice is being executed, the special condition (predetermined set time) is always displayed. However, even if the special condition is not displayed, any condition in which the establishment probability changes based on the passage of time. As long as the player can grasp that the determination based on is performed, the details about the special condition may not be displayed.

  Further, even when the display is performed, the display may be made so that the player can grasp the special condition at least from the start to the end of the special hold notice. For example, it may be configured to display only at the start of the special hold notice, may be configured to display at a predetermined timing in the middle of the special hold notice, or may be configured to repeatedly display and hide. May be. It should be noted that when not displayed, the visibility of the special reservation notice may be relatively lower than when displayed.

  As a method of non-display, the time display image Gp in the time display region GE is simply not displayed (for example, the time display region GE or the display screen G is partially or completely hidden). Alternatively, it may be configured to be hidden by another image (the time display image Gp is displayed on the back), or may be shielded by a movable accessory or the like so that visual recognition from the front is difficult or impossible. It may be a configuration.

  In this way, even if it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize the time display image Gp, the player can grasp the passage of time with his / her own sense (by counting the number in his head). It becomes possible to create a unique game. In this case, if the player knows the passage of time by himself, only the player can grasp the success or failure of the special condition, and the enjoyment that the superiority to the surrounding players can be obtained can be added. it can. In addition, in a situation where the time display image Gp is not visible, if the subtraction other than the default subtraction is performed, the elapsed time that has been grasped by one's own sense as described above when it becomes visible after that. The possibility that different times are displayed in the time display image Gp increases. As in the above-described embodiments, when the subtraction other than the default subtraction is more likely to occur as the jackpot expectation is higher, the player will display a time different from the time that he / she knew. It is thought that will come to expect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of grasping the passage of time by itself in a situation where the time display image Gp cannot be visually recognized.

  (11) The determination timing of the special condition is not limited to the high-speed fluctuation end timing of the lower symbol row Z3, and may be another timing. For example, it may be at the start of the game time of the hold information subject to the special hold notice (timing when the hold image P moves to the execution display area Gb), or the hold information of the target hold information It may be a predetermined timing in the game times before the game times. However, the later the judgment timing of the special condition is, the more game times can be related to the success or failure of the special condition, so it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the related game times. Become. In addition, since the determination timing is set as a branch point of an effect during game play (a branch point indicating whether or not reach display occurs in each of the above embodiments), the determination is performed at a timing when the degree of attention is increased. , It can be suppressed that the determination is missed.

  (12) In the special reservation notice, in addition to or instead of each subtraction pattern (default subtraction, subtraction at the time of shift, etc.), a pattern that is subtracted by the player's intervention (for example, operation of the operation unit 75) may be provided. In this case, the degree of subtraction may be different depending on the player's participation degree and skill.

  Specifically, a self-subtraction pattern is added as the subtraction pattern. When this self-subtraction pattern is selected, a predetermined game effect is performed during execution of the special reservation notice. In the predetermined game effect, for example, a point obtained by operation of the operation unit 75 can be changed, such as a rhythm game, a four-choice quiz, an action game, and a shooting game. Then, the subtraction degree of the timer counter T is changed based on the obtained points. That is, if it is a rhythm game, the effect which matches the instruction timing on the display screen G and the operation timing of the operation part 75 over a predetermined period (for example, 15 sec) is executed. If the operation timing matches the instruction timing (if the deviation is within the first predetermined range), subtraction of 4 sec is performed, and if the deviation is more than that (if the deviation is outside the first predetermined range and within the second predetermined range) If there is a subtraction of 2 seconds. If it is further shifted (if it is out of the second predetermined range), no subtraction is performed (0 sec subtraction is performed). In this case, since the number of instruction timings (number of times the game is generated) can be adjusted on the gaming machine side, the success or failure of the special condition is compared with a configuration in which subtraction is performed based only on the player side operation. It can be managed to some extent on the side.

  (13) The subtraction pattern is not limited to the above. For example, a pattern may be set in which a predetermined time is subtracted when the ball enters the upper working port 33, the lower working port 34, or the through gate 35. In this case, since the hold information is acquired based on the ball entering the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, the subtraction time and the subtraction probability are set based on the hold information (information such as the game result). It is good also as a structure. In this case, as in the seventh embodiment, if the acquired hold information is configured to be the target of the determination of the success prior to the hold information that is the subject of the special hold notice, the game times during the special hold notice The relationship with the variable display time becomes clear.

  (14) The player may be allowed to select a predetermined set time when executing the special hold notice. In other words, if the player predicts the time required from the start to the end of the special reservation notice, and the prediction is correct, the reservation image P may be changed as a privilege. Specifically, at the start of the special hold notice, a plurality of time displays (for example, 30 sec, 45 sec, 60 sec) are performed, and the player selects one time display from among the plurality of time displays. The selection of the time display may be configured based on the operation of the operation unit 75. And when the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row | line | zone Z3 in the game time used as object is complete | finished within the selected time, it is set as the structure which performs the subtraction corresponding to the selected time display. For example, if 30 sec is selected, 1 sec is subtracted, if 45 sec, 5 sec is subtracted, and if 60 sec, 10 sec is subtracted. Note that the subtraction probability may be changed according to the selected time. Since the player will be interested in whether or not the time selected by himself / herself has elapsed, the degree of attention can be suitably increased.

  (15) In the special hold notice, the predetermined set time is set based on the variable display time of the game times of the hold information that is digested before the hold information subject to the special hold notice. If the configuration is set based on the hold information other than the target hold information, the configuration may be set based on the hold information digested after the target hold information. Even in this case, not only the special reservation notice but also the degree of attention to the game times related to other reservation information can be increased.

  (16) In the shift subtraction process, the predetermined set time is subtracted in accordance with the shift of the hold information. However, the predetermined set time may be added during the shift. In this way, by providing not only the pattern to be subtracted after the fact but also the pattern to be added, the special reservation notice can be focused to the end. Note that the timing of addition is not limited to the shift, and may be another timing.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which changes the probability at the time of addition, and the time at the time of addition according to the kind (for example, type of game result or the image P for hold) of the hold information shifted to the execution area AR.

  (17) The correction of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice is not limited to the type of hold information shifted to the execution area AR and the number of hold information. It is good also as a structure performed according to operation condition (launch intensity | strength and firing continuation time).

  (18) Although the configuration is such that the presence / absence of subtraction during the shift and the subtraction time are determined each time the hold information is shifted, a configuration may be used in which the special hold notice is started or at other timings. If the configuration is performed at the start, the time can be set in consideration of the shift subtraction. However, if the configuration is determined after the fact, the player can feel that the probability of establishment of the special condition changes according to the game situation, and the result is predicted at the start of the production as in the so-called race. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience such as.

  (19) Difficulty in establishing the special condition at the start (the length of a predetermined set time) when determining the change-destination holding image from the fourth holding image P4 by lottery or the like based on the establishment of the special condition Depending on the situation, the change-destination holding image may be different. Further, the change-destination holding image is not limited to the holding image having the higher jackpot expectation, but may be configured to include a pattern that becomes a lower holding image.

  (20) In the special hold notice, the predetermined set time is set by the hold information different from the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice, but the execution mode in the special hold notice is set by the different hold information. If it is the structure to set, the aspect set with the said different hold information is not limited to said thing. For example, in the special hold notice, a predetermined set time (special condition) is set based on the variable display time for the different hold information, and the hold image that changes based on the establishment of the special condition is set as the game result of the different hold information. It is good also as a structure set based on.

  Further, the special hold notice is set to be the same effect as the normal hold notice in each of the above embodiments, and it is set which of the hold images P1 to P5 is to be displayed based on the different hold information. The display image may be set based on the different hold information as a hold notice different from the normal hold notice.

  Even in these cases, the execution mode may be set at the start of the special reservation notice, or the execution mode may be set after the start. The configuration that is set after the start can reproduce the state set according to the game situation, and the execution mode can be diversified.

  (21) The special reservation notice is configured such that the probability of execution increases as the number of reservations at the time of reservation acquisition increases. However, the probability of execution may decrease as the number of reservations increases. Moreover, it is good also as a structure where the probability of performing becomes high or low, so that the variable display time of the pending | holding information held or the pending | holding information of the game time being performed is long. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which sets the setting time of a special reservation advance notice according to the fluctuation display time of the hold information on hold or the hold information of the game time being executed.

  (22) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 212 is controlled by the effect control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81, but instead, from the main control device 81. The display control device 212 may be configured to control the effect control device 82 based on the output command. Further, instead of the configuration in which the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, the control devices 82 and 212 may be provided as a single sub-side control device. Further, the function of the effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated into the main control device 81, and the function of both the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 is integrated into the main control device 81. It is good.

  (23) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  In addition, the hold information is acquired based on a winning at the operation ports 33 and 34. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a start lever is provided, and the hold information is acquired based on the operation of the start lever. It is good also as a structure to be made. In short, the condition for obtaining the hold information is arbitrary.

  (24) Non-ball game machines, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, start rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

  The invention described in each of the following features is as follows: `` In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, the gaming state is triggered by the game ball entering the start ball entering part provided in the game area. For example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed. Regarding the technical background, “a display effect for one game time is displayed in which a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed at the time of final stop display of display” (see, for example, JP-A-2004-81853). Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. ”The present invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

  In addition, the inventions described in the following feature groups may be individually combined in different feature groups, and applied to the invention described in different feature groups by combining some or all of the inventions. Also good.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. In a gaming machine capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening / closing execution mode or high-frequency support mode) based on the result of the game,
Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (function to execute the determination process by the main controller 81) for determining whether to grant the privilege to the player;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, effect setting means (game control by the main control device 81) for setting an effect (for example, a game turn effect or a hold notice) performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Processing function), and
An effect executing means (function for executing a variable display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (holding notice), a special effect (special hold notice) different from that is sent to the predetermined notifying means or different from it. Special effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by the notification means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  Special information is acquired on the basis of the game ball entering a pitching portion provided in the game area, and whether or not a privilege is granted is determined based on the special information. In a gaming machine in which an effect is executed by predetermined notification means based on the above, for example, when this effect is a so-called game-time effect for notifying the result of each grant determination, the effect for that game time If the predetermined period of the operation is long and the period until the result of the grant determination corresponding to the predetermined stage is informed is long, the player will wait until then, and this period is redundant. There is a possibility that you will feel it. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine capable of storing a plurality of special information, if this predetermined effect is a so-called pre-read effect corresponding to a plurality of special information ahead, other special information is given up to the special information. Since the result of the determination is notified, the player waits until the result of the determination for giving the special information corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified. Therefore, when such a predetermined effect is set, if a configuration in which a special effect different from that is executed by a predetermined notification means or a different notification means, the grant determination based on the predetermined effect is performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a feeling of extension until the result is notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  If the special effect is not executed in place of the predetermined effect, but is executed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above-described effects due to the execution of the special effect can be suitably achieved.

  In addition, if it is determined whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the special effect, and the privilege is given based on the determination result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special effect. It becomes. In this case, if the privilege granted based on the special information is the first privilege and the privilege granted based on the special performance is expressed as the second privilege, the two can be clearly distinguished. And if it is set as the structure which performs grant determination about the 2nd privilege provided based on a special effect based on the information different from the result of the grant determination of the 1st privilege used as the opportunity of a predetermined effect, the predetermined effect It is clear that the special effects are different from the special effects, and each effect can be suitably enjoyed.

Feature A2. In a gaming machine capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening / closing execution mode or high-frequency support mode) based on the result of the game,
Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (function to execute the determination process by the main controller 81) for determining whether to grant the privilege to the player;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, an effect setting means for setting an effect (game turn effect) to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (game time control processing by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
An effect executing means (function for executing a variable display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
With
The effect setting means starts a game turn operation as the effect based on the grant determination, and ends the game turn operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game time. , To set the operation for the game times in each game time,
A plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is a short period and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode are set in the operation for game times. The game replay operation is performed in the set execution mode,
When the operation mode of the game turning operation set by the effect setting unit is the long-term mode, a special effect (special hold notice) is sent by the predetermined notifying unit or another notifying unit. A gaming machine comprising a special effect execution means (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed.

  Special information is acquired on the basis of the game ball entering a pitching portion provided in the game area, and whether or not a privilege is granted is determined based on the special information. In a gaming machine in which a game turning operation as a game turning effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on the above, when a long-term aspect is set that has a long operation period of the game turning action There is a possibility that the period until the corresponding grant determination result is notified becomes longer, and this period is perceived as redundant. Therefore, when such a game-return operation that is a long-term mode is set, if the special effect is executed by a predetermined notification means or another notification means, the game-return operation is performed. Based on this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the feeling of extension until the result of the determination of grant is notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Note that if the special effect is not executed instead of the long-term game turning operation, but is executed in parallel with the game turning operation, the special effect is executed. An effect can be suitably produced.

  In addition, if it is determined whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the special effect, and the privilege is given based on the determination result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special effect. It becomes. In this case, if the privilege granted based on the special information is the first privilege and the privilege granted based on the special performance is expressed as the second privilege, the two can be clearly distinguished. And if it is set as the structure which performs the grant determination about the 2nd privilege provided based on a special effect based on the information different from the result of the grant determination of the 1st privilege used as the opportunity of operation for game rotation, It becomes clear that the operation for game rotation and the special effect are different effects, and each effect can be suitably enjoyed.

Feature A3. In a gaming machine capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening / closing execution mode or high-frequency support mode) based on the result of the game,
Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
Based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, grant determination means for sequentially determining whether or not to grant the privilege to the player (a function for executing the determination processing by the main control device 81) )When,
When the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determination means. A destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination (function for executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81);
An effect that is performed at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of the application by the application determination unit, in the predetermined notification unit (symbol display device 41) based on the result of the specification by the target specifying unit. Production setting means for setting (holding advance notice) (function for executing processing for holding display by the production control device 82);
An effect executing means (function for executing a hold increasing process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notifying means;
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (for example, the second holding image P2) determined in advance, a special effect (special hold notice) different from that is given to the predetermined notification means. Or special effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by a different notification means, and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In a gaming machine in which special information is acquired based on a game ball entering a ball entering part provided in the game area, and whether or not a privilege is granted based on the special information is determined. This special information can be stored up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of numbers, and information corresponding to the result of the grant determination is specified at a timing earlier than the grant determination is performed on the predetermined special information, An effect based on the specified information, a so-called prefetch effect, is performed by a predetermined notification means. If this effect is a predetermined effect, a special effect different from the effect is performed by a predetermined notification unit or a different notification unit. In this case, for example, even if the player predicts or grasps that the result of the grant determination corresponding to the effect is a result that can obtain a privilege based on a predetermined effect, and wants to obtain the privilege early Since the predetermined effect is performed before the special information is subjected to the determination of grant, it is necessary to wait for the grant determination. Therefore, there is a possibility that this period is felt redundant. Therefore, when such a predetermined effect is set, if a configuration in which a special effect different from that is executed by a predetermined notification means or a different notification means, the grant determination based on the predetermined effect is performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a feeling of extension until the result is notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, if the special effect is not executed instead of the predetermined effect but is executed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above-described effect due to the execution of another effect can be suitably achieved. .

  In addition, if it is determined whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the special effect, and the privilege is given based on the determination result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special effect. It becomes. In this case, if the privilege granted based on the special information is the first privilege and the privilege granted based on the special performance is expressed as the second privilege, the two can be clearly distinguished. And if it is set as the structure which performs grant determination about the 2nd privilege provided based on a special effect based on the information different from the result of the grant determination of the 1st privilege used as the opportunity of a predetermined effect, the predetermined effect It is clear that the special effects are different from the special effects, and each effect can be suitably enjoyed.

  Furthermore, if the predetermined effect is an effect in which the degree of expectation to which the first privilege is granted is higher than other effects, when the predetermined effect is performed, the determination of giving the special information corresponding thereto is quicker. The player should think so as to be performed, and by doing so, it is possible to more suitably achieve the effect of performing the special effect as described above.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. In a gaming machine capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening / closing execution mode or high-frequency support mode) based on the result of the game,
Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (function to execute the determination process by the main controller 81) for determining whether to grant the privilege to the player;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, effect setting means (game control by the main control device 81) for setting an effect (for example, a game turn effect or a hold notice) performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Processing function), and
An effect executing means (function for executing a variable display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (holding notice), a special effect (special hold notice) different from that is sent to the predetermined notifying means or different from it. Special effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by the notification means;
In the special effect executed by the special effect execution means, a determination means (timer management process by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not a special condition in which the establishment probability changes based on the passage of a predetermined setting period is satisfied. Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  Special information is acquired on the basis of the game ball entering a pitching portion provided in the game area, and whether or not a privilege is granted is determined based on the special information. In a gaming machine in which an effect is executed by predetermined notification means based on the above, for example, when this effect is a so-called game-time effect for notifying the result of each grant determination, the effect for that game time If the predetermined period of the operation is long and the period until the result of the grant determination corresponding to the predetermined stage is informed is long, the player will wait until then, and this period is redundant. There is a possibility that you will feel it. Further, for example, in a gaming machine capable of storing a plurality of special information, if this predetermined effect is a so-called pre-read effect corresponding to a plurality of special information ahead, it is determined whether to give other special information before the special information. Therefore, the player waits until the result of the grant determination for the special information corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified. On the other hand, if the operation period of the predetermined effect is short or the number of special information stored is small, it may be difficult to perform a sufficient effect, which may give the player a lack of effect.

  Therefore, when this predetermined effect is selected, the special effect is executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means, and the probability of establishment is determined based on the passage of the predetermined setting period in this special effect. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the changing special condition is satisfied. Therefore, for example, if the effect is varied depending on the success or failure of this special condition or a privilege is given, it becomes possible to draw attention to the length of the period during which this special effect is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a feeling of extension for a period until the result of the determination of grant based on the predetermined effect is notified, and to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest, and conversely, the operation period of the predetermined effect is short. If a special effect is performed in this case, it can be expected that the degree of attention will increase as the special effect is performed in addition to the predetermined effect, and a decrease in interest can be suitably suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  If the special effect is not executed in place of the predetermined effect, but is executed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above-described effects due to the execution of the special effect can be suitably achieved.

  Moreover, if it is set as the structure which provides a privilege based on establishment of special conditions (determination result of the determination means), it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to this special effect more. In this case, if the privilege granted based on the special information is the first privilege and the privilege granted based on the establishment of the special condition is expressed as the second privilege, it is possible to clearly distinguish both. And if it is set as the structure which performs the grant determination about the 2nd privilege given based on establishment of special conditions based on the information different from the result of the grant determination of the 1st privilege used as the opportunity of predetermined | prescribed effect, It is clear that the predetermined effect and the special effect are different effects, and each effect can be suitably enjoyed.

  If the “special condition in which the probability of establishment changes based on the passage of the predetermined setting period” is the “special condition in which the probability of establishment increases based on the passage of the predetermined setting period”, the grant determination based on the predetermined performance is performed. The longer the period until it is performed, the more easily the special condition is satisfied, and the inconvenience of making the previous period feel redundant can be avoided.

  Further, if the “special condition that the probability of establishment changes based on the lapse of the predetermined setting period” is the “special condition that the probability of establishment decreases based on the lapse of the predetermined setting period”, the grant determination based on the predetermined effect is performed. The shorter the period until it is performed, the easier it is to establish special conditions. Even if the period until then is short and sufficient production (special production) cannot be performed, special conditions are easily established, so there is a lack of production. The feeling can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when providing a means for granting a privilege based on the establishment of the special condition, a configuration in which “the privilege is not granted when the determination unit determines that the special condition is not satisfied” is provided. The degree of attention about whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be more suitably increased.

  Then, the configuration of the “determination means” is changed to “a special condition in which the establishment probability changes based on the elapse of a predetermined setting period in the special effect executed by the special effect execution unit at a predetermined timing in the predetermined effect. By using the “determination unit that determines whether or not it is established”, the determination timing of the determination unit becomes clearer. If the predetermined timing is “timing before the end timing of the predetermined performance”, the continuation of the predetermined performance can be enjoyed in a situation where the success or failure of the special condition is determined. If the content of the predetermined effect is varied based on the above, it is possible to clearly feel the superiority that the special condition is satisfied through the predetermined effect.

If the effect set by the “effect setting means” is an effect for game times, a special effect is performed when a predetermined effect is set among the effects for game play. The degree of attention of the game times to be performed can be suitably increased. As a specific configuration in this case, the configuration of “production execution means” and “special production execution means”
“The effect execution means starts a game turn operation as the effect based on the grant determination, and ends the game turn operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. As an example, the operation for the game times in each game time is executed by the predetermined notification means,
A plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is a short period and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode are set in the operation for game times. The game replay operation is performed in the set execution mode,
When the operation mode of the game turning operation set by the effect setting unit is the long-term mode, a special effect (special hold notice) is sent by the predetermined notifying unit or another notifying unit. Special effect execution means that can be executed (a function to execute special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) "
It is good to do.

Further, if the effect set by the “effect setting means” is an effect of a so-called pre-reading notice (holding notice), a special effect is performed when a predetermined effect is set in the pre-reading notice, and the predetermined effect is performed. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention during the period until the game is played on the special information that has been triggered. A specific configuration in this case is as follows: “Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (by the main control device 81) The function of executing the process of step S205) "and the configuration of the" granting determination means "is given to the player based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means Grant determination means for sequentially determining whether or not to grant (a function for executing the determination process by the main control device 81) ",
Furthermore, “with respect to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit, the predetermined determination information is determined to be the target of the determination of the application at a timing earlier than the predetermined determination of the specific determination information. A destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of becoming (a function of executing a holding confirmation process by the main control device 81);
An effect that is performed at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of the application by the application determination unit, in the predetermined notification unit (symbol display device 41) based on the result of the specification by the target specifying unit. Production setting means for setting (holding advance notice) (function for executing processing for holding display by the production control device 82);
An effect executing means (function for executing a hold increasing process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notifying means;
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (for example, the second holding image P2) determined in advance, a special effect (special hold notice) different from that is given to the predetermined notification means. Or a special effect execution means (function to execute a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by a different notification means. "
It is good to do.

  Feature B2. Feature B1 characterized by comprising condition notifying means (function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notifying means or different notifying means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, the player can be made aware of the special conditions. As a result, the relationship between the predetermined setting period related to the establishment probability of the special condition and the special effect becomes clear, and the probability of establishment of the special condition depends on the length of the special effect period, that is, the length of the predetermined effect period. You can fully enjoy the change.

  Feature B3. The condition notifying means includes a prior notifying means (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition at a timing earlier than the determination by the determining means. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special condition at a timing earlier than the determination of success or failure. Since special conditions change with the passage of time, the probability of establishment changes, so if you understand the special conditions at the earliest possible timing, you can fully enjoy whether or not the special conditions are satisfied. .

  Feature B4. The destination notification means includes means for performing notification of the special condition based on the start of the elapse of the predetermined setting period (function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to Feature B3, which is characterized.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified based on the start of the predetermined elapsed period, it is possible to enjoy the success or failure of the period related to the success or failure of the special condition.

  Feature B5. The destination notifying means includes means for executing notification of the special condition (function of executing special hold notice control processing by the effect control device 82) in the course of the predetermined setting period. The gaming machine according to Feature B3 or Feature B4.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified in the course of the predetermined set period, the player can be made aware of the change in the probability of establishment of the special condition. This makes it possible for the player to clearly understand the relationship between the period during which the special performance is performed and the probability of establishment of the special condition.

  Feature B6. The condition notifying means includes post-notification means (function of executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition at a timing after the determination by the determining means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B5.

  According to the said structure, it can grasp | ascertain even after the determination by a determination means about special conditions. That is, the success or failure of the special condition can be grasped even after the determination timing. By doing in this way, it is possible to leave interest about whether or not the special condition is satisfied as a remnant even after the timing of giving it, and to prevent the degree of attention from being extremely lowered after the determination. it can.

  Feature B7. The post-notification means performs notification regarding the establishment probability at the time of determination by the determination means as notification of the special condition, and the gaming machine according to feature B6.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification regarding the establishment probability at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success / failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not satisfied, it is possible to grasp how long the special condition is satisfied later, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not satisfied. .

Feature B8. The acquisition information storage means (function to execute processing of Step S205 by main controller 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a predetermined number is provided. ,
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
Destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information on the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of grant. Function to execute the confirmation process), and
Condition setting means for setting the special condition based on the result of specification by the destination specifying means (function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the production control device 82);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, comprising:

  According to the said structure, a special condition is set based on the information of the predetermined special information memorize | stored in the acquisition information storage means. Therefore, a game of predicting predetermined special information from the special conditions is added, and the game can be diversified. That is, by associating the special condition with special information that triggers the grant determination by the grant determination unit, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

  The “special condition” set by the condition setting means can be simply rephrased as “predetermined set period”, or can be rephrased as “special condition at the start of the predetermined set period”.

Feature B9. Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game turning operation is started by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means, and the game is obtained as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) to make the game time operation to be performed once to end the game operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The condition setting means includes first setting means (a function for executing timer input processing at the time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on the specifying result of the preceding operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the information on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relevance between the special condition and the operation period in game play can be further increased, and the establishment probability of whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be associated with the length of the operation period. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

  Feature B10. The condition setting means includes second setting means (a function for executing timer input processing at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specification result by the previous operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature B9, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period cannot be specified first by the previous operation period specifying unit, for example, even when the operation period is determined only at the start of the game round, the special condition is set by the second setting unit. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Feature B11. In the gaming state, a special gaming state in which the operation period can be specified by the previous operation period specifying means for any special information is set.
The gaming machine according to Feature B9 or Feature B10, wherein the special condition is set during the special gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, if any special information is in the special gaming state, the information of the operation period can be specified in advance even if any special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and special conditions are set in such a state. By doing so, there is no inconvenience that information on the operation period cannot be specified. Thereby, it is possible to suitably realize an effect using special conditions.

Feature B12. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) when the granting determination by the granting determination unit is performed, The second operation period (holding number non-correspondence pattern) that is not so, is included,
The prior operation period specifying means includes means for specifying an operation period for the special information to be the second operation period (a function for performing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B11.

  Since the game situation at the time of acquisition of the special information and the game situation at the time of grant determination may be different, even if the operation period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the grant determination, specification by the previous action period specifying means The operation period at the time may be different from the operation period at the time of grant determination. Therefore, in the above configuration, the operation based on the difference in the game situation is performed because the second action period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the determination of grant, not the first action period in which such a game situation is reflected. It is possible to avoid inconvenience related to the prior specification of the period. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using the operation period.

  If the present configuration is applied to the feature B9, “the first setting means is configured to perform the special operation based on the operation period specified by the means for specifying the operation period for the special information that is the second operation period. It is preferable to have a configuration of “setting conditions”.

  Feature B13. The prior operation period specifying unit specifies a provisional operation period as an operation period for the special information when the operation period for the special information to be specified is the first operation period. The gaming machine according to Feature B12, further comprising provisional specifying means (a function of executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment).

  Even if the operation period can be different based on the difference in the gaming situation as in the above configuration, if it is specified as a provisional operation period, it is possible to produce an effect based on the success or failure of the special condition. In other words, even if the operation period cannot be specified in advance, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the effect by leaving room for the effect.

  If the present configuration is applied to the feature B10, the “second setting unit may set the special condition based on the temporary operation period specified by the temporary specifying unit”.

Feature B14. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the predetermined setting period elapses,
The provisional specifying means specifies a period that is not more than the shortest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the provisional operation period. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or shorter than the shortest period that can be changed thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is set to be higher than the highest probability of establishment. Here, if the probability of the special condition is extremely low, the player may become accustomed to the fact that the special condition is not satisfied in another production different from the special production, and the interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is. Therefore, by making the special condition easy to be satisfied as in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to provisional specification.

Feature B15. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the predetermined setting period elapses,
The temporary specifying means specifies a period that is longer than the longest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the temporary operation period,
Means (in the fourth embodiment) for correcting the special condition at a timing later than the timing when the provisional identification means is specified and before the determination by the determination means. The game machine according to Feature B13 or Feature B14, further including a function of executing subtraction processing during shift by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or longer than the longest period that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is set to be equal to or less than the lowest establishment probability. Therefore, in the above-described configuration, the special condition is corrected thereafter, so that a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the establishment probability due to provisional specification can be avoided.

  The “correction” may be, for example, a configuration of “shortening / extending the predetermined setting period”, and more specifically, “the provisional operation period and the operation for the predetermined setting period”. A configuration is conceivable in which the difference between the operation period set by the period setting means and the operation period is shortened / extended.

Feature B16. The acquisition information storage means (function to execute processing of Step S205 by main controller 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a predetermined number is provided. ,
The grant determination means sequentially performs grant determination as to whether or not to grant the privilege to a player based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
When the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the grant determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determination means. Including a destination specifying means (a function for executing a holding confirmation process by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination of
The effect setting means is configured such that the predetermined notification information (symbol display device 41) is based on the result of specification by the destination specifying means, and the predetermined special information is subject to the application determination by the application determination means. Set the production (holding notice) to be performed at the previous timing,
The production execution means provides the grant when the predetermined special information that is the specific target is the target of the grant determination based on the specific result by the destination specifying means being a predetermined result. A special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the determination result is sent to the predetermined notification means or a separate notification means at a timing earlier than the result of the determination of grant regarding the predetermined special information. To execute
The special effect executing means is configured to notify the special effect of the special notification or the separate notification based on the fact that the content of the special notification executed by the effect execution means corresponds to the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, wherein the gaming machine is executed by means.

  According to the said structure, special alerting | reporting may be performed before it becomes the object of grant determination about the predetermined | prescribed special information memorize | stored in the acquisition information storage means. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted by the first specifying unit is predicted before the result of the determination on the addition of the predetermined special information is notified. Diversification will be achieved. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. When performing such special notification, if the special notification is such that a privilege is easily given to the player, the degree of attention to the special notification is increased while the degree of attention to the production of other special information is increased. There is a possibility of lowering. Moreover, if it is a special alert | report which makes it difficult to give a privilege, not only the special alert | report but the attention degree to the subsequent production may fall extremely. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined effect is set as the special notification, if the special effect is performed in the predetermined notification means or a different notification means, the degree of attention can be reduced by performing the special notification. Attention is paid to the special performance side, and it is possible to suitably avoid a decrease in interest.

Feature B17. Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game turning operation is started by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means, and the game is obtained as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) to make the game time operation to be performed once to end the game operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
Feature B16, comprising: condition setting means for setting the special condition (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) based on the result of specification by the prior operation period specifying means The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the information on the operation period in the special effect executed based on the fact that the content of the special notification is the predetermined effect. Thereby, the special alerting | reporting performed based on predetermined | prescribed special information and the information of an operation period can be linked | related.

  In this case, with regard to special notification, notification regarding predetermined special information is performed, and the special condition in the special effect executed based on the special notification is set based on an operation period other than the predetermined special information. It may be a configuration that is set based on an operation period of predetermined special information. In the former case, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to other special information by means of special effects while increasing the degree of attention with respect to predetermined special information through special notification. In the latter case, the special notice and the special effect can be more closely associated. For example, when the effect that suggests that the privilege is difficult to be given in the special notice is performed, the special condition is established in the special effect. It is possible to diversify the production by, for example, a configuration that performs easy production.

  Feature B18. The condition setting means is a target of the grant determination before the predetermined special information that is a target of the special notification in the special notification triggered by the execution of the special effect by the special effect execution means. The gaming machine according to Feature B17, wherein the special condition is set for the special information based on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the operation period of the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the special information that is the target of the special notification. It is possible to increase the interest in the operation period of the game times for the special information subject to the grant determination before the information, and to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention to the effects for other game times by performing the special notification Is possible.

Feature B19. Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game turning operation is started by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means, and the game is obtained as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) to make the game time operation to be performed once to end the game operation,
In the game turn action by the game turn control means, the first action (reach occurrence) and the privilege more than the first action at a timing prior to notifying the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means. Branch timing (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the lower symbol sequence Z3) is set to branch to the second operation (reach non-occurrence) where the grant probability of is low,
The determination means is configured to determine whether or not the special condition is successful at the branch timing in the game rotation operation for the special information triggered by the special condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the success or failure of the special condition is determined at the branch timing between the first operation and the second operation. Further, at this branching timing, the probability that a privilege is given increases if the game-returning action branches to the first action, while the granting probability becomes lower if it branches to the second action. In this case, it may be possible to further add a branch effect associated with the level of the probability of grant, but if the effect becomes too complex, there is a concern that the player's understanding will be reduced, and as a result, the interest in the game will also be increased. It may be faded. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the special condition different from the privilege is determined at this branch timing, it is possible to suitably execute a plurality of branch effects related to the privilege grant while suppressing the complication of the game.

  Feature B20. Change means that can change the elapsed speed of the predetermined setting period from the previous elapsed speed or change the remaining period of the predetermined setting period from the remaining period until then (subtraction value adjustment by the effect control device 82) A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the gaming machine has a function of executing a process.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes as the elapsed speed of the predetermined set period or the remaining period changes. Thus, for example, even if the special condition is not likely to be satisfied, the special condition can be satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period, and for example, the special condition is likely to be satisfied. Even so, the special condition may not be satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period. That is, the success / failure process of the special condition can be varied, and the degree of attention to the production can be suitably increased.

Feature B21. Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game turning operation is started by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means, and the game is obtained as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) to make the game time operation to be performed once to end the game operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The gaming machine according to Feature B20, wherein the changing means changes the time according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to further increase the relevance of the establishment probability of the special condition with the operation period, and it is possible to suitably avoid inconveniences based on the length of the operation period of game times.

Feature B22. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the predetermined setting period elapses,
The gaming machine according to Feature B21, wherein the changing unit is configured to increase the elapsed speed to be changed or to shorten the remaining period to be changed as the operation period is shorter.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period during which the predetermined set period elapses is also shortened, so the probability of establishment of the special condition can be lowered. In such a case, the elapsed speed is increased or the remaining time is increased. If the period is changed so as to be shortened, it is possible to prevent the interest from diminishing by predicting that the special condition is not satisfied due to the short operation period.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
For the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a grant determining means (main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether to give a player a privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode). A function to execute the pass / fail determination process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player, the privilege granting unit (by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player A function for executing the game state transition process), and
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) starts a game turn operation, and the game times are notified as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The game operation is terminated once, and the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game operation is performed (the function of executing the game operation control process by the main controller 81). )When,
For the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the result of the determination of grant when the predetermined special information becomes the target of the determination of grant, the predetermined special information of the grant determination A prior result specifying means (function for executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying at a timing earlier than the target;
Corresponding to the result of the grant determination when the specified special information that is the specified target is the target of the grant determination based on the specified result by the prior result specifying means being the specified result Special notification executing means for executing the special notification to be performed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means (function for executing the hold control command corresponding processing by the effect control device 82);
With
The special notification executing means is a setting means (second second) capable of setting an execution mode of the special notification based on the special information different from the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine having a function of executing subtraction processing during shifting in the embodiment.

  According to the said structure, special alerting | reporting may be performed before it becomes the object of grant determination about the predetermined | prescribed special information memorize | stored in the acquisition information storage means. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted by the previous result specifying means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information. Figured. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which such game times and special notifications are performed in parallel, if the presentation is flashy with respect to special notifications, the degree of attention to the special notifications can be increased, but the game times being executed There is a possibility that the degree of attention to will decrease. Therefore, the gaming machine is provided with a setting unit that can set the execution mode of the special notification based on the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggers the execution of the special notification for the special notification. Thus, based on the special notification, it is possible to associate not only predetermined special information but also other special information, and the degree of attention can be increased for other special information. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, the “setting unit that allows the execution mode of the special notification to be set” can be rephrased as “the changing unit that enables the execution mode of the special notification to be changed”.

  Feature C2. The game machine according to Feature C1, wherein the setting means is capable of setting an execution mode of the special notification after the special notification is started.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the execution mode of the special notification based on the other special information during execution of the special notification about the predetermined special information. In this way, it is possible to execute special notification in consideration of not only the situation at the time of the start of special notification (presence or absence of other special information, type, etc.) but also the situation after the start. A variety of aspects can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to special notification.

In addition, the said structure can also be paraphrased as follows.
“The special notification execution means includes an execution mode setting unit that sets an execution mode of the special notification based on a result of the grant determination when the predetermined special information is a target of the grant determination. The special notification is executed based on the execution mode set by the execution mode setting means,
The setting means can change the execution mode set by the execution mode setting unit after the special notification is started. "

  Feature C3. The setting unit is configured to execute the special notification based on the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the predetermined special information among the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, comprising means capable of being set (a function of executing the processing of Step S2802 and Step S2803 by the effect control device 82).

  According to the said structure, an execution aspect is set based on the special information used as the object of grant determination before predetermined | prescribed special information. The special information that is subject to the grant determination prior to the predetermined special information is the special information that is subject to the grant determination after the start of the special notification, and is based on the special information relating to the game times executed during the special notification. Thus, the execution mode of the special notification is set. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to suitably raise the degree of attention to not only the special notification but also the game times during execution of this special notification.

Feature C4. The grant determination means performs the grant determination for one special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the grant determination for other special information acquired by the information acquisition means prior to the one special information. Provided with a destination determination means (a function for executing data setting processing by the main controller 81 in the seventh embodiment) that is performed prior to the determination,
The setting means is capable of setting the execution mode of the special notification based on special information for which the assignment determination is performed before the predetermined special information by the destination determination means. A gaming machine according to C3.

  According to the above configuration, since the number of special information that is a target for determination of grant during execution of the special notification increases, the opportunities and targets for setting by the setting unit also increase. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of special notification.

  Further, when this configuration is applied to the feature C3, setting by the setting unit can be performed based on the special information acquired after the start of the special notification and before the setting by the setting unit. Therefore, it is meaningful to acquire special information even after the start of special notification, and it is possible to promote the continuation of game ball launch.

  Feature C5. Storage information notification means (effects) for executing the storage notification corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means (notification by the holding image P) by the predetermined notification means or a separate notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, further comprising a function of executing a hold display setting process by the control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, the storage information notification unit performs the storage notification for the special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and that can trigger the setting of the execution mode of the special notification by the setting unit. For this reason, for example, a special game that is predicted based on the result of the addition of a game that predicts whether or not to set the execution mode of the special notification from the stored notification by the stored information notification means is performed. It is possible to increase the degree of attention not only for notification but also for other stored special information.

  In addition, when it is set as "the said memory alerting | reporting by the said memory | storage information alerting | reporting means is performed based on the specific result by the said previous result specific | specification means", it grasps | ascertains the specific result by a previous result specific | specification means by performing memory alerting | reporting Therefore, the significance of predicting the execution mode of the special notification from the stored notification can be clarified.

Feature C6. The stored information notification means is means for setting notification mode information corresponding to the special information of interest from a plurality of notification mode information (function of selecting the hold image P in the hold display setting process by the effect control device 82). And the storage notification is executed using the notification mode information set by the setting means.
The special notification execution means executes the special notification using the notification mode information,
The setting means is based on the notification mode information about the special information that is the target of the grant determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information that is the target of the special notification. The game machine according to Feature C5, wherein the notification mode information about the predetermined special information is set to different notification mode information.

  According to the above configuration, in a situation where a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, the notification mode information is notified, and when one of the notification mode information is a target of special notification, Based on the notification mode information corresponding to the special information that is the subject of the grant determination prior to the notification mode information that is the target of the special notification, the notification mode information that is the target of the special notification is different from that. The notification mode information can be set. By doing in this way, in the situation where a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, each special information is not simply stored as waiting for the order of grant determination, but the order and special information (notification) The type of aspect information) is related to the special notification, and it is possible to give interest to each special information.

  Feature C7. The setting unit is a selection unit that allows selection of special information that triggers setting of the execution mode of the special notification from the special information different from the predetermined special information (operation-related subtraction by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the gaming machine has a function of executing a process.

  According to the above configuration, when a plurality of special information different from the predetermined special information exists, the selection unit selects which special information is to be used to set the execution mode of the special notification. By doing in this way, a setup can be made more sophisticated than the structure which sets the execution mode of special information simply based on special information different from predetermined special information. That is, for example, when the special notification is set to be more preferable for the player than the special information, the special information is selected by the selection means. For example, if there is only special information that can be set that is not desirable for the player, for example, the player may enter the game ball into the entrance so that other special information is stored. Can be considered. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately increase the degree of attention to special notification.

Feature C8. An operation means (operation unit 75) for operation by a player is provided,
The gaming machine according to C7, wherein the selection unit is capable of selecting special information that triggers the setting of the execution mode of the special notification based on an operation of the operation unit.

  According to the above configuration, the player's will can be reflected in the setting of the execution mode of the special notification. This makes it possible for the player to be involved in the effect, rather than the unilateral effect from the gaming machine side, and to be more immersed in the game.

  Feature C9. Any of the features C1 to C8, wherein the setting means is capable of setting an execution mode of the special notification based on the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the above configuration, it is clearer that the configuration is such that not only the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggers the special notification, but also the specific notification execution mode is set including the predetermined special information. Become.

  Feature C10. The setting means is configured to be able to set an execution mode of the special notification based on the entrance information of the game ball generated in the entrance portion after the special notification is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball is fired even after the special notification is performed, by using the entry information to the entrance part generated after the start of the special notification for setting the execution mode of the special notification. It is possible to bring about the significance of continuing.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the attention level of the special notification. On the other hand, the higher the attention level to the special notification, the lower the attention level to the effect on the game times side. Then, as the attention is paid to the started special notification, the player may stop launching the game ball and look into the production (stop the game).

  In the case of a gaming machine configured to shorten the length of game times when the number of special information stored is large, if the game ball is repeatedly stopped during the game, smooth progress of the game is hindered for the player. To get. In addition, if a game ball is repeatedly fired and stopped during a game, it is difficult for the game hall manager to discriminate it from an illegal act (an act of launching a game ball at an illegal timing), resulting in an illegal act. There may be inconveniences such as discovery of actions can be difficult. Therefore, as described above, if it is possible to set the execution mode of the special notification based on the entry information to the entrance part generated after the start of the special notification, while increasing the degree of attention to the special notification, The significance of continuing to emit the game ball arises, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved while avoiding the above disadvantages.

  Feature C11. The setting means uses the entry information of game balls generated in the entry section in a situation where the predetermined number of the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, and executes the execution mode of the special information. The gaming machine according to Feature C10, which is configured to be settable.

  According to the above configuration, even when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage unit is stored, there is a significance that the game ball enters the entrance portion. In particular, when the upper limit number of special information is stored, since it is not possible to obtain a grant even if more balls are generated (special information is not acquired / stored), in general, It is considered that the player wants to stop the launch of the game ball. On the other hand, even in such a situation, the inconvenience that it becomes difficult for the game hall to find illegal acts may remain if the game ball is repeatedly stopped as described above. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is meaningful that the player continues to fire the game ball even in a situation where the number of special information stored has reached the upper limit, and while avoiding the above disadvantages, The degree of attention can be improved.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
For the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a grant determining means (main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether to give a player a privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode). A function to execute the pass / fail determination process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player, the privilege granting unit (by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player A function for executing the game state transition process), and
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) starts a game turn operation, and the game times are notified as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The game operation is terminated once, and the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game operation is performed (the function of executing the game operation control process by the main controller 81). )When,
With
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game-returning operation is performed over an operation period,
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means when the predetermined special information is the target of the game times by the game time control means for the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means. A pre-operation period specifying means for specifying the predetermined special information at a timing earlier than the target of the game round (a function for performing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82);
Execution of special notification (special hold notice) that is started at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information becomes the target of the game times can be executed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means. Means (function to execute special hold notice setting processing in the production control device 82);
With
The special notification executing means is an execution period setting means for setting the execution period of the special notification based on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means (timer input at the time specifying pattern in the effect control device 82) A game machine having a function of executing a process) and executing the special notification based on the execution period set by the execution period setting means.

  According to the above configuration, the special notification in which the execution period is set based on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying unit is performed by the game times related to the special information specified by the previous operation period specifying unit. It may start at a timing earlier than That is, there is a possibility that the production of the operation period corresponding to one special information is performed at different start timings for the game times and the special notification. In this way, if a plurality of production start timings for one piece of special information are provided, for example, if there is an inconvenience in performing the production for that special information, the inconvenience can be avoided by changing the start timing. be able to. As an inconvenience, for example, in a situation where a plurality of special information is acquired and special information is easily acquired, it is necessary to smoothly perform the production corresponding to each special information. If the number of times is increased, the digestion will not be able to catch up with the acquisition of special information, or conversely, if the number of special information stored is small, the game time will be prolonged to prevent interruption. Then, it is mentioned that a player misunderstands that the probability of granting a privilege is high. In this case, for example, there may be a configuration in which only the result of the grant determination is notified after the start timing is different, but only the convenience of the production is prioritized, and the production of one special information is sufficiently provided. It is not preferable to deviate from the enjoyment inherent in gaming machines. In that respect, in the above configuration, even if the start timing is varied, the operation period corresponds, so that it can be said that the special information is sufficiently produced. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game while avoiding inconveniences in performance.

Feature D2. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) when the granting determination by the granting determination unit is performed, The second operation period (holding number non-correspondence pattern) that is not so, is included,
The prior operation period specifying means specifies a provisional operation means (fourth implementation) for specifying the temporary operation period when the operation period for the special information to be specified is the first operation period. The game machine according to feature D1, further comprising a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82 in the form.

  Even if the operation period may be different based on the difference in the gaming situation as in the above configuration, if the temporary operation period is specified, the special notification is started at least before the game times for the special information. be able to. In this way, even if it is difficult to specify the operation period in advance, it is possible to increase the opportunity for executing the special notification by leaving a room for executing the special notification.

  Feature D3. The special notification execution means includes a correction means (function to execute the processing of steps S3310 to S3313 by the effect control device 82) that can correct the execution period of the special notification after the special notification is started. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or the feature D2.

  According to the above configuration, when an inconvenience occurs in the execution period on the special notification side, for example, when the specified operation period is different from the actual operation period, the period can be corrected. It can be avoided.

  Note that “correction” can be rephrased as “shortening or extending the execution period”.

Feature D4. The previous action period specifying means includes means for specifying information related to the action period for special information other than the predetermined special information (function to execute the processing of steps S1701 to S1703 by the effect control device 82),
The special notification execution means includes means for providing the execution period of the special notification including information related to the operation period specified by the means for specifying information related to the operation period for the special information other than the predetermined special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S1704 by the control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, the execution period of the special notification by the special notification execution unit can be set as a period including the operation period for the special information other than the predetermined special information specified by the previous operation period specifying unit. it can. In other words, in a configuration in which the special notification is started before the game times for the predetermined special information, the game for other special information performed from the start of the special notification to the start of the game time for the predetermined special information. The special notification can be continued during the operation. In other words, even if special information is included in addition to the predetermined special information, the special notification can be continued until the game times for the predetermined special information. By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player clearly understand the relationship between the special notification and the game times, and further suppress the special notification from ending before the game times and diminishing interest. it can.

Feature D5. In the gaming state, a special gaming state in which the operation period can be specified by the previous operation period specifying means for any special information is set.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the special notification execution unit is capable of executing the special notification during the special gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, as long as any special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the information of the operation period can be specified in advance, and in such a state, the operation period can be specified. There is no inconvenience that information cannot be specified. As a result, it is possible to suitably realize the effect of specifying the operation period ahead.

Feature D6. The special notification by the special notification execution means is executed so as to end at a predetermined timing during the game round for the predetermined special information,
Based on the information specified by the previous operation period specifying means, there is provided means for adjusting the start timing of the special notification (function for executing the process of step S1710 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D5.

  According to the above configuration, by adjusting the start timing, it is possible to perform special notification according to the previously specified operation period without the need to modify the operation period or change the end timing. Thereby, the special alerting | reporting which alert | reports the length of the operation period of a game time is suitably realizable.

Feature D7. The special notification by the special notification execution means is executed so as to end at a predetermined timing during the game times for the predetermined special information,
The game time control means adjusts the game turn operation at the predetermined timing during the game time for the predetermined special information in response to the special notification (in step S2503 by the effect control device 82). A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing processing.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to associate the effect at the end of the special notification with the game turning operation by adjusting the game turning operation at the end timing without correcting the previously specified operation period. . Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify the length of the operation period of the game times while associating it with the operation for game times.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, a grant determination means (main control device) that performs grant determination as to whether or not to grant the player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) 81 for determining whether or not the game is correct)
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the first privilege to the player, the first privilege granting unit for granting the first privilege to the player (Function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) starts a game turn operation, and the game times are notified as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The game operation is terminated once, and the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game operation is performed (the function of executing the game operation control process by the main controller 81). )When,
With
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game-returning operation is performed over an operation period,
Special notification executing means (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for executing special notification by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Prepared,
The special notification executing means includes
Period presentation means for presenting a predetermined set period (a function of executing various timer input processes by the effect control device 82);
Based on the fact that one or more of the game-returning operations have continued for the predetermined set period or longer, second privilege granting means (by the effect control device 82) for granting a player a second privilege different from the first privilege A function to execute a hold display process), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  Special information is acquired on the basis of the game ball entering the ball entering part provided in the game area, and whether or not the first privilege is granted is determined based on the special information. In a gaming machine in which a game-playing effect (game-turning operation) is executed by predetermined notification means based on the grant determination, if the game-playing effect is flashy for a long time, the corresponding game times Although the degree of attention is increased, the period of time until the first privilege is granted becomes longer, which may make the player feel annoying. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when one or a plurality of game turning operations have continued for a predetermined set period or longer, the second benefit that is different from the first privilege is given, so that the effect for game times is achieved. It is possible to avoid inconvenience due to the longer operation period. In particular, since the predetermined set period is presented by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means, it is possible for the player to clearly understand the relationship between the operation period of the game times and the predetermined set period. It can be enjoyed in association with the provision of the second privilege and the provision of the first privilege based on the effect of the game times. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

  Feature E2. The special notification executing unit is configured to execute the special notification when the operation period set by the operation period setting unit is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period of the game times is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, a predetermined set period is presented, and if the game turn operation continues for the set period or longer, the second privilege Is granted. By doing in this way, even when the operation period of the game times is short, the special notification is made and the second privilege is hardly given to the player, and the operation period of the game times is long. This inconvenience can be efficiently avoided.

Feature E3. The acquisition information storage means (function to execute processing of Step S205 by main controller 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a predetermined number is provided. ,
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means when the predetermined special information is the target of the game times by the game time control means for the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means. Including a pre-operation period specifying means for specifying the predetermined special information at a timing earlier than the target of the game round (a function for executing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The special notification execution means executes the special notification when the operation period for the predetermined special information specified by the previous operation period specifying means is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Feature E1 or Feature E2, characterized by:

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period of the game times for the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, a predetermined setting period is presented, If the operation for one or more game times continues for the set period or longer, the second privilege is granted. By doing in this way, the operation for game times of the game times before the start can also be targeted for special notification, and an increase in the opportunity for executing special notification can be expected.

Feature E4. Summing means (for example, by the effect control device 82) sums the motion period for one of the predetermined special information specified by the previous motion period specifying means and the motion period for the other predetermined special information. A function of executing the process of step S1704),
The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the special notification execution unit is configured to execute the special notification when a period added by the adding unit is equal to or longer than the predetermined period.

  According to the above configuration, the special notification can be performed based on the operation periods for a plurality of game times before the start. As a result, the sum of the operation periods tends to be equal to or longer than the predetermined period, and an increase in the opportunity for executing special notification can be expected.

Feature E5. In the game times being executed by the game time control means, the remaining time period grasping means for grasping the remaining operation period (function to execute the process of step S1708 by the effect control device 82),
The game according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the special notification execution unit executes the special notification in consideration of the remaining operation period grasped by the remaining period grasping unit. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, since the remaining operation period of the game game being executed is also taken into account, the game game operation being executed can be added as one or more game game operations that are targeted in the special notification. . By doing in this way, the probability that it will become more than a predetermined setting period will also become high, and the start of a special alert | report is not limited only at the time of the start of a game time, but can diversify execution timing.

  Note that “applying the remaining operation period” is applied to a configuration in which special notification is performed according to the length of the operation period as in the feature E2, and a configuration in which special notification is performed when the remaining operation period is long. It is good. By doing in this way, when the remaining operation | movement period of a game time is short, it can prevent causing the problem that it becomes difficult to give a 2nd privilege by performing special alerting | reporting.

  Further, when “applying the remaining operation period” is applied to a configuration in which the operation period is specified in advance as in the feature E3, the configuration in which the previously specified operation period and the remaining operation period are added together. It is good. In this way, it is possible to raise an interest in whether or not the game times being executed are longer than a predetermined set period.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the special notification execution unit executes the special notification based on a result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit.

  According to the said structure, the result of determination of grant and execution of special alerting | reporting can be linked | related. Thereby, if special notification is performed, a situation where the first privilege is easily / not easily granted can be created, and the player can be entertained together with the game turning operation.

Feature E7. For the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the result of the determination of grant when the predetermined special information becomes the target of the determination of grant, the predetermined special information of the grant determination Provided with a destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying at a timing earlier than the target,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the special notification execution unit is configured to execute the special notification based on a specification result by the destination specifying unit.

  According to the said structure, the information about the special information before grant determination and execution of special alerting | reporting can be linked | related. Thereby, if a special notification is performed, it is possible to create a situation in which the first privilege is likely to be given / difficult to be given based on the special information to be determined thereafter, and the result of the grant determination is predicted from the special notification. You can entertain the game.

  In particular, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of the feature E3, it is possible to perform special notification by associating information on the result of the grant determination with respect to the special information before the grant determination and the information on the operation period, thereby improving attention. More preferable.

Feature E8. The acquisition information storage means (function to execute processing of Step S205 by main controller 81) which stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a predetermined number is provided. ,
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means when the predetermined special information is the target of the game times by the game time control means for the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means. Including a pre-operation period specifying means for specifying the predetermined special information at a timing earlier than the target of the game round (a function for executing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The period presentation unit presents a predetermined set period based on the information on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specification unit, according to any one of the features E1 to E7, Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, since the predetermined set period is presented based on the information of the specified operation period, it is grasped in advance whether or not one or a plurality of game-use movements will continue for a predetermined set period or more. However, special notification can be performed. Thereby, since whether or not the second privilege should be granted can be managed in advance on the gaming machine side, an effect matching that, for example, an effect suggesting that the second privilege is likely to be given or difficult to be given is performed. Is possible.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
For the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a grant determining means (main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether to give a player a privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode). A function to execute the pass / fail determination process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player, the privilege granting unit (by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player A function for executing the game state transition process), and
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) starts a game turn operation, and the game times are notified as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The game operation is terminated once, and the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game operation is performed (the function of executing the game operation control process by the main controller 81). )When,
Destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information on the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of grant. Function to execute the confirmation process), and
Corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case where the predetermined special information that is the specific target is the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined result Special notification executing means (function for executing a hold control command corresponding process by the effect control device 82) for executing the special notification by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means;
Based on the special notification being performed by the special notification execution means, a predetermined effect is executed in the game times related to the special information different from the predetermined special information triggered by the execution of the special notification. Predetermined effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the said structure, special alerting | reporting may be performed before it becomes the object of grant determination about the predetermined | prescribed special information memorize | stored in the acquisition information storage means. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted for identification by the prior identification means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, thereby diversifying the game. It is done. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which such special notification is performed, as the special notification is flashy and the degree of attention about the predetermined special information is increased, the degree of attention to the game times about the other special information is decreased. There is a possibility that. For this reason, the game times played are simply digest games, and it is difficult to sufficiently enjoy the game during that period. Therefore, if the predetermined presentation is performed at the game times for the other special information, if attention is given to the predetermined effects, the degree of attention during the game times for the other special information is suitably set. Can be increased.

  In addition, if it is set as the structure which performs a predetermined production "based on the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the execution of the special notification", not only the execution timing of the predetermined production but also the production of the production The contents can also be related to the different special information, and the interest in the different special information can be preferably increased. Further, the predetermined effect may be expressed as “a predetermined effect different from the special notification”.

  Feature F2. The predetermined effect executing means is configured to execute the predetermined effect in the game times related to the special information that is the subject of the grant determination prior to the predetermined special information. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, when the special notification is performed, the game times up to the game times for the predetermined special information that is the target of the special notification are easily digested games. By performing the predetermined effect, it is possible to make the player interested in the game even during the execution of the game times where the degree of attention is likely to decrease as a digest game.

Feature F3. Condition setting means for setting a special condition whose probability of establishment may vary depending on the game situation during execution of the predetermined effect without taking into account that the special condition is satisfied (execution of a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) Function)
Condition determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function for executing a special hold notice process at the time of stop by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine according to Feature F1 or Feature F2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when a predetermined performance is performed, it is possible to make the player interested in the game situation being executed. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game suitably by increasing the relevance between the predetermined effect and the game situation being executed, rather than merely performing each effect or game. And, since special conditions that can vary the probability of establishment depending on the game situation are set without considering success or failure, it is possible to avoid an event in which the result is known on the way from other information such as a so-called race. it can. Therefore, it becomes possible to keep the degree of attention to the game in a balanced manner.

  In addition, when it is set as the structure provided with the provision means (function to perform the provision process in the production | presentation control apparatus 82) which provides a privilege when it determines with special conditions having been satisfied by the condition determination means, the attention degree with respect to the success or failure of special conditions Can be further enhanced. In this case, the privilege granted based on the establishment of the special condition is a privilege different from the privilege granted based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, so that the game determination effect on the grant determination side and the predetermined effect execution are performed. It is possible to clearly indicate that the determinations are different from each other while associating the predetermined effects on the means side. It should be noted that “depending on the game situation” can be rephrased as “in relation to the game situation” or “depending on the game situation”.

  Feature F4. The game according to Feature F3, wherein the condition determination means determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on one or a plurality of the game turn actions by the game turn control means. Machine.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to associate the special notification based on the specific specification of the special information and the game turning operation sequentially performed based on the special information through a predetermined effect. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the balance of the attention level between the special notification and the game replay operation and to increase the interest in the game.

  Note that “based on the game turn operation” means “based on the operation period (length) of the game turn operation” or “the operation mode of the game turn operation (action content, production content). ) On the other hand. In these cases, if it is configured to include “operation period setting means for setting the operation period of the game rotation operation” and “operation mode setting means for setting the operation mode of the game rotation operation”, the setting means The configuration may be such that the success or failure of the special condition is determined based on the set operation period and operation mode of the game turning operation, and not only that, but the operation period and operation mode may be changed during the game turning operation. In the structure to obtain, it is good also as a structure which determines the success or failure of special conditions based on the operation period and operation | movement aspect after a change.

  Feature F5. The special condition is characterized in that the establishment probability can be higher as the operation period of the operation for game times in the game times related to the special information different from the predetermined special information is longer. The gaming machine according to Feature F4.

  According to the above configuration, the longer the operation period of the game times related to the special information that is different from the predetermined special information that triggers the special notification, the easier the special condition in the predetermined performance is established. Even in a situation in which the operation period of the game times related to this becomes long and it can be felt as redundant, it is possible to keep the degree of attention to the production in a well-balanced state by attracting attention to the predetermined production side.

Feature F6. The predetermined notification means is a display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns,
The game times control means controls the display means so as to start the variable display of the plurality of pictures, stop and display the pictures, and notify the determination result by the grant judgment means, as the game times operation. Is what
In any one of the features F3 to F5, the condition determination means determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the picture stopped and displayed by the game times control means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the said structure, it becomes possible to relate the pattern stopped and displayed as a result of grant determination in each game round with the success or failure of the special condition in the predetermined | prescribed effect performed based on special alerting | reporting. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to each game time while increasing the degree of attention to the special notification.

  In particular, in the situation where the special notification is performed as described above, while the game result of the game times related to the special information that triggered the special notification is strongly interested, the game result of other game times Interest may be reduced. This is considered to be a problem caused by the player predicting that the game result of the other game times is out of play (a result in which no privilege is given) due to the special notification. However, if the possibility that the game results of these other game times are winning is too high, there is a problem that the degree of attention to the special notification side is lowered. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to change the game result itself of the other game times by adopting a configuration in which each picture notified as the game result of the other game times is used to determine the success or failure of the special condition. In addition, even if the result is an outlier, the special condition can be established only by changing the production. By doing in this way, in the structure which performs a special alerting | reporting and a predetermined effect in parallel, it becomes possible to raise both attention levels with sufficient balance.

  Feature F7. Condition presenting means for presenting the special condition set by the condition setting means at a timing prior to the stop of the first picture of the plurality of pictures in the game replay operation (variation by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to Feature F6, which includes a function of executing a start process.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the success or failure of the special condition is determined based on the stop picture, the special condition is presented at a timing before the first picture in the game round is stopped. Therefore, the player does not know the success or failure of the special condition after the picture has stopped, but in a configuration where the change display decelerates and stops to some extent before the stop, etc. The success or failure of special conditions can be recognized at the timing. By doing in this way, interest can be paid to the change display of a pattern, and an attention degree can be raised suitably.

  Feature F8. The condition presenting means presents the special condition by presenting correspondence information (bingo card 300, lotto card 320) corresponding to the picture variably displayed in the game replay operation. The gaming machine according to Feature F7.

  According to the above configuration, since the variably displayed pattern is associated with the special condition, it is easy for the player to understand. This makes it possible for a player to more easily entertain a predetermined performance.

  Feature F9. In the game turning operation, the correspondence information corresponding to the stopped and displayed picture is compared with the first aspect from the first aspect (the square before establishment) that is the state before the stopped display. The game according to Feature F8, further comprising switching means (a function of executing the process of step S4204 by the effect control device 82) for switching to the second mode (established cell) that can be identified by the player. Machine.

  According to the said structure, the player can grasp | ascertain clearly the success or failure of special conditions. This makes it possible to more easily entertain a predetermined performance.

  Feature F10. The condition determining means is means for determining that the special condition is satisfied based on the fact that the correspondence information that has become the second aspect has a predetermined result (bingo establishment, lotto establishment). A gaming machine according to Feature F9, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the fact that the correspondence information is in the second mode and that this is a predetermined result. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that a special condition during a predetermined performance is established, and the player can fully enjoy the game.

  Feature F11. The gaming machine according to any one of features F8 to F10, wherein the condition presenting means presents a plurality of correspondence information.

  According to the above configuration, since a plurality of pieces of correspondence information are presented, the pattern corresponding to the single piece of correspondence information is not stopped in the middle of the variable display as compared with the configuration in which the single piece of correspondence information is presented. Even if it is predicted / understood, it can be assumed that the special condition is satisfied by the correspondence information corresponding to the other pattern, and the degree of attention to the predetermined effect can be maintained. .

Feature F12. The condition presenting means is a means for presenting a special condition including different correspondence information as the correspondence information (a function for executing the special effect A1 and the special effect B1 in the effect control device 82) and the special information including the same correspondence information. Means for presenting conditions (functions for executing special effects A2 and special effects B2 in the effect control device 82),
The gaming machine according to Feature F11, wherein the switching unit is configured to switch a plurality of pieces of correspondence information corresponding to the stop display of one picture to the second mode.

  According to the above configuration, in a situation where special conditions including the same correspondence information are presented, if the pattern corresponding to the correspondence information is stopped and displayed, the correspondence information is switched to the second mode. The degree of contribution to special conditions for stopping the pattern increases, and interest in stopping the pattern can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature F13. The features F8 to F12 are characterized in that the condition presenting means is capable of presenting special correspondence information (established cell “F”) corresponding to a plurality of the patterns as one piece of correspondence information. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, any pattern that corresponds to the special correspondence information can contribute to the establishment of the special condition regardless of which pattern is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the special condition is easily established, and the player can look forward to the subsequent development.

  Feature F14. The game according to any one of features F6 to F13, wherein the condition determining means determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the plurality of the pictures displayed to be stopped. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to entertain a game such as whether or not a special condition is satisfied by a plurality of patterns. For example, in a configuration in which each picture is stopped and displayed at different timings in one game round, if the success or failure of special conditions is determined based on a plurality of pictures as in the above configuration, each picture is stopped and displayed. It is possible to entertain the success or failure of the special conditions at the timing. In addition, if the configuration is such that the success or failure of the special condition is determined by a plurality of pictures stopped across the game times, even if the special condition is not satisfied in one game time, it may be satisfied in the next game time. As described above, it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation and to increase the degree of attention to the game more suitably.

Feature F15. Information of the picture stopped and displayed in the game times and picture memory means capable of storing the memory information over a plurality of times of the game (special hold at the time of stop by the effect control device 82) A function to execute a notice process)
The game machine according to Feature F14, wherein the condition determining means determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied by using the stored information stored in the picture storing means.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the success or failure of the special condition is determined based on a plurality of patterns, the success or failure of the special condition can be enjoyed over a plurality of game times, and the person is interested in the success or failure of the special condition. It is possible to prolong the period to be applied.

Feature F16. The game time control means, based on the determination result by the grant determination means being a result corresponding to giving the privilege, the display means so that a specific picture combination is stopped and displayed in the game time. Control
The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F15, wherein the special condition is more easily established when the specific picture combination is not stopped and displayed.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the display means in the hope that the specific picture combination is stopped and displayed in each game round, but the special condition is more likely to be established if the specific picture combination is not stopped and displayed. . For this reason, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention from being extremely reduced even when a specific pattern combination is not stopped and displayed while expecting a privilege.

  Note that a specific configuration for “the special condition is more likely to be satisfied when the specific picture combination is not stopped than the stop display” is, for example, “the special condition is stopped and displayed. On the premise of a configuration that is more likely to be established as the number of design types increases, “the specific design combination is a combination of fewer design types than a combination in the case of a result corresponding to not giving the privilege” The configuration is “conceivable”.

Feature F17. The game time control means, based on the determination result by the grant determination means being a result corresponding to giving the privilege, the display means so that a specific picture combination is stopped and displayed in the game time. Control
In the game turn operation by the game turn control means, the specific picture combination is provided as an effect suggesting that the specific picture combination is easily stopped and displayed in a stage before the specific picture combination is stopped and displayed. Stops some of the symbols that make up the combination (the symbols that form the reach line, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3, and the left and right symbol rows Y1, Y3), and other symbols that make up the particular symbol combination A specific effect (reach display) is set for variably displaying the graphic group including the middle symbol row Z2, Y2 to be variably displayed during reach.
In any one of the features F6 to F16, the condition determination means determines whether the special condition is successful based on the partial display of the part of the pattern and the other pattern being stopped and displayed. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, in a specific effect in which a part of a specific pattern combination is stopped and another pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the other part is displayed in a variable manner with the part of the stopped display. The success or failure of the special condition is determined based on the pattern. Therefore, for example, assuming that a part of the special condition is satisfied by the above-mentioned part of the pattern, in addition to the pleasure of whether or not the specific pattern combination is stopped in the enjoyment of viewing the other pattern during the variable display. However, the pleasure of whether or not a special condition is satisfied is also added. This makes it possible to display the variable display of the pattern from a more multifaceted viewpoint, unlike the conventional game of displaying whether or not the privilege is simply granted by displaying the pattern in a variable manner. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention.

  Feature F18. In the specific effect, the special condition is more when the pattern that does not form the specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed than when the pattern that forms the specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed as the other pattern. The gaming machine according to Feature F17, which is set to be easily established.

  According to the above configuration, in a specific effect, if a pattern that forms a specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed as another pattern, the player can obtain a privilege, and a pattern that does not form a specific pattern combination is stopped. If displayed, special conditions are met. In this way, even if it is a result of a player who is usually disappointed in a specific performance, giving the player some merit will greatly reduce interest in the performance. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature F19. The game time control means is a stop process for temporarily stopping the design in the middle of the variation display of the pattern as a stage before displaying the variation display of the design in correspondence with the determination result by the grant determination means. Stop means (function to execute the processing of step S4115 and step S4116 in the production control device 82),
The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F18, wherein the condition determining means determines whether the special condition is successful, including the picture stopped by the stopping means.

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the picture can be temporarily stopped before it is finally displayed as a stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination, whether or not the special condition is satisfied is determined including the temporarily stopped picture. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in changing / stopping the pattern of each game, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to success / failure of the special condition (predetermined effect). In other words, by reflecting a part of the production flow on the game turn side in the success or failure of the special conditions, it is possible to associate the two more closely and synergistically increase the degree of attention of both. .

  Feature F20. Second privilege granting means (effect control) that grants a second privilege (rare image or the like) different from the privilege given by the privilege granting means when the condition judgment means judges that the special condition has been established. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F19, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing a privilege granting process in the device 82).

  According to the above configuration, since the second privilege different from the privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination unit is granted based on the establishment of the special condition, the game time effect on the grant determination side by the grant determination unit and the predetermined effect execution It is possible to clearly indicate that the determinations are different from each other while associating the predetermined effects on the means side. As a result, it is possible to suitably enjoy the effects of the game times side and the predetermined effects.

Feature F21. Status grasping means for grasping the status of the game turning action by the game turn controlling means (function for executing the processing of step S4301, step S4302, and steps S4304 to S4305 by the effect control device 82);
Third privilege granting means (the process of step S4306 by the effect control device 82) that can vary the timing of granting the second privilege based on the state of the game replay operation grasped by the situation grasping means. The gaming machine according to Feature F20, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature F20, the timing at which the second privilege is given may vary depending on the situation of the game turn operation in the game turn. Here, the effect on the game turn side is for notifying the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means, and depending on the situation, there is a situation where priority should be given to the notification of the grant determination result over the success or failure of the special condition. obtain. Therefore, by making it possible to vary the grant timing according to the situation of the game turning operation as in the above configuration, in the configuration in which the effect for the game turning and the effect by the predetermined effect executing means coexist. It is possible to avoid inconvenience due to competition.

  Feature F22. The third privilege granting unit is configured to be able to grant the second privilege in a game time different from the game times determined to have satisfied the special condition by the condition determination unit. The gaming machine according to Feature F21.

  According to the above configuration, for example, when the special condition is satisfied at the final stage of the game round, or when the period until the second privilege is granted after the special condition is established is short, 2 Special conditions are established, for example, when the effect for game times should be given priority over the provision of benefits (for example, when the grant determination by the grant determination means is a result corresponding to granting a privilege). If the second privilege is given at a game time different from the game times, the above inconvenience can be avoided.

  Feature F23. Execution which sets that said predetermined production execution means performs said predetermined production based on said special information different from said predetermined special information which triggered the execution of said special information by said special information execution means It is provided with setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S4001 to S4003 by the effect control device 82), and executes the predetermined effect based on the setting by the execution setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F22.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not to execute the predetermined effect is set based on special information different from the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification. It is executed in the game times related to information. In other words, not only the special notification is performed but also a situation based on the special information related to the game times to be executed, for example, the situation where the predetermined effect should not be executed. The inconvenience of executing a predetermined effect can be avoided.

  Here, in the configuration in which the predetermined effect is performed based on the execution of the special notification, unlike the above configuration, whether or not the predetermined effect is also performed when setting whether or not to execute the special notification. It is also possible to consider a configuration for setting This configuration seems to be preferable from the viewpoint of simplifying the processing configuration. However, since the predetermined performance is a game time related to special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the execution of the special notification, the special notification only needs to be grasped for the special notification. Therefore, it is necessary to grasp the special information different from the predetermined performance. Therefore, when the special notification is executed, if it is configured to set whether or not to execute the predetermined presentation, it is necessary to grasp extra special information for the special notification, and the processing configuration for the conventional special notification is required. There is a concern that the processing load of the special notification itself may increase drastically. Therefore, as in this configuration, if the execution setting means is used to set whether or not to execute the predetermined effect, a new effect of executing the predetermined effect while avoiding the inconvenience of the processing on the special notification side. A configuration can be added.

  Feature F24. The predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing the predetermined effect even in the game times related to the special information acquired after the predetermined special information triggered by the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F23, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, a predetermined effect is started when triggered by the special notification, and even if the special information is acquired during the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect can be continued until the game times related to the special information. it can. Therefore, it is possible to change the content (execution period) of the predetermined effect by acquiring special information after the predetermined effect is started, and it is possible to actively participate in the game, and more immersion in the game. Can be made.

  Feature F25. The grant determination means performs the grant determination for one special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the grant determination for other special information acquired by the information acquisition means prior to the one special information. The game according to any one of features F1 to F24, further comprising destination determination means (a function of executing data setting processing by the main control device 81 in the seventh embodiment) performed prior to determination Machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the special information is acquired in a situation where the predetermined effect is being performed, the special information acquired before the special information about the special notification that has triggered the predetermined effect. Can be determined. Therefore, since the period until the result of the grant determination related to the special information regarding the special notification is notified may be longer, for a player who wants to know the result of the grant determination earlier, these periods are more redundant. You may feel it. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature F1 to the gaming machine having such a configuration, a predetermined number of game times for special information that is acquired later than the predetermined special information and is subject to grant determination earlier is determined. It is possible to produce an effect, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in a well-balanced manner while avoiding the above disadvantages.

  Feature F26. The predetermined effect execution means reflects information based on the ball entering the entrance part in the predetermined effect based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part after the start of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F25, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of being configured.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to cause the significance of entering the game ball into the entrance part after the start of the predetermined effect. Since the predetermined performance is executed in response to a special notification based on the specified result by the prior specifying means, when the player wants to know the result of the determination to give the special information about the special notification, the player newly plays a game ball. There is a possibility that the launch of the game ball may be stopped until the game times related to the special notification without entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the continuation of the launch of the game ball by generating the significance of entering the ball after the start of the predetermined performance as in the above configuration.

  Feature F27. The predetermined effect executing means reflects the information that the game ball has entered the ball entering part in the predetermined effect even when the predetermined number of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to Feature F26, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration that can be used.

  According to the above configuration, even when the predetermined number of special information has reached a predetermined number, the information is reflected on the predetermined performance side when the ball is entered into the pitching portion, so that so-called stoppage is suppressed. be able to. Here, as a configuration for prompting the continuation of the game ball, a configuration in which a predetermined number of upper limits are increased or an upper limit is eliminated is also conceivable. However, in such a configuration, for example, the time difference between the timing of entering the game ball and the execution timing of the game round becomes large, so that the game hall manager can play the game without entering the game ball. Inconveniences such as making it difficult to find fraudulent actions that cause the number of times (granting determination) to occur. Therefore, as described above, if a configuration in which a predetermined number of entries are reflected on a predetermined effect side rather than a game turn-side effect related to the grant determination directly linked to the player's profit, It is possible to fully enjoy the predetermined performance while avoiding such inconvenience. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

Feature F28. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
For the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a grant determining means (main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether to give a player a privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode). A function to execute the pass / fail determination process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player, the privilege granting unit (by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player A function for executing the game state transition process), and
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) starts a game turn operation, and the game times are notified as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The game operation is terminated once, and the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game operation is performed (the function of executing the game operation control process by the main controller 81). )When,
Destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information on the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of grant. Function to execute the confirmation process), and
The predetermined notification is performed at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information that is the specific target becomes the target of the grant determination, based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined result. A special notification executing means (a function for executing a hold control command corresponding process by the effect control device 82) for executing a special notification by means or a separate notification means;
Means (tenth, eleventh, eleventh, eleventh, eleventh, eleventh, eleventh, eleventh, eleventh, eleventh, eleventh- tenth) A gaming machine comprising a function for executing a hold control command response process in the embodiment.

  According to the said structure, special alerting | reporting may be performed before it becomes the object of grant determination about the predetermined | prescribed special information memorize | stored in the acquisition information storage means. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted for identification by the prior identification means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, thereby diversifying the game. It is done. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which such special notification is performed, the higher the degree of attention about the predetermined special information with the special notification being flashy, the higher the level of attention to the game times related to the special notification, There is a possibility that interest may be reduced, and when a special notification occurs, the player waits by stopping the launch of the game ball or the like until the game times related to the special notification are performed (stopping the game) There is a possibility. Therefore, in the special notification, if the configuration is such that the information on the entrance to the entrance portion generated later than that can be reflected in the special notification, the game ball continues to be fired even after the special notification is made. The meaning to make can arise. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
Grant determination means (main control) for sequentially determining whether to give the player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means A function of executing the determination processing by the device 81),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the first privilege to the player, the first privilege granting unit for granting the first privilege to the player (Function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) starts a game turn operation, and the game times are notified as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The game operation is terminated once, and the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game operation is performed (the function of executing the game operation control process by the main controller 81). )When,
With
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation in each game time. The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game turning operation is performed over the operation period set by the setting means;
A pre-operation period in which the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting unit is specified at a timing earlier than the game time to be set by the operation period setting unit is executed by the game time control unit. Specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82);
Second privilege granting means (production control device) capable of giving a player a second benefit different from the first privilege based on the result of the specification by the prior action period specifying means being a predetermined result. 82 to execute the special hold notice setting process by 82),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the said structure, the 2nd privilege different from a 1st privilege may be provided based on the operation | movement period of game times having a predetermined result. Therefore, it is possible to raise interest about the operation period. In this case, since the information on the operation period is specified prior to the execution of the game times, the second privilege can also be granted prior to the execution of the game times. By doing so, the player can compare the operation period of the game times with a configuration in which the final length can be grasped only at the end of the game times as a period during which the game turn operation is performed. It becomes possible to grasp this in advance, and since the second privilege is also given according to the length, it becomes possible to make the operation period more interested.

Feature G2. A plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is a short period and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode are set in the operation for game times. The game replay operation is performed in the set execution mode,
In the second privilege granting means, when the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means is the operation period that becomes the long-term aspect rather than the operation period that becomes the short-term aspect, 2. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to easily grant a privilege.

  According to the said structure, a privilege is easier to be provided when it is specified that it is a long operation period than when a short operation period is specified. By doing so, the player desires a long operation period, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of prolonged play by increasing the operation period.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Launching means for launching a game ball into the game area (game ball launching mechanism 53);
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entry unit (means for executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers (function to execute the process of step S205 by the main control device 81);
For the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, a grant determining means (main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether to give a player a privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode). A function to execute the pass / fail determination process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player, the privilege granting unit (by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player A function for executing the game state transition process), and
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination unit, the game notification operation is started by a predetermined notification unit, and the game rotation operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination of grant. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the game play operation is performed.
Destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information on the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of grant. Function to execute the confirmation process), and
Corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case where the predetermined special information that is the specific target is the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined result Special notification executing means (function for executing a hold control command corresponding process by the effect control device 82) for executing the special notification by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means;
Executable state setting means (special hold notice by the effect control device 82) that sets an executable state in which the specification by the destination specifying means can be executed based on the result of specification by the destination specifying means being a predetermined result. Function to execute the setting process),
With
The game machine characterized in that the executable state can be continued even after the predetermined special information that triggered the setting has been subject to the grant determination.

  According to the said structure, special alerting | reporting may be performed before it becomes the object of grant determination about the predetermined | prescribed special information memorize | stored in the acquisition information storage means. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted for identification by the prior identification means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, thereby diversifying the game. It is done. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. And after the predetermined special information that triggers the setting is set in the executable state in which the target specification by the target specification unit can be executed based on the specification result of the target specification unit, the determination is made Even so, its ready state can be carried over. That is, it is set to an executable state based on the identification result by the prior identification means, and the special notification based on other special information can be performed after digestion of the special information that triggered the setting. Therefore, diversification of special notification is achieved, and the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition set in advance is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notice means or a different notice means A second effect execution means capable of executing two effects (special hold notice) (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82);
Condition setting means (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition having a different establishment probability according to the length of the period during which the second effect is performed;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function for executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, if a special condition having a different establishment probability is set according to the length of the period during which the second effect is performed, and determination means for determining success or failure of the special condition is provided, the grant determination side Even if it is possible to have a scale different from the simple scale such as the length of the first performance and the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first performance on the grant determination side, the special condition is It can be expected that it will be established easily, and it will be possible to maintain a good balance of attention to the game.

  Feature I2. The determination means includes means for determining success or failure of the special condition (function of executing a hold display process by the effect control device 82) regardless of the result of the determination by the determination unit at the time of determination. The gaming machine according to Feature I1, characterized by the above.

  According to the above configuration, the relevance between the success or failure of the special condition in the second effect and the first effect in which the result of the grant determination is reflected can be reduced. In this way, it is possible to purely entertain whether or not the special condition is satisfied in the second effect. For example, an effect in which the first privilege is not easily provided in the first effect on the grant determination side is performed. Even if it is, since the success or failure of the special condition is determined regardless of it, it is possible to suppress the degree of attention from being extremely reduced.

The above configuration is, for example,
"The determination means includes means for performing the determination regardless of conditions other than the special condition at the time of determination",
“The special condition is a probability that is different based on the passage of a predetermined period in the second performance,
The determination means includes means for determining the elapse of the predetermined period regardless of the result of the grant determination.
In other words.

  Feature I3. Based on the determination that the special condition is satisfied by the determination means, second privilege granting means for giving the player a second privilege different from the first privilege (processing for holding display by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, further comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to raise a high interest in whether or not the special condition is satisfied, that is, the determination result of the determination unit. In particular, by making the second privilege different from the first privilege, it is possible to realize a game different from the conventional game such as simply obtaining the first privilege by establishing the acquisition condition. Can be achieved.

  Further, if this configuration is applied to the feature I2, it is possible to enhance the impression that is a separate determination.

  Feature I4. In any one of the characteristics I1 to I3, the condition setting means sets the special condition so that the special condition is more easily established as the period during which the second effect is performed is longer. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the longer the period during which the second effect is performed, the more easily the special condition is established. By doing so, the player expects the second performance to be performed for a long time.

  As described in the feature I1, the effect on the assignment determination side does not increase the degree of attention as it is longer, and has the possibility of making it feel redundant. Therefore, with this configuration, even if there is a possibility that the first presentation on the determination side is redundant, it is expected that a special condition will be established on the second presentation side. And maintain a good balance of attention to the game.

  Feature I5. The condition setting means includes means for setting the special condition in accordance with the length of the first effect set by the first effect setting means (function for executing the process of step S1501 in the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the length of the first effect on the determination side with the ease of establishment of the special condition on the second effect side. By doing so, even if inconvenience occurs due to the length of the first performance based on the determination of grant, the second effect side absorbs the inconvenience and the degree of attention to the game is extreme. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  If this configuration is applied to the feature I2, it is related to the first effect on the grant determination side when the special condition is set, and the determination is performed regardless of the result of the grant determination when the special condition is determined. By doing in this way, it can be set as the novel game that the result of determination can be changed by the change of the game situation from the setting of special conditions to determination. The change in the gaming situation may be, for example, a change in the number of stored determination information, in a configuration capable of storing a plurality of determination information.

  Feature I6. Feature I1 is provided with condition notifying means (function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notifying means or different notifying means. Thru | or the game machine of any one of I5.

  According to the above configuration, the player can be made aware of the special conditions. Thereby, it can fully be enjoyed that the establishment probability of the special condition differs according to the period during which the second performance is performed.

  Feature I7. The condition notifying means includes a prior notifying means (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition at a timing earlier than the determination by the determining means. The gaming machine according to Feature I6, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special condition at a timing earlier than the determination of success or failure. Since the special conditions have different probability of establishment depending on the length of the period during which the second performance is performed, if the special conditions are grasped at the earliest possible timing, it will be fun to see if the special conditions are met. I can do it.

  Feature I8. The destination notification means includes means for performing notification of the special condition based on the start of the second effect (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to Feature I7.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified based on the start of the second effect, it is possible to entertain the success or failure for the period related to the success or failure of the special condition.

  Feature I9. The destination notifying means includes means for executing notification of the special condition (function of executing special hold notice control processing by the effect control device 82) while the second effect is being performed. The gaming machine according to Feature I7 or Feature I8.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified while the second effect is being performed, the player can be made aware that the probability of establishment of the special condition is different. Thereby, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain clearly the relationship between the period when a 2nd effect is performed, and the establishment probability of special conditions.

  Feature I10. The condition notifying means includes post-notification means (function of executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition at a timing after the determination by the determining means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I9, characterized by:

  According to the said structure, it can grasp | ascertain even after the determination by a determination means about special conditions. That is, the success or failure of the special condition can be grasped even after the determination timing. By doing in this way, it is possible to leave interest about whether or not the special condition is satisfied as a remnant even after the timing of giving it, and to prevent the degree of attention from being extremely lowered after the determination. it can.

  Feature I11. The gaming machine according to claim I10, wherein the post-notification means performs notification regarding the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination by the determination means as notification of the special condition.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification regarding the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success / failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not satisfied, it is possible to grasp how long the special condition is satisfied later, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not satisfied. .

Feature I12. Acquisition information storage means for storing the predetermined information, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as an upper limit (the function for executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). With
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on the grant determination information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
A destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying the predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination. Function to execute the confirmation process)
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, wherein the condition setting means sets the special condition based on a specification result by the destination specifying means.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit. Therefore, a game of predicting predetermined grant determination information from the special conditions is added, and the game can be diversified. That is, by associating the special condition with the information for grant determination that triggers the grant determination by the grant determination means, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

Feature I13. The first effect execution means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination As a notification result corresponding to, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn control means (the game control process by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The condition setting means includes first setting means (a function for executing timer input processing at the time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on the specifying result of the preceding operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature I12, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the information on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relevance between the special condition and the operation period in game play can be further increased, and the establishment probability of whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be associated with the length of the operation period. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

  Feature I14. The condition setting means includes second setting means (a function for executing timer input processing at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specification result by the previous operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature I13, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period cannot be specified first by the previous operation period specifying unit, for example, even when the operation period is determined only at the start of the game round, the special condition is set by the second setting unit. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Feature I15. In the gaming state, a special state in which the operation period can be specified by the previous operation period specifying means is set for any grant determination information,
The gaming machine according to Feature I13 or Feature I14, wherein the special condition is set during the special state.

  According to the above configuration, during the special state, the information on the operation period can be specified in advance even if any information for determination of grant is stored in the acquired information storage means. If set, there is no inconvenience that information on the operation period cannot be specified. Thereby, it becomes possible to implement | achieve suitably the 2nd production using special conditions.

Feature I16. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) when the granting determination by the granting determination unit is performed, The second operation period (holding number non-correspondence pattern) that is not so, is included,
The previous operation period specifying means includes means for specifying an operation period for the information for determination of addition to be the second operation period (a function for performing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features I13 to I15, wherein:

  In a configuration in which a plurality of grant determination information is stored and the grant determination for the grant determination information is sequentially performed, the game situation at the time of acquisition of the grant determination information may be different from the game situation at the grant determination. Even if the operation period is specified at a timing earlier than the determination target, the operation period at the time of specification by the previous operation period specifying means may be different from the operation period at the time of the application determination. Therefore, in the above configuration, the operation based on the difference in the game situation is performed because the second action period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the determination of grant, not the first action period in which such a game situation is reflected. It is possible to avoid inconvenience related to the prior specification of the period. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using the operation period.

  Note that if this configuration is applied to the feature I13, “the first setting means is based on the operation period specified by the means for specifying the operation period for the information for determination of application that is the second operation period, It is preferable that the special condition is set.

  Feature I17. The prior operation period specifying means, when the operation period for the provision determination information that is the identification target is the first operation period, sets the provisional operation period as an operation for the provision determination information. The gaming machine according to Feature I16, comprising provisional specifying means for specifying a period (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment).

  Even if the operation period can be different based on the difference in the gaming situation as in the above configuration, if it is specified as a provisional operation period, it is possible to produce an effect based on the success or failure of the special condition. In other words, even if the operation period cannot be specified in advance, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the effect by leaving room for the effect.

  If the present configuration is applied to the feature I14, the second setting unit may set the special condition based on the temporary operation period specified by the temporary specifying unit.

Feature I18. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second performance is performed becomes longer,
The provisional specifying unit is characterized in that, among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting unit, a period that is equal to or shorter than the shortest period is specified as the provisional operation period. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or shorter than the shortest period that can be changed thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is set to be higher than the highest probability of establishment. Here, if the probability of establishment of the special condition is extremely low, the player gets used to the fact that the special condition is not established in another production different from the second production in the first place, and the interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is sex. Therefore, by making the special condition easy to be satisfied as in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to provisional specification.

Feature I19. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second performance is performed becomes longer,
The temporary specifying means specifies a period that is longer than the longest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the temporary operation period,
Means (in the fourth embodiment) for correcting the special condition at a timing later than the timing when the provisional identification means is specified and before the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to Feature I17 or Feature I18, further comprising a function of executing subtraction processing during shift by the production control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or longer than the longest period that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is set to be equal to or less than the lowest establishment probability. Therefore, in the above-described configuration, the special condition is corrected thereafter, so that a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the establishment probability due to provisional specification can be avoided.

  The “correction” may be, for example, a configuration of “shortening / extending the period during which the second effect is performed”, and more specifically, regarding the period during which the second effect is performed, A configuration is conceivable in which the difference between the operation period and the operation period set by the operation period setting means is shortened / extended.

Feature I20. Acquisition information storage means for storing the predetermined information, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as an upper limit (the function for executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). With
The grant determination means sequentially performs grant determination as to whether or not to grant the first privilege to a player based on the grant determination information stored in the acquisition information storage means.
For the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination target at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information becomes the grant determination target by the grant determination means. Provided with a destination specifying means (a function for executing a holding confirmation process by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of
The first effect setting means is a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the specification result by the destination specifying means, wherein the predetermined application determination information is subject to the application determination by the application determination means. To set an effect (holding notice) to be performed at a timing earlier than
The first effect executing means is configured to make the predetermined grant determination information that is the specific target the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined result. A special notice (holding notice) corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of the predetermined notice at a timing earlier than the result of the grant judgment for the predetermined special information or separate from the predetermined notice means. Which is executed by the notification means,
The second effect executing means, based on the fact that the contents of the special notification executed by the first effect executing means are predetermined contents (for example, contents corresponding to the fourth hold image P4). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I19, wherein the effect is executed by the predetermined notification means or a separate notification means.

  According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification is given to the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means before it is subject to grant determination. As a result, it is possible to play a game in which the predetermined grant determination information that has been identified by the first identifying means is predicted before the result of the grant determination of the predetermined grant determination information is notified. As a result, diversification of games is achieved. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. When performing such special notification, if it is a special notification that makes it easy for the player to be given the first privilege, the degree of attention to the special notification is increased, while the production of the other information for determination of grant is performed. May reduce the degree of attention. Moreover, if it is a special alert | report which makes it difficult to give a 1st privilege, not only the special alert | report but the attention degree to the subsequent production may fall extremely. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined content is set as the special notification, the degree of attention may be reduced by performing the special notification if the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification unit or a different notification unit. In the situation, it is possible to pay attention to the second performance side, and it is possible to suitably avoid a reduction in the degree of attention.

Feature I21. The first effect execution means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination As a notification result corresponding to, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn control means (the game control process by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The gaming machine according to Feature I20, wherein the condition setting means sets the special condition based on a specification result obtained by the preceding action period specifying means.

  According to the said structure, in the 2nd production performed based on the content of the special alert | report being the predetermined content, the special condition is set based on the information of an operation period. Thereby, the special alerting | reporting performed based on the information for predetermined | prescribed provision determination, and the information of an operation period can be linked | related.

  In this case, the notification regarding the predetermined grant determination information is performed for the special notification, and the special condition in the second effect executed based on the special notification is based on an operation period other than the predetermined grant determination information. May be set, or may be set based on an operation period of predetermined grant determination information. In the former case, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to the other information for determination of assignment by the second effect while increasing the degree of attention with respect to the predetermined information for determination of provision with special notification. In the latter case, the special notification and the second effect can be more closely associated. For example, when the special notification is performed to suggest that the first privilege is difficult to be given, the special effect is used in the second effect. It is possible to diversify the production by, for example, a configuration in which the production is easy to satisfy the condition.

  Feature I22. In the special notification that triggered the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution unit, the condition setting unit is configured to determine the grant determination before the predetermined grant determination information that is a target of the special notification. The gaming machine according to I21, characterized in that the special condition is set based on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means for the grant determination information to be targeted.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is set based on the operation period of the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the target of the special alert, It is possible to increase the interest in the operation period of the game times for the information for grant determination that is the target of the grant determination before the information for grant determination, and to the effect for other game times by performing a special notification It becomes possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of attention.

Feature I23. The first effect execution means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination As a notification result corresponding to, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn control means (the game control process by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
The game turn operation by the game turn control means includes the first action (reach occurrence) and the first action before the first action at a timing prior to notifying the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means. The branch timing for branching to the second action (reach non-occurrence) where the grant probability of one privilege is low is set (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the lower symbol sequence Z3),
The determination means determines whether or not the special condition is successful at the branch timing in the game rotation operation for the grant determination information for which the grant determination is performed in a situation where the second effect is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I22, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the success or failure of the special condition is determined at the branch timing between the first operation and the second operation. Further, at this branch timing, the probability that the first privilege is granted is increased if the gaming operation is branched to the first operation, while the grant probability is lowered if the game is branched to the second operation. In this case, it may be possible to further add a branch effect associated with the level of the grant probability for the first benefit, but if the effect is too complicated, there is a concern that the player's understanding will be reduced. It is possible that interest will fade. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the special condition different from the first privilege is determined at this branch timing, it is possible to suitably execute a plurality of branch effects related to the privilege grant while suppressing the complexity of the game.

  Feature I24. Special setting means capable of making the elapsed speed of the period corresponding to the special condition set by the condition setting means different from the elapsed speed so far or making the remaining period of the period different from the remaining period so far. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I23, wherein the gaming machine includes a function of executing a subtraction value adjustment process by the effect control device 82.

  According to the above configuration, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes as the elapsed speed or the remaining period of the period corresponding to the special condition changes. Thus, for example, even if the special condition is not likely to be satisfied, the special condition can be satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period, and for example, the special condition is likely to be satisfied. Even so, it is possible to prevent the special condition from being satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period. That is, the success / failure process of the special condition can be varied, and the degree of attention to the second effect can be suitably increased.

Feature I25. The first effect execution means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination As a notification result corresponding to, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn control means (the game control process by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The gaming machine according to claim I24, wherein the special setting unit is configured to change the special setting unit according to the operation period set by the operation period setting unit.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to further increase the relevance of the establishment probability of the special condition with the operation period, and it is possible to suitably avoid inconveniences based on the length of the operation period of game times.

Feature I26. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment increases as the period during which the second performance is performed elapses,
The gaming machine according to Feature I25, wherein the special setting means is configured to increase the elapsed speed to be varied or shorten the remaining period to be varied as the operation period is shorter.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period during which the predetermined set period elapses is also shortened, so that the probability of establishment of the special condition can be lowered. Therefore, in such a case, by changing the speed so that the elapsed speed is increased or the remaining period is shortened, it is possible to prevent the interest from diminishing by predicting that the special condition is not satisfied due to the short operation period. Is possible.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition set in advance is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notice means or a different notice means A second effect execution means capable of executing two effects (special hold notice) (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82);
Condition setting means (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition having a different establishment probability according to the length of the period during which the first effect is performed;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function for executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, if a special condition having a different establishment probability is set according to the length of the period during which the first effect is performed, and a determination unit that determines whether the special condition is successful is provided, the first effect is provided. It is possible to make a determination different from the grant determination for which the first effect is set, and the special condition is satisfied even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first effect. It can be expected that it will be easy, and it will be possible to maintain a good balance of attention to the game.

"The first effect executing means starts the game replay operation by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means based on the determination of the giving by the giving determining means, As a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, the game turn operation is terminated once as the game turn operation, and the game turn control means (game control by the main controller 81) is performed so that the game turn operation is performed. Function to execute processing)
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. If this feature is applied to a gaming machine, the game replay operation should be performed over a period of operation
“According to the length of the period during which the first performance is performed”
In other words, “based on the length of the operation period set by the operation period setting means”.

Feature J2. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition set in advance is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notice means or a different notice means A second effect execution means capable of executing two effects (special hold notice) (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82);
Condition setting means (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for setting special conditions having different establishment probabilities depending on the relationship between the first effect and the second effect;
Determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function for executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. In the case of the player, while the degree of attention is increased by the contents of the first effect, for the player who knows the result of the grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, presence / absence or strength of the notice effect), the first effect is used. It may feel redundant.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, if a special condition having a different establishment probability is set depending on the relationship between the first effect and the second effect, and determination means for determining success or failure of the special condition is provided, a simple determination on the grant determination side. The production can be enjoyed from a viewpoint different from the first production, and even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first production on the grant determination side, the special condition is easily established. Then, it can be expected, and it becomes possible to keep the degree of attention to the game in a balanced manner.

  “The probability of establishment differs depending on the relationship between the first effect and the second effect” means “the probability of establishment differs according to the length of each period of the first effect and the second effect” In other words, inconvenience due to the period during which the first effect is performed (inconvenience due to being too long or inconvenience due to being too short) can be eliminated in relation to the second effect.

Feature J3. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition set in advance is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notice means or a different notice means A second effect execution means capable of executing two effects (special hold notice) (a function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82);
Second effect setting means for setting the type of the second effect in accordance with the first effect set by the effect setting means (function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. In the case of the player, while the degree of attention is increased by the contents of the first effect, for the player who knows the result of the grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, presence / absence or strength of the notice effect), the first effect is used. It may feel redundant.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, by setting the type of the second effect according to the first effect, the effect can be enjoyed from a viewpoint different from the simple first effect on the determination side, and provisional Even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first production on the judgment side, an effect that complements the inconvenience can be performed in the second production, and the degree of attention to the game is maintained in a well-balanced manner. It becomes possible.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Second effect execution means (special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means. Function to execute)
First condition setting means for setting a special condition whose probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed without taking into account that the special condition is satisfied (at the time of the normal pattern by the effect control device 82) Timer input processing)
Determination means (function for executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied after the special condition is set by the first condition setting means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, a special condition that can vary in the probability of establishment depending on the length of the period during which the second performance is performed is set without considering that the special condition is established, and after the setting, the special condition is set. If the determination means for determining the success or failure of the application is provided, a scale different from the scale of the simple first performance on the determination side can be provided. Even if such inconvenience may occur, it can be expected that the special condition will be easily established.

  In particular, the special condition set by the first condition setting means is set without taking into account that the special condition is satisfied, so that the result can be understood from other information on the way like a so-called race. The event can be avoided. Therefore, it becomes possible to keep the degree of attention to the game in a balanced manner. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be rephrased as “in relation to the length of the period” or “depending on the length of the period”. Further, “without considering that the special condition is satisfied” can be rephrased as “without considering whether or not the special condition is satisfied”.

  Feature K2. 2nd condition setting means (function which performs timer input processing at the time specific pattern by the production control device 82) for setting the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied is provided. The gaming machine according to feature K1.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be managed to some extent on the gaming machine side, for example, depending on the gaming situation. Specifically, if the special condition is to be established for production or the special condition should not be established, if the special condition is set based on that, the special condition A sense of incongruity in the production based on success or failure can be eliminated, and in this way, the production as designed can be suitably executed.

  In particular, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine of feature K1, the special condition by the first condition setting means is set without considering whether it is satisfied, and the special condition by the second condition setting means is It is set based on whether or not it is established. For this reason, whether or not the special condition is satisfied is not known in the middle like a so-called race, and the special condition is satisfied regardless of the situation where the special condition should be satisfied according to the gaming state. The inconvenience of not performing can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature K3. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Second effect execution means (special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means. Function to execute)
First condition setting means for setting a special condition whose probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed without taking into account that the special condition is satisfied (at the time of the normal pattern by the effect control device 82) Timer input processing)
Determination means (function for executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied after the special condition is set by the first condition setting means;
A second condition setting means for setting the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function for executing a timer input process at the time specific pattern by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, a special condition that can vary in the probability of establishment depending on the length of the period during which the second performance is performed is set without considering that the special condition is established, and after the setting, the special condition is set. If the determination means for determining the success or failure of the application is provided, a scale different from the scale of the simple first performance on the determination side can be provided. Even if such inconvenience may occur, it can be expected that the special condition will be easily established.

  In particular, the special condition by the first condition setting means is set without considering whether or not it is satisfied, and the special condition by the second condition setting means is set based on whether or not it is satisfied. For this reason, whether or not the special condition is satisfied is not known in the middle like a so-called race, and the special condition is satisfied regardless of the situation where the special condition should be satisfied according to the gaming state. The inconvenience of not performing can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be rephrased as “in relation to the length of the period” or “depending on the length of the period”. Further, “without considering that the special condition is satisfied” can be rephrased as “without considering whether or not the special condition is satisfied”.

  Feature K4. The second condition setting means grasps the grant determination information or special information set based on the grant determination information (for example, information such as the number of stored memories N, the determination result, the variation display time, etc.) A feature K2 or a feature characterized in that the special condition is set based on the information grasped by the grasping means. A gaming machine according to K3.

  According to the said structure, a 2nd condition setting means sets a special condition based on the information (Special information set based on the information for grant determination or the information for grant determination) by the 1st production side. Therefore, it becomes possible to relate the second effect to the first effect, and it is possible to make the first effect side interested while making the second effect more interesting, and to increase the degree of attention to the game more suitably. It becomes possible.

  Feature K5. The second condition setting means includes means for setting the special condition so that the special condition is satisfied (function to execute timer input processing at the time specific pattern by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to feature K4.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition may be set so that the special condition in the second effect is established based on the information on the first effect side, for example, the degree of attention is lowered only on the first effect side. If the special condition in the second effect is established in such a situation, the second effect side compensates for the decrease in the attention level on the first effect side. In this way, the degree of attention can be increased in a balanced manner using the first effect and the second effect.

  Feature K6. The determination means includes means for determining success or failure of the special condition (function of executing a hold display process by the effect control device 82) regardless of the result of the determination by the determination unit at the time of determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the relevance between the success or failure of the special condition in the second effect and the first effect in which the result of the grant determination is reflected can be reduced. In this way, it is possible to purely entertain whether or not the special condition is satisfied in the second effect. For example, an effect in which the first privilege is not easily provided in the first effect on the grant determination side is performed. Even if it is, since the success or failure of the special condition is determined regardless of it, it is possible to suppress the degree of attention from being extremely reduced.

The above configuration is, for example,
"The determination means includes means for performing the determination regardless of conditions other than the special condition at the time of determination",
“The special condition is a probability that is different based on the passage of a predetermined period in the second performance,
The determination means includes means for determining the elapse of the predetermined period regardless of the result of the grant determination.
In other words.

  Feature K7. Based on the determination that the special condition is satisfied by the determination means, second privilege granting means for giving the player a second privilege different from the first privilege (processing for holding display by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K6, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to raise a high interest in whether or not the special condition is satisfied, that is, the determination result of the determination unit. In particular, by making the second privilege different from the first privilege, it is possible to realize a game different from the conventional game such as simply obtaining the first privilege by establishing the acquisition condition. Can be achieved.

  Moreover, if this configuration is applied to the feature K7, it is possible to enhance the impression that is a separate determination.

  Feature K8. In any one of the characteristics K1 to K7, the condition setting unit sets the special condition so that the special condition is more easily established as the period during which the second effect is performed is longer. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the longer the period during which the second effect is performed, the more easily the special condition is established. By doing so, the player expects the second performance to be performed for a long time.

  As described in the feature K1, the effect on the assignment determination side does not increase the degree of attention as it is longer, and has the possibility of making it feel redundant. Therefore, with this configuration, even if there is a possibility that the first presentation on the determination side is redundant, it is expected that a special condition will be established on the second presentation side. And maintain a good balance of attention to the game.

  Note that the condition setting means in this configuration can be applied to both the first condition setting means and the second condition setting means, or the above-described effects can be obtained even if only one of them is applied.

Feature K9. The first effect executing means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notifying means based on the grant determination by the grant determining means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the game time operation to be performed once to end the game time operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The second condition setting means includes means for setting the special condition based on the length of the operation period set by the operation period setting means (function for executing the process of step S1501 in the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K8, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a game turn operation in a game time is performed as the first effect, the length of the operation period of the game time can be associated with the ease of establishment of the special condition on the second effect side. It becomes possible. By doing so, even if inconvenience occurs due to the length of the operation period in the game round performed based on the grant determination, the inconvenience is absorbed on the second effect side, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It is possible to suppress an extreme decrease.

  Feature K10. A condition notifying means (function for executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notifying means or a different notifying means is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of thru K9.

  According to the above configuration, the player can be made aware of the special conditions. Thereby, it can fully be enjoyed that the establishment probability of the special condition differs according to the period during which the second performance is performed.

  Feature K11. The condition notification means is a destination notification means for performing notification of the special condition at a timing closer to the start of the second effect than the end of the second effect (function to execute a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82). ). The gaming machine according to Feature K10, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special condition at a relatively early timing. Since the special conditions have different probability of establishment depending on the length of the period during which the second performance is performed, if the special conditions are grasped at the earliest possible timing, it will be fun to see if the special conditions are met. I can do it.

  Feature K12. The destination notification means includes means for performing notification of the special condition based on the start of the second effect (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82). A gaming machine according to Feature K11.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified based on the start of the second effect, it is possible to entertain the success or failure for the period related to the success or failure of the special condition.

  Feature K13. The destination notifying means includes means for executing notification of the special condition (function of executing special hold notice control processing by the effect control device 82) while the second effect is being performed. The gaming machine according to feature K11 or feature K12.

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is notified while the second effect is being performed, the player can be made aware that the probability of establishment of the special condition is different. Thereby, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain clearly the relationship between the period when a 2nd effect is performed, and the establishment probability of special conditions.

  Feature K14. The condition notifying means includes post-notification means (function for executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition at a timing later than the end of the second effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K13.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the special conditions even after the end of the second effect. By doing in this way, it is possible to leave interest about whether or not the special condition is satisfied as a remnant even after the provision timing, and the degree of attention will be extremely lowered after the end of the second effect. Can be suppressed.

  Feature K15. The game machine according to claim K14, wherein the post-notification unit performs notification regarding the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination by the determination unit as notification of the special condition.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification regarding the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success / failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not satisfied, it is possible to grasp how long the special condition is satisfied later, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not satisfied. .

Feature K16. Acquisition information storage means for storing the predetermined information, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as an upper limit (the function for executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). With
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on the grant determination information stored in the acquisition information storage means,
A destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying the predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination. Function to execute the confirmation process)
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K15, wherein the second condition setting means sets the special condition based on a specification result by the destination specifying means.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage unit. Therefore, a game of predicting predetermined grant determination information from the special conditions is added, and the game can be diversified. That is, by associating the special condition with the information for grant determination that triggers the grant determination by the grant determination means, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

Feature K17. The first effect executing means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notifying means based on the grant determination by the grant determining means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the game time operation to be performed once to end the game time operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The second condition setting means is a first setting means for setting the special condition based on the specification result of the previous operation period specifying means (function for executing timer input processing at the time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to Feature K16, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the special condition is set based on the information on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relevance between the special condition and the operation period in game play can be further increased, and the establishment probability of whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be associated with the length of the operation period. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

  Feature K18. The second condition setting means includes a second setting means (function for executing timer input processing at the normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specification result by the previous operation period specifying means. A gaming machine according to Feature K17, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period cannot be specified first by the previous operation period specifying unit, for example, even when the operation period is determined only at the start of the game round, the special condition is set by the second setting unit. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Feature K19. In the gaming state, a special state in which the operation period can be specified by the previous operation period specifying means is set for any grant determination information,
The gaming machine according to Feature K17 or Feature K18, wherein the special condition is set during the special state.

  According to the above configuration, during the special state, the information on the operation period can be specified in advance even if any information for determination of grant is stored in the acquired information storage means. If set, there is no inconvenience that information on the operation period cannot be specified. Thereby, it becomes possible to implement | achieve suitably the 2nd production using special conditions.

Feature K20. In the operation period set by the operation period setting means, a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a gaming situation (for example, the number of holdings) when the granting determination by the granting determination unit is performed, The second operation period (holding number non-correspondence pattern) that is not so, is included,
The previous operation period specifying means includes means for specifying an operation period for the information for determination of addition to be the second operation period (a function for performing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features K17 to K19.

  In a configuration in which a plurality of grant determination information is stored and the grant determination for the grant determination information is sequentially performed, the game situation at the time of acquisition of the grant determination information may be different from the game situation at the grant determination. Even if the operation period is specified at a timing earlier than the determination target, the operation period at the time of specification by the previous operation period specifying means may be different from the operation period at the time of the application determination. Therefore, in the above configuration, the operation based on the difference in the game situation is performed because the second action period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the determination of grant, not the first action period in which such a game situation is reflected. It is possible to avoid inconvenience related to the prior specification of the period. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using the operation period.

  Note that if this configuration is applied to the feature K17, “the first setting means is based on the operation period specified by the means for specifying the operation period with respect to the provision determination information that is the second operation period, It is preferable that the special condition is set.

  Feature K21. The prior operation period specifying means, when the operation period for the provision determination information that is the identification target is the first operation period, sets the provisional operation period as an operation for the provision determination information. The gaming machine according to feature K20, comprising provisional specifying means for specifying a period (a function for executing special hold notice setting processing by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment).

  Even if the operation period can be different based on the difference in the gaming situation as in the above configuration, if it is specified as a provisional operation period, it is possible to produce an effect based on the success or failure of the special condition. In other words, even if the operation period cannot be specified in advance, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the effect by leaving room for the effect.

  If the present configuration is applied to the feature K18, it is preferable that the second setting unit sets the special condition based on the temporary operation period specified by the temporary specifying unit.

Feature K22. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second performance is performed becomes longer,
The temporary specifying means specifies a period that is not more than the shortest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the temporary operation period. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or shorter than the shortest period that can be changed thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is set to be higher than the highest probability of establishment. Here, if the probability of establishment of the special condition is extremely low, the player gets used to the fact that the special condition is not established in another production different from the second production in the first place, and the interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is sex. Therefore, by making the special condition easy to be satisfied as in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to provisional specification.

Feature K23. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment becomes higher as the period during which the second performance is performed becomes longer,
The temporary specifying means specifies a period that is longer than the longest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the temporary operation period,
Means (in the fourth embodiment) for correcting the special condition at a timing later than the timing when the provisional identification means is specified and before the determination by the determination means. The game machine according to Feature K21 or Feature K22, further including a function of performing subtraction processing during shifting by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period to be temporarily specified can be patterned in advance, the processing configuration related to temporary specification can be simplified. In addition, since the provisional specific period is equal to or longer than the longest period that can change thereafter, the establishment probability of the special condition is set to be equal to or less than the lowest establishment probability. Therefore, in the above-described configuration, the special condition is corrected thereafter, so that a reduction in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the establishment probability due to provisional specification can be avoided.

  The “correction” may be, for example, a configuration of “shortening / extending the period during which the second effect is performed”, and more specifically, regarding the period during which the second effect is performed, A configuration is conceivable in which the difference between the operation period and the operation period set by the operation period setting means is shortened / extended.

Feature K24. Acquisition information storage means for storing the predetermined information, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as an upper limit (the function for executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). With
The grant determination means sequentially performs grant determination as to whether or not to grant the first privilege to a player based on the grant determination information stored in the acquisition information storage means.
For the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination target at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information becomes the grant determination target by the grant determination means. Provided with a destination specifying means (a function for executing a holding confirmation process by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of
The first effect setting means is a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the specification result by the destination specifying means, wherein the predetermined application determination information is subject to the application determination by the application determination means. To set an effect (holding notice) to be performed at a timing earlier than
The first effect executing means is configured to make the predetermined grant determination information that is the specific target the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined result. A special notice (holding notice) corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of the predetermined notice at a timing earlier than the result of the grant judgment for the predetermined special information or separate from the predetermined notice means. Which is executed by the notification means,
The second effect executing means, based on the fact that the contents of the special notification executed by the first effect executing means are predetermined contents (for example, contents corresponding to the fourth hold image P4). The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics K1 to K23, wherein the effect is executed by the predetermined notifying unit or a different notifying unit.

  According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification is given to the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means before it is subject to grant determination. As a result, it is possible to play a game in which the predetermined grant determination information that has been identified by the first identifying means is predicted before the result of the grant determination of the predetermined grant determination information is notified. As a result, diversification of games is achieved. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased. When performing such special notification, if it is a special notification that makes it easy for the player to be given the first privilege, the degree of attention to the special notification is increased, while the production of the other information for determination of grant is performed. May reduce the degree of attention. Moreover, if it is a special alert | report which makes it difficult to give a 1st privilege, not only the special alert | report but the attention degree to the subsequent production may fall extremely. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined content is set as the special notification, the degree of attention may be reduced by performing the special notification if the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification unit or a different notification unit. In the situation, it is possible to pay attention to the second performance side, and it is possible to suitably avoid a reduction in the degree of attention.

Feature K25. The first effect executing means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notifying means based on the grant determination by the grant determining means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the game time operation to be performed once to end the game time operation,
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The destination specifying means uses the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means as a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game time control means. A pre-operation period specifying means (function for executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82),
The game machine according to claim K24, wherein the second condition setting means sets the special condition based on a specification result by the previous operation period specifying means.

  According to the said structure, in the 2nd production performed based on the content of the special alert | report being the predetermined content, the special condition is set based on the information of an operation period. Thereby, the special alerting | reporting performed based on the information for predetermined | prescribed provision determination, and the information of an operation period can be linked | related.

  In this case, the notification regarding the predetermined grant determination information is performed for the special notification, and the special condition in the second effect executed based on the special notification is based on an operation period other than the predetermined grant determination information. May be set, or may be set based on an operation period of predetermined grant determination information. In the former case, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to the other information for determination of assignment by the second effect while increasing the degree of attention with respect to the predetermined information for determination of provision with special notification. In the latter case, the special notification and the second effect can be more closely associated. For example, when the special notification is performed to suggest that the first privilege is difficult to be given, the special effect is used in the second effect. It is possible to diversify the production by, for example, a configuration in which the production is easy to satisfy the condition.

  Feature K26. The second condition setting means, in the special notification that triggered the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means, before the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification. The gaming machine according to Feature K25, wherein the special condition is set based on the operation period specified by the previous operation period specifying means for the information for determination of grant that is a target of grant determination. .

  According to the above configuration, since the special condition is set based on the operation period of the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the target of the special alert, It is possible to increase the interest in the operation period of the game times for the information for grant determination that is the target of the grant determination before the information for grant determination, and to the effect for other game times by performing a special notification It becomes possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of attention.

Feature K27. The first effect executing means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notifying means based on the grant determination by the grant determining means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with game time control means (function to execute a game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the game time operation to be performed once to end the game time operation,
The game turn operation by the game turn control means includes the first action (reach occurrence) and the first action before the first action at a timing prior to notifying the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means. The branch timing for branching to the second action (reach non-occurrence) where the grant probability of one privilege is low is set (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the lower symbol sequence Z3),
The determination means determines whether or not the special condition is successful at the branch timing in the game rotation operation for the grant determination information for which the grant determination is performed in a situation where the second effect is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K26, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the success or failure of the special condition is determined at the branch timing between the first operation and the second operation. Further, at this branch timing, the probability that the first privilege is granted is increased if the gaming operation is branched to the first operation, while the grant probability is lowered if the game is branched to the second operation. In this case, it may be possible to further add a branch effect associated with the level of the grant probability for the first benefit, but if the effect is too complicated, there is a concern that the player's understanding will be reduced. It is possible that interest will fade. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the special condition different from the first privilege is determined at this branch timing, it is possible to suitably execute a plurality of branch effects related to the privilege grant while suppressing the complexity of the game.

  Feature K28. Special setting means capable of making the elapsed speed of the period corresponding to the special condition set by the condition setting means different from the elapsed speed so far or making the remaining period of the period different from the remaining period so far. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K27, further comprising (a function of executing a subtraction value adjustment process by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes as the elapsed speed or the remaining period of the period corresponding to the special condition changes. Thus, for example, even if the special condition is not likely to be satisfied, the special condition can be satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period, and for example, the special condition is likely to be satisfied. Even so, it is possible to prevent the special condition from being satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period. That is, the success / failure process of the special condition can be varied, and the degree of attention to the second effect can be suitably increased.

  Note that the condition setting means in this configuration can be applied to both the first condition setting means and the second condition setting means, or the above-described effects can be obtained even if only one of them is applied.

Feature K29. The first effect execution means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination As a notification result corresponding to, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn control means (the game control process by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The game machine according to claim K28, wherein the special setting means is configured to change the special setting means according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to further increase the relevance of the establishment probability of the special condition with the operation period, and it is possible to suitably avoid inconveniences based on the length of the operation period of game times.

Feature K30. The special condition is set such that the probability of establishment increases as the period during which the second performance is performed elapses,
The game machine according to Feature K29, wherein the special setting means is configured to increase the elapsed speed to be varied or to shorten the remaining period to be varied as the operation period is shorter.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period during which the predetermined set period elapses is also shortened, so that the probability of establishment of the special condition can be lowered. Therefore, in such a case, by changing the speed so that the elapsed speed is increased or the remaining period is shortened, it is possible to prevent the interest from diminishing by predicting that the special condition is not satisfied due to the short operation period. Is possible.

Feature K31. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means (a function for executing a special hold advance notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold advance notice) by the predetermined informing means or a different informing means;
Condition setting means (a function for executing special hold advance notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition that may vary depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in this configuration, if a means for setting a special condition that can vary the establishment probability depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed, a measure such as a simple length of the first effect on the assignment determination side. It is possible to have a different scale, and even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first presentation on the grant determination side, it is expected that special conditions will be easily established. It is possible to maintain a good balance of attention to the game. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be rephrased as “in relation to the length of the period” or “depending on the length of the period”.

Feature K32. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34) Means for performing a winning process for oral use)
Based on the information for grant determination acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether to give a player a first privilege (for example, an opening / closing execution mode or a high frequency support mode) A function of executing the determination processing by the control device 81),
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first effect setting means for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81). )When,
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Second effect execution means (special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means. Function to execute)
Second condition setting means for setting a special condition whose probability of establishment may vary depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied (time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) Game machine having a function of executing timer input processing at the time).

  According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the acquisition condition being satisfied, and the grant determination is performed based on the grant determination information to determine whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the determination, the second notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Production is performed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the determination of grant, the second effect is performed, thereby diversifying the effects.

  Here, the first privilege is granted according to the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first effect (for example, an effect for game times) is performed by a predetermined notification unit based on the grant determination. On the other hand, if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, it can be expected that the first privilege may be obtained. On the other hand, for example, whether or not the first privilege is obtained. For a player who is only paying attention, or a player who knows the result of the determination of grant to some extent for some reason (for example, presence / absence or strength of a notice effect), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is performed. If it continues for a long time, it may feel redundant. On the other hand, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the inconvenience as described above can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, the longer the length of the first effect on the assignment determination side is, the better, and it can be said that inconvenience may occur even if the length is short.

  Therefore, as in the present configuration, there is provided second condition setting means for setting a special condition whose probability of establishment differs depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed, based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied. If this is the case, it is possible to have a scale different from the simple scale of the first performance on the grant determination side, and the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first performance on the grant determination side. Even in such a case, it can be expected that the special condition is easily established.

  In particular, since the special condition set by the second condition setting means is set based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied, for example, the gaming machine side determines whether the special condition is satisfied according to the gaming situation. It can be managed to some extent. Specifically, if the special condition is to be established for production or the special condition should not be established, if the special condition is set based on that, the special condition A sense of incongruity in the production based on success or failure can be eliminated, and in this way, the production as designed can be suitably executed. Note that “depending on the length of the period” can be rephrased as “in relation to the length of the period” or “depending on the length of the period”.

  When the characteristic configurations described in the features K1 to K30 are applied to the feature K31 or the feature K32, the effect of the applied characteristic configuration can be synergistically achieved.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Information acquisition means for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) for storing the predetermined information (four), which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as the upper limit for the information for determination of grant acquired by the information acquisition means When,
With respect to the information for determination of grant stored in the information storage means, grant determination means for determining whether to give the player a first privilege (opening / closing execution mode or the like) (whether the main controller 81 determines whether or not) Processing function), and
Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination unit, the first notification operation is started by a predetermined notification unit, and the first effect operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A first effect setting means (a function for executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) that makes the first effect (for example, a game time) one time and performs the first effect operation;
An operation period setting means for setting an operation period in which the first effect is performed (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81);
First effect executing means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for causing the first effect operation to be performed over the operation period set by the operation period setting means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means (a function for executing a hold control command corresponding process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the second effect by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means;
Condition setting means (a function for executing special hold advance notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition that may vary depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed;
Destination specifying means for executing processing for specifying information about the predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination ( A function of executing a hold information grasping process by the effect control device 82, a function of executing a hold command setting process by the main control device 81), and
With
The condition setting means includes:
A first means capable of setting the special condition without taking into account whether or not the special condition is satisfied (for example, a function of executing a timer input process during a normal pattern by the effect control device 82);
Second means capable of setting the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function of executing timer input processing at the time specific pattern by the effect control device 82, by the main control device 81) The function of executing the process of step S4910),
Third means capable of setting the special condition based on the result of the specifying process by the destination specifying means (function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1707 by the effect control device 82, by the main control device 81) Function to execute the main special hold notice setting process),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the first effect is spread according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means, and the first effect is based on the result of the application determination related to the information for determination of application that triggered the first effect. In a gaming machine to which a privilege is given, there may be a case where a second effect is set in which a special condition is set in which the probability of establishment differs depending on the length of the period. In this way, it becomes possible to entertain other effects in addition to the conventional game of simply obtaining the information for grant determination and grasping the result through the first effect, and to enhance the interest of the game. Can be improved.

  Here, as an effect of the gaming machine, the first effect is flashy, or other effects other than the first effect are executed to increase the degree of attention of the first effect. Some are. However, these are the first effects themselves or effects accompanying them. On the other hand, in the above-described configuration, in the second effect, when the special condition that can be established depending on the length of the effect is set without considering that the condition is satisfied (first means) In addition, when it is set based on establishment (second means), it is set based on the result of the processing that the specified information for determination of grant is specified before the timing at which the determination of grant is made. There are cases (third means). In other words, regardless of the first effect, the special condition is established in relation to the first effect, assuming that the special condition may be set without considering whether the special condition is satisfied or not. When inconvenience occurs such as when it is desired to be performed (when it is not desired to be performed), it is possible to cope with it, and by properly using them, the first effect and the second effect can both be successfully achieved. As a result of the above, a second effect that is completely different from a conventional effect that is uniquely determined by the relevance to the first effect side can be obtained, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

  Note that the feature L1 can also be expressed as follows. In this case, if each configuration of the following feature L group is applied to the present configuration, “giving determination information” is “determination information”, “giving determination means” is “determination means”, and “predetermined” “Means” may be read as “first determination means”, “operation period” as “period”, and “operation period setting means” as “period setting means”. Further, if the “predetermined predetermined number” is “a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers”, it is possible to increase the number of determination targets by the “first determination means”, and various games based on the determination results Can be achieved.

“Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (four) predetermined;
With respect to the information for determination stored in the information storage means, determination means for determining whether or not to give the player a first privilege (opening / closing execution mode or the like) (execution determination processing by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
Based on the determination by the determination means, the first effect is started by a predetermined notification means, and the first effect is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. A period setting means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting one period of one effect (for example, a game time) and performing the first effect;
First effect execution means (a function for executing game times control processing by the main control device 81, variable display control by the effect control device 82) that causes the first effect to be performed over the period set by the period setting means. Processing function), and
Based on determination by the determination means, first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege (function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81);
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means (a function for executing a hold control command corresponding process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the second effect by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means;
Condition setting means (a function for executing special hold advance notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition that may vary depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed;
Predetermined determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit is determined by a destination determination unit (holding by the effect control device 82) for determining at a timing earlier than the predetermined determination information is to be determined by the determination unit. A function for executing information grasping processing, a function for executing setting processing of a hold command by the main control device 81),
With
The condition setting means includes:
A first means capable of setting the special condition without taking into account whether or not the special condition is satisfied (for example, a function of executing a timer input process during a normal pattern by the effect control device 82);
Second means capable of setting the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied (function of executing timer input processing at the time specific pattern by the effect control device 82, by the main control device 81) The function of executing the process of step S4910),
Third means capable of setting the special condition based on the result of the determination by the destination determination means (function for executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1707 by the effect control device 82, main control by the main control device 81) Side special hold notice setting process), and
A gaming machine characterized by having "."

  Feature L2. The second means sets the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on a result of the specifying process by the destination specifying means set by the third means. The gaming machine according to Feature L1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by that.

  According to the above configuration, the processing for specifying the information for grant determination, which is stored in the information storage means and is not yet the subject of grant determination, is performed by the first specifying means, and a special condition is established based on the result. The special conditions are set based on whether or not. Therefore, the stored determination information can be associated with the success or failure of the special condition. The special condition is that the probability of establishment may differ depending on the period during which the second effect is performed, and associating the information for determination of grant stored as described above is related to the information for determination of grant. Information on the operation period of one effect is associated with the success or failure of the special information. By doing in this way, in the 2nd production, it becomes possible to raise relevance with the length of the operation period of the 1st production.

  Here, for example, if the first effect becomes longer, the player has a sense of expectation that the information for determination of grant related to the first effect is a result of grant correspondence, but if that is not the case, In the case where it has been detected in advance (for example, when it is detected that there is a very low possibility of being a result of giving a response from an effect such as a reserved image as another effect), the first effect can be lengthened. The longer it becomes, the more useless period for the player, the less interest in the game may be. On the other hand, when the first effect is shortened, it is preferable for the player to efficiently digest the first effect that is not the result of the grant response, while the first effect that is the result of the grant response. If it is a short period of time, the game of enjoying the production up to the grant correspondence result is impaired, and this can also be a factor that diminishes interest in the game. Therefore, for the first effect, it is considered that the length of the operation period is set so that the effect is the highest in relation to the assignment correspondence result. And in such a relationship, if the relevance is increased in accordance with the operation period of the first effect on the second effect side, the operation period becomes longer or shorter in the first effect. Even if an inconvenience occurs, since the probability of establishment of the special condition in the second effect changes accordingly, the inconvenience due to the operation period on the first effect side can be covered on the second effect side. The significance of performing the second effect in which the conditions are set can be further enhanced.

Feature L3. The destination specifying unit executes a process of specifying a period for executing the process of specifying the information of the operation period related to the first effect when the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination. Means (function to execute hold information grasp processing by the production control device 82, function to execute the processing of steps S4908 to S4909 by the main control device 81),
The second means sets the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on a result of the specifying process by the period specifying means in the third means. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2.

  According to the said structure, the effect as described in the characteristic L2 can be show | played suitably.

Feature L4. The second means sets the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the result of the specifying process by the destination specifying means set by the third means,
The operation period setting means is a special period setting means capable of setting the operation period based on the special condition set by the second means (steps S4907 to S4914 by the main control device 81, at the time of holding notice The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L3, further comprising a function of executing a setting process of a variable display time.

  According to the above configuration, the processing for specifying the information for grant determination, which is stored in the information storage means and is not yet the subject of grant determination, is performed by the first specifying means, and a special condition is established based on the result. The special conditions are set based on whether or not. Therefore, the stored determination information can be associated with the success or failure of the special condition. The special condition is that the probability of establishment may differ depending on the period during which the second effect is performed, and associating the information for determination of grant stored as described above is related to the information for determination of grant. Information on the operation period of one effect is associated with the success or failure of the special information. By doing in this way, in the 2nd production, it becomes possible to raise relevance with the length of the operation period of the 1st production.

  Here, for example, if the first effect becomes longer, the player has a sense of expectation that the information for determination of grant related to the first effect is a result of grant correspondence, but if that is not the case, In the case where it has been detected in advance (for example, when it is detected that there is a very low possibility of being a result of giving a response from an effect such as a reserved image as another effect), the first effect can be lengthened. The longer it becomes, the more useless period for the player, the less interest in the game may be. On the other hand, when the first effect is shortened, it is preferable for the player to efficiently digest the first effect that is not the result of the grant response, while the first effect that is the result of the grant response. If it is a short period of time, the game of enjoying the production up to the grant correspondence result is impaired, and this can also be a factor that diminishes interest in the game. Therefore, for the first effect, it is considered that the length of the operation period should be set so that the effect is the highest in relation to the assignment correspondence result. In such a relationship, if the second effect side also associates with the operation period of the first effect, the operation period becomes longer or shorter in the first effect, and the above inconvenience occurs. However, since the probability of establishment of the special condition changes in the second production, the second production side can follow the inconvenience due to the operation period on the first production side, and the special condition is set. The significance of performing the second production can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the said structure, since the special period setting means which sets the operation period of a 1st effect is provided based on the special conditions set in a 2nd effect, the grant determination which is not yet the object of a grant determination Even if the operation period is not determined for the usage information, the special condition can be set at a timing earlier than that. If it does in this way, about the operation period of the 1st production concerning the information for grant determination, the game situation (for example, for the grant judgment memorized by the information storage means) when the information for grant judgment becomes the subject of grant judgment Even in a configuration that changes according to the number of information), the result set in advance based on the success or failure of the special condition on the second effect side and the operation period of the first effect that is the subject of the grant determination thereafter It is possible to avoid such an event that the success or failure of the special condition is different from that at the time of setting due to the trap.

  In addition, since the operation period may be set based on the special condition set in advance on the first stage, a complicated configuration such as changing the grant determination information itself based on the special condition is used. Even without this, the operation period can be set so as to meet special conditions, and the processing configuration can be greatly simplified with respect to the setting of effects. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be favorably achieved.

  Feature L5. The special period setting means includes means for setting the operation period so that the special condition is satisfied (function to make an affirmative determination in step S4911 by the main control device 81). The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period is set so that the special condition is satisfied, even if the result is not preferable for the player on the first effect side, the special condition is satisfied on the second effect side. Therefore, a favorable result can be obtained for the player. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to follow the 1st production suitably by the 2nd production.

  Feature L6. The special period setting means includes means for setting the operation period so that the special condition is not satisfied (function for executing the process of step S4912 by the main control device 81). Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition may be set to be satisfied, or the special condition may be set not to be satisfied. By doing in this way, the production can be made more diverse, and it becomes possible to improve the interest.

Feature L7. Period information storage means (variable display time table) for storing information groups of a plurality of predetermined operation periods,
The operation period setting unit selects an operation period information group stored in the period information storage unit based on the information for determination of grant acquired by the information acquisition unit, and operates according to the current first effect. It is a configuration to set a period,
The special period setting means is configured to be able to set the operation period in consideration of the special condition by changing the information group of the selected operation period. The gaming machine according to any one of L6.

  According to the above configuration, when the operation period is set by the special period setting means, if the information group of the selected operation period is changed, the grant determination information is not changed and the special condition is taken into consideration. Operating period. For this reason, for example, an event that the information for grant determination is different between acquisition and determination does not occur. If such an event occurs, it is considered that the unfairness of the game is increased by rewriting the grant determination information. In addition, even if such an event is allowed, whether the grant determination information is different due to normal processing as a gaming machine, or whether the grant determination information is different due to noise or some fraud, There is a concern that the processing configuration may be complicated. Therefore, by making the above configuration so that the operation period can be changed within a range that does not require changing the information for grant determination, the fairness of the game is ensured and the processing configuration is also simplified. It becomes possible to plan.

  The feature L7 is as follows, after replacing "operation period" with "period", "operation period setting means" with "period setting means", and "giving determination information" with "determination information". It can also be expressed.

“With period information storage means (variable display time table) for storing a plurality of predetermined period information groups,
The period setting unit selects one period information group stored in the period information storage unit based on the determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit, and selects the first period information group from the period information group. It is a configuration that sets the period related to production,
The special period setting means can select a period information group corresponding to setting a period related to the first effect based on the special condition, and can set a period related to the first effect The gaming machine according to any one of features L4 to L6.

Feature L8. A first control device (main control device 81) having the grant determination means and the operation period setting means;
A second control device (effect control device 82) having the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means;
With
The first control device outputs output means (main control device 81) that outputs information on the result of the application determination by the application determination means and information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means to the second control device. A function of executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5005 by
The second control device executes the first effect based on information received from the output means,
The destination specifying unit executes a process of specifying a period for executing the process of specifying the information of the operation period related to the first effect when the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination. Means (function to execute the processing of steps S4908 to S4909 by the main control device 81),
The second means sets the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on a result of the specifying process by the period specifying means in the third means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L7, wherein the first control device includes the second means and the third means.

  According to the said structure, a 1st effect is performed over the operation period set to the operation period setting means of the 1st control apparatus, and the 2nd effect is performed by the 2nd effect matter means of a 2nd control apparatus. In the second condition, the second means and the third means related to the operation period are set on the first control device side, and the first means not related to the operation period is set on the second control device side. The That is, in the case of a special condition related to the operation period, it is set on the first control device side, and otherwise, it is set on the second control device side. If the special condition related to the operation period is configured to be performed on the second control device side, information on the special condition determined on the second control device side needs to be output to the first control device side. However, the first control device originally outputs information on the result of the application determination by the application determination means and information on the operation period to the second control device. It is assumed that one production will be performed. For this reason, when the information about the special condition is output from the second control device to the first control device as described above, the input / output is a path opposite to the normal. If it does so, it will be necessary to provide the path | route (cable etc.) for performing input / output separately, and there are concerns about the increase in the components (increase in cost) of a game machine, complication of a structure, etc. Therefore, if the first control device side has the second means and the third means as in the above configuration, the special condition related to the operation period can be set on the first control device side. There is no need to output information on the special condition from the control device side to the first control device side.

  Feature L9. The gaming machine according to Feature L8, wherein the second control device has the first means.

  According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of feature L8, since the second control device side has the first means that is not related to the operation period, the first control device and the second control device are specially provided separately. The condition is set. In this way, it becomes possible to distribute the processing load.

  Feature L10. The second means is that the result of the process specified by the destination specifying means by the third means is the assignment correspondence result when the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, wherein the special condition is set so that the special condition is satisfied based on a corresponding result.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined grant determination information stored in the information storage unit is identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result at a timing earlier than the grant determination target. In this case, the second means (third means) is set so that the special condition is satisfied, and the second effect is executed based on the special condition. The special condition is such that the probability of establishment can vary depending on the length of the second effect. Therefore, in the above configuration, a special condition is established according to the length of the first effect relating to the information for grant determination that is the grant correspondence result and the length of the first effect relating to the information for grant determination executed before that. It becomes the structure set to do.

  Here, in a situation where the player is predicted that the information on the result of the grant determination for the grant determination information stored in the information storage means is the grant response result for some reason (for example, so-called notice effect). The following inconveniences can be considered. That is, for example, while expecting that the first effect on the information for determination of grant will be performed, the first effect on the information for determination of grant before that is too much to be performed as soon as possible. There is also the possibility of feeling annoying. Therefore, in such a situation, if the configuration is such that the second effect is established such that the special condition is satisfied, the special condition is satisfied even if the length of the second effect is long. This can reduce the possibility that the first effect will be felt annoying. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

  Feature L11. The condition setting means is means (main control device 81) for setting by the first means or the second means instead of the third means based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is established. The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L10, wherein the gaming machine includes a function of executing the processes of steps S4902, S4903 and steps S5610 to S5612.

  According to the above configuration, the special condition can be set even when the process specified by the first specifying unit cannot be executed, or even if the result of the specified process is not suitable for setting the special condition by the third unit. Can do. Thus, by forcibly setting with the third means, it is possible to suitably set the special conditions with other means (first means and second means) without causing any contradiction in the special conditions and other effects. It becomes.

Feature L12. Information acquisition means for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) for storing the predetermined information (four), which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as the upper limit for the information for determination of grant acquired by the information acquisition means When,
With respect to the information for determination of grant stored in the information storage means, grant determination means for determining whether to give the player a first privilege (opening / closing execution mode or the like) (whether the main controller 81 determines whether or not) Processing function), and
Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination unit, the first notification operation is started by a predetermined notification unit, and the first effect operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A first effect setting means (a function for executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) that makes the first effect (for example, a game time) one time and performs the first effect operation;
An operation period setting means for setting an operation period in which the first effect is performed (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81);
First effect executing means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for causing the first effect operation to be performed over the operation period set by the operation period setting means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means (a function for executing a hold control command corresponding process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the second effect by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means;
Condition setting means for setting a special condition that can vary the probability of establishment depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed (function for executing main-side special hold notice setting processing by the main control device 81);
With
The operation period setting means is a special setting means for setting the operation period of the first effect based on the special condition set by the condition setting means (the variable display time when the main control device 81 executes the hold notice). A gaming machine having a function of executing a setting process.

  According to the above configuration, the first effect is spread according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means, and the first effect is based on the result of the application determination related to the information for determination of application that triggered the first effect. In a gaming machine to which a privilege is given, there may be a case where a second effect is set in which a special condition is set in which the probability of establishment differs depending on the length of the period. If it does in this way, in addition to the conventional game of simply acquiring the information for grant determination and grasping the result through the first effect, other effects (the second whether or not the special condition is satisfied) It is possible to entertain, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, the operation period of the first effect may be set based on special conditions on the second effect side. That is, since the special conditions have different establishment probabilities depending on the length of the second presentation, the operation period of the first presentation is set based on the special conditions set on the second presentation side. The length of the second effect is set. By doing this,
The operation period of the first effect can be set so that the special condition is satisfied, or the operation period of the first effect can be set so that the special condition is not satisfied. And the execution period of a 2nd effect also changes according to it. Therefore, it is possible to closely associate different effects / establishment effects such as the first effect corresponding to the result in the grant determination and the second effect corresponding to the success or failure of the special condition. When it is desired to establish a special condition for convenience (when it is not desired to establish), it is possible to prevent wrinkles from occurring due to the relationship with the second performance side. Therefore, the 1st production and the 2nd production can be performed suitably, and the attention degree to a game can be raised.

  If the characteristic configurations described in the features L1 to L11 are respectively applied to the feature L12, it is possible to synergistically exhibit the effects of the applied characteristic configuration.

  The feature L12 can also be expressed as follows. In this case, if each configuration of the above-described feature L group is applied to this configuration, the “giving determination information” is “determination information”, the “giving determination means” is “determination means”, and “predetermined” “Means” may be read as “first determination means”, “operation period” as “period”, and “operation period setting means” as “period setting means”. Further, if the “predetermined predetermined number” is “a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers”, it is possible to increase the number of determination targets by the “first determination means”, and various games based on the determination results Can be achieved.

“Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (four) predetermined;
With respect to the information for determination stored in the information storage means, determination means for determining whether or not to give the player a first privilege (opening / closing execution mode or the like) (execution determination processing by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
Based on the determination by the determination means, the first effect is started by a predetermined notification means, and the first effect is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. A period setting means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting one period of one effect (for example, a game time) and performing the first effect;
First effect execution means (a function for executing game times control processing by the main control device 81, variable display control by the effect control device 82) that causes the first effect to be performed over the period set by the period setting means. Processing function), and
Based on determination by the determination means, first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege (function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81);
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means (a function for executing a hold control command corresponding process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the second effect by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means;
Condition setting means for setting a special condition that can vary the probability of establishment depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed (function for executing main-side special hold notice setting processing by the main control device 81);
With
The period setting means is a special setting means for setting the period of the first effect based on the special condition set by the condition setting means (variable display time setting process during execution of the hold notice by the main control device 81). A game machine characterized by having a function of

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. Information acquisition means for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) for storing the predetermined information (four), which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as the upper limit for the information for determination of grant acquired by the information acquisition means When,
With respect to the information for determination of grant stored in the information storage means, grant determination means for determining whether to give the player a first privilege (opening / closing execution mode or the like) (whether the main controller 81 determines whether or not) Processing function), and
Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination unit, the first notification operation is started by a predetermined notification unit, and the first effect operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A first effect setting means (a function for executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) that makes the first effect (for example, a game time) one time and performs the first effect operation;
First setting means capable of setting an operation period during which the first effect is performed based on the determination of the provision by the provision determination means (the processing of steps S5302 to S5305 by the main control device 81 is executed). Function)
First effect execution means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for causing the first effect operation to be performed over the operation period set by the first setting means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first privilege granting means (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Destination specifying means for executing processing for specifying information about the predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination ( A function of executing a hold command setting process by the main control device 81),
Second setting means capable of setting the operation period of the first effect based on the result of the specifying process by the destination specifying means (variable display time setting process during execution of the hold notice by the main control device 81) Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the said structure, about the information for grant determination memorize | stored in the information storage means, a 1st effect is unfolded according to the operation period set by the 1st setting means, and the grant which became the opportunity of the 1st effect In the gaming machine to which the first privilege is granted based on the result of the grant determination related to the determination information, the operation period of the first effect is a timing earlier than the grant determination that triggers the first effect. It may be set based on the result of the process specified by the destination specifying means. In other words, the operation period of the first effect may be set in a situation where it is stored on hold in the information storage means before the start of the first effect. In this way, since the operation period can be set before the start of the first effect, for example, it is possible to execute the effect using the operation period of the first effect before the start of the first effect. Become. As a result, the production can be diversified, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

  Note that the feature M1 can also be expressed as follows. In this case, if each configuration of the following feature M group is applied to the present configuration, “giving determination information” is “determination information”, “giving determination means” is “determination means”, and “predetermined” The “means” may be read as “destination determination means” and the “operation period” may be read as “period”. Further, if the “predetermined predetermined number” is “a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers”, it is possible to increase the number of determination targets by the “first determination means”, and various games based on the determination results Can be achieved.

“Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (four) predetermined;
With respect to the information for determination stored in the information storage means, determination means for determining whether or not to give the player a first privilege (opening / closing execution mode or the like) (execution determination processing by the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
Based on the determination by the determination means, the first effect is started by a predetermined notification means, and the first effect is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. A first setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S5302 to S5305 by the main control device 81) capable of setting one period of one effect (for example, a game time) and performing the first effect;
First effect execution means (a function for executing game times control processing by the main control device 81, a variable display by the effect control device 82) that causes the first effect to be performed over the period set by the first setting means. Control processing)
Based on determination by the determination means, first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege (function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81);
In a gaming machine equipped with
With respect to the predetermined determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit, destination determination unit (holding by the main control device 81) that performs determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined determination information becomes a determination target by the determination unit Command setting process), and
Second setting means capable of setting the period of the first effect based on the result of determination by the destination determination means (function of executing variable display time setting processing during execution of the hold notice by the main control device 81) )When,
A gaming machine characterized by having "."

  Feature M2. The second setting means includes the first effect relating to the information for determination of grant that is the target of the determination of grant prior to the predetermined information for determination of grant that is the target of the process to be specified by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to the feature M1, wherein the operation period can be set based on the result of the specified process.

  According to the above configuration, when the process of specifying by the destination specifying unit is performed, the first information about the determination of the grant that is the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the target of the process to be specified. It is also possible to set the operation period of the production. By doing in this way, for example, not only the 1st production concerning the information for grant judgment used as the object of processing to specify but the production using the operation period of the 1st production performed before that This can be performed before the start of the first effect that is the target of the specified process. Therefore, diversification of production can be achieved, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

  Note that the feature M2 is read as “determination information” as “determination information”, “destination specifying means” as “destination determination means”, and “operation period” as “period”. It can also be expressed as follows.

  “The second setting unit is configured to determine a period of the first effect related to the determination information to be determined before the predetermined determination information to be determined by the destination determination unit. The gaming machine according to the feature M1, which is configured to be set based on a determination result by the first determination unit.

  Feature M3. The first effect executing means is a selection means (main control) capable of performing processing for selecting the operation period set by the first setting means or the second setting means as the operation period of the current first effect. The gaming machine according to the feature M1 or the feature M2, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S5301 by the device 81).

  According to the above configuration, when the selecting unit is provided, the process of specifying by the first specifying unit is not performed, or the result of the specifying process is a result corresponding to the setting not performed by the second setting unit Even when the setting by the second setting means is not performed, the operation period set by the first setting means only needs to be selected, and the operation period is not set when the first effect is performed. Does not occur.

  Feature M4. The gaming machine according to Feature M3, wherein the selection means is configured to be able to perform the selection process at least before the start of the first effect.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation period can be set at least by the start of the first effect, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to the configuration set after the start.

  Here, in the first effect, when an effect according to the result of the determination of the grant is unfolded, various effect contents can be set at the start of the first effect in order to diversify the effect. Therefore, at the start of the first effect, it is considered that the processing load can be extremely increased for the control of the gaming machine. And, for example, if the operation period is long, the content of the effect will be set so that a long effect will be developed accordingly, and if the operation period is short, the content of the effect will be set so as to be a short effect accordingly. It is done. That is, in setting the production content, the setting of the operation period of the first production is an important factor, and if the operation period is not fixed, the production content cannot be set or is difficult to perform. Can be. Therefore, as described above, if the configuration is such that the operation period can be determined at the time of obtaining the information for grant determination, it is only necessary to set the content of the effect according to the operation period at the start of the first effect, which increases the processing load. Can be greatly reduced.

Feature M5. Special grant determination information (reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach) that can determine the operation period of the first effect related to the grant determination information at the stage when the grant determination information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Is set,
The gaming machine according to Feature M3 or Feature M4, wherein the selection unit is configured to be able to select the operation period based on the special grant determination information.

  According to the above configuration, when performing the process of selecting the operation period, not only the operation period set by the first and second setting means, but also for the special grant determination in which the operation period can be determined when obtaining the grant determination information An operation period based on information can also be a target of selection. In this way, not only can the operation period be varied, but the invention of feature M1 can also be applied to a configuration in which the operation period is set when acquisition grant information is acquired. Become.

Feature M6. A period information storage means (variable display time table) in which a group of information on a plurality of predetermined operation periods is stored;
The operation period setting unit selects an operation period information group stored in the period information storage unit based on the information for determination of grant acquired by the information acquisition unit, and operates according to the current first effect. It is a configuration to set a period,
The information group of the selected operation period is different between the case where the operation period is set by the first setting unit and the case where the operation period is set by the second setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5.

  According to the above configuration, the operation period information group to be used may be different between when the operation period is set by the first setting unit and when the operation period is set by the second setting unit. There is no need to change the information for grant determination. For this reason, for example, an event that the information for grant determination is different between acquisition and determination does not occur. If such an event occurs, it is considered that the unfairness of the game is increased by rewriting the grant determination information. In addition, even if such an event is allowed, whether the grant determination information is different due to normal processing as a gaming machine, or whether the grant determination information is different due to noise or some fraud, There is a concern that the processing configuration may be complicated. Therefore, by making the above configuration so that the operation period can be changed within a range that does not require changing the information for grant determination, the fairness of the game is ensured and the processing configuration is also simplified. It becomes possible to plan.

  Feature M7. The second setting means is a specific period setting means (step by the main control device 81) for setting a specific period (setting period) used for setting the operation period based on the result of the specifying process by the destination specifying means. And a function for executing the processing of S4910), and the operation period of the first effect is set within the range of the specific period set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the specific period is set based on the result of the process specified by the first specifying unit, and the operation period is set so that the operation period of each first effect falls within the range of the specific period. By doing in this way, when the production | generation according to the specific period is set, for example, it becomes possible to link the execution period of the production and the operation period of the 1st production. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production using the operation period of the first production, and to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature M8. The second setting means includes
The operation period of the first effect relating to the information for determination of grant that is the target of determination of grant prior to the information for determination of grant given as the target of the process to be specified by the destination specifying means The operation period can be set based on the result of processing to be performed,
Furthermore, within the range of the specific period set by the specific period setting means, the grant determination target that is the target of the grant determination prior to the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the process to be specified The gaming machine according to the feature M7, characterized in that the operation period of the first effect related to information can be set.

  According to the said structure, the operation | movement period of the 1st effect which concerns on the information for provision determination used as the object of grant determination before the predetermined information for grant determination used as the object of the process specified by a prior | specification means, and a specific period Can be associated with each other. As a result, as described in the feature M7, when an effect according to a specific period is set, it can be associated with this effect.

  Feature M9. The second setting means, when there are a plurality of the information for determination of grant that is the target of the determination of grant prior to the information for determination of grant given as the target of the process to be specified, The operation period of the first effect related to each information for determination of grant can be set such that the total of the operation periods of the first effect related to the information for determination of grant falls within the range of the specific period. The gaming machine according to Feature M8, wherein

  According to the above configuration, when there are a plurality of pieces of grant determination information that are targets of grant determination prior to the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the process specified by the destination specifying unit, the plurality of grant determination information The total of the operation periods of the first effect related to the determination information can be linked to the specific period. As a result, for example, it is possible to perform an effect linked with the operation period of the first effect related to the plurality of pieces of information for determination of grant, and the effects can be diversified.

Feature M10. The grant determination unit performs grant determination on the second grant determination information acquired after the first grant determination information for the first grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit. Provided with a destination determination means (function for executing the processing of steps S3801 to S3811 by the main control device 81) that can be performed prior to the grant determination for the first grant determination information,
The second setting unit is configured to be able to set the operation period within the range of the specific period, including the second grant determination information acquired later by the destination determination unit. The gaming machine described in the feature M8 or the feature M9.

  According to the said structure, the operation | movement period of the 1st effect about the 2nd information for grant determination used as the object of grant determination ahead of what was acquired later is also set so that it may be in the range of a specific period. In this way, even if the second assignment determination information is acquired after the process of specifying by the destination specifying means is performed, the first effect on the second assignment determination information is obtained. It is possible to link the operation period and the specific period.

  Feature M11. The second setting means includes the operation period of the first effect relating to the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the process specified by the destination specifying means so as to be within the range of the specific period. The gaming machine according to any one of features M7 to M10, wherein the operation period of the first effect related to each grant determination information can be set.

  According to the said structure, the 1st effect which concerns on the operation | movement period of the 1st effect which concerns on the predetermined | prescribed grant determination information used as the object of the process to specify, and the information for grant determination used as the object of the grant determination before it The operation period is set to be within the range of the specific period. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to link the period until the 1st production which concerns on the information for grant judgment used as the object of processing to end with a specific period, and the production using the specific period can be performed. It is possible to diversify the production.

  Feature M12. The second setting unit is used for setting an operation period by the first setting unit out of the information for determination of grant acquired by the information acquiring unit based on a result of the specifying process by the destination specifying unit. The first operation period information (variation type counter CS) is used as the second operation period information (special variation type counter) corresponding to the result of the specified process, and the second operation period information is used as the first operation period. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M11, characterized in that the gaming machine can be stored in a region (special hold storage area) different from the region in which the period information is stored.

  According to the above configuration, based on the result of the process specified by the first specifying unit, the first operation period information in the provision determination information is used as the second operation period information, which is different from the first operation period information. To remember. In this way, the first operation period information itself can be stored and held in the original storage area, and there is no need to change the first operation period information. Therefore, for example, an event that the first operation period information in the information for determination of assignment is different between the acquisition time and the determination time does not occur. If such an event occurs, it is considered that the unfairness of the game is increased by rewriting part of the information in the grant determination information. Even if such an event is allowed, whether or not a part of the information for determination of grant (information for the first operation period) differs depending on normal processing as a gaming machine, or noise or some fraud Therefore, it becomes necessary to determine whether part of the information for grant determination (first operation period information) is different, and there is a concern that the processing configuration may be complicated. Therefore, by making the above configuration so that the operation period can be changed within a range that does not require changing the information for grant determination, the fairness of the game is ensured and the processing configuration is also simplified. It becomes possible to plan.

Feature M13. As the operation period in which the first effect is performed, a long operation period (for example, a variable display time corresponding to super reach A to C) and a short operation period (for example, special game times) so as to be relatively long and short. Fluctuation display time) is set,
The second setting means performs the operation of the first effect relating to the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the target of the process to be specified by the destination specifying means. Long-term setting means capable of setting the period so as to easily become the long operation period (in the main control device 81, a situation where the holding number counter HK ≧ 2 in the variable display time setting process at the time of executing the special game times The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M12, wherein the gaming machine has a function of setting a variable display time.

  According to the said structure, the 1st production which concerns on the information for grant determination digested before the information for grant determination used as the specific object by a prior | specification means tends to be a long operation period. The longer the operation period is for the first effect, the more it can be used for the effect, and the effect can be performed flashy, but the grant is digested before the information for grant determination specified by the first specifying means. If the first production related to the information for determination is a long operation period, it is easy to perform the production on the side that is digested before it rather than the specific target, and it is digested before that. It becomes possible to raise the attention degree of the side. And not only raises the attention degree of the side digested before but the 1st privilege is given afterwards (that is, the 1st production concerning the information for grant judgment used as specific object). It is possible to entertain the first effect that is digested before the prediction while predicting, and to reduce the feeling of extension of the first effect.

  Note that the feature M13 can be expressed as follows after replacing “destination specifying means” with “destination determination means” and “giving determination information” with “determination information”. is there. In this case, if each configuration of the feature M group is applied to this configuration, the “long operation period” may be read as “long period” and the “short operation period” may be read as “short period”.

“As the period during which the first effect is performed, a long period (for example, a variable display time corresponding to super reach A to C) and a short period (for example, a variable display corresponding to special game times) so as to be relatively long and short. Time), and
The second setting means tends to make the period of the first effect related to the determination information to be determined prior to the determination information to be determined by the destination determination means to be the long period. Long-term setting means that can be set so that the variable display time is set in the main control device 81 in a situation where the holding number counter HK ≧ 2 in the variable display time setting process at the time of execution of the special game The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M12 ".

  Feature M14. The second setting means can set the operation period of the first effect related to the provision determination information that is the target of the process to be specified by the destination specifying means so as to be easily the short operation period. Short period setting means (in the main control device 81, a function for setting the variable display time in a situation where the holding number counter HK = 1 in the variable display time setting process at the time of execution of the special game) is provided The gaming machine according to feature M13.

  According to the said structure, it becomes a long operation period about the 1st production digested before the information for grant determination used as the specific object by the prior specification means (M13), and the 1st of the side used as the specific object is the first. The production tends to be a short operation period. For this reason, after performing the first production on the side that is digested before (longly), the first production on the side that is the specific target is less likely to become the long first production. The longer the flashy first production is performed, the more attention is paid to the first production. On the other hand, if it is a result of losing (a result that is not the subject of the first privilege), The degree of discouragement also increases. In that respect, in the following first production, if a long and flashy production is performed in the same way, even if it is a winning result (a result to which the first privilege is granted), the long and flashy production As a result of this, it will make you feel that it will be missed for some time, and you may feel that the first effect is protracted. In the first place, since it is only the first effect relating to the assignment determination information that has been specified by the first specifying means, it is not preferable that the above inconvenience occurs. Therefore, as described above, after the long and flashy first effect, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the above inconvenience by making the first effect that is the target of the specification easy to be a short first effect.

  Feature M15. The long-term setting unit is configured to display the first effect relating to the information for determination of grant that is the target of determination of grant immediately before the information for determination of grant that is the target of the process to be specified by the destination specifying unit. The game machine according to Feature M13 or Feature M14, wherein the operation period is set to be easily the long operation period.

  According to the above configuration, the first effect that is the specific target but immediately before the first effect tends to be a long operation period. In this way, it is possible to perform the first production just before the first production that is the specific target to be most noticed. And, for example, when combined with the structure of the feature M14, a novel effect that, after performing the first presentation of the specific target that is most desired to be noticed, flashes the first production of the specific target, It becomes possible to do. For example, if the specified result by the first specifying means is a result (winning) corresponding to granting the first privilege, for the previous one that results in the result, If a result (disappearance) that does not correspond to granting one privilege is reported, and then a result corresponding to granting the first privilege in the first production in a short operation period is reported plainly, the game As a person, they will be surprised that they were hit shortly after being disappointed, and it would be possible to create a novel production.

  In the above configuration, on the premise that a plurality of operation periods having different lengths are set as the “long operation period”, the “target to be subjected to the grant determination before the grant determination information” “The operation period of the first effect related to the information for grant determination is likely to be the long motion period” is related to “the information for grant determination that is the subject of the grant determination immediately before the information for grant determination”. The operation period of the first effect may be configured to be easily the longest operation period. If it does in this way, it will become possible to show the above-mentioned outstanding effect still more suitably.

  Feature M16. In a case where the operation period is set by the second setting unit, the first effect executing unit is configured to execute the first determination execution unit immediately before the provision determination information that is the target of the specifying process by the destination specifying unit. Using the notification result of the operation for the first effect in the first effect related to the information for determination of grant that is the target of the determination of grant, the information related to the information for determination of grant that is the target of the process to be specified It is provided with a specific first effect executing means (a function for executing a variable display control process during special game times in the effect control device 82) capable of executing the first effect operation of the first effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features M13 to M15.

  According to the above configuration, in the first effect before the first effect that is specified by the first specifying means, the first effect that is specified is performed in a plain manner while the first effect that is specified is performed. However, if the first effect is performed using the notification result in the first effect immediately before the first effect that is the specific target, the effect is so flashy about the first effect that is the specific target. This is preferable because it is not necessary. In this way, it is possible to realize a novel effect in which, after a flashy effect, a specific result of the tip specifying means is notified by a quiet and quiet effect.

Feature M17. The predetermined notification means is a display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns,
The first effect execution means starts the display of variation of the plurality of pictures as the first effect operation, stops the respective pictures, and notifies the determination result by the application determination means. Control
The specific first effect execution means includes the first related to the information for determination of grant that has been subject to the determination of grant immediately before the information for determination of grant that has been the target of the process to be specified by the destination specifying means. The information relating to the information for determination of grant that is the target of the process to be specified by using a part of the patterns of the patterns that are stopped and displayed as the notification result of the operation for the first effect in one effect. The gaming machine according to feature M16, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of executing the first performance operation of the first performance.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the display unit displays the variation of the plurality of patterns as the first effect, and the result of the determination of the application by the determination unit is notified by the stop result of the plurality of patterns. In the first effect that is a specific target, the first effect operation is performed using a part of the stop patterns in the immediately preceding first effect. That is, since the other patterns are not variably displayed, a so-called re-variation effect can be achieved. Also, in a general re-variation effect, it is a configuration in which a stop → re-variation is performed as an effect during one first effect, but in this configuration, a re-variation effect straddling a plurality of first effects. Can be realized, and a novel production can be provided.

Feature M18. As an operation mode of the first effect operation, a specific pattern combination corresponding to a case where a part of the plurality of patterns is stopped and the remaining pattern is variably displayed to give the first privilege. Includes a reach behavior that suggests that can stop
The specific first effect executing means determines the reach operation mode as the first effect operation of the first effect related to the information for determination of grant that has been subject to the grant determination immediately before the remaining pattern. Is stopped so as not to become the specific pattern combination, and the remaining pattern is used as the first effect operation of the first effect related to the information for determination of grant that is the target of the specifying process. The gaming machine according to Feature M17, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration that can be variably displayed.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to suitably realize a so-called re-variation effect after the (out of) reach operation mode corresponding to not providing the first privilege.

Feature M19. Based on the result of the process to be specified by the destination specifying unit being a predetermined result, the timing before the information for the determination of the application that is the target of the process to be specified is the target of the determination of the application Thus, a special notification executing means for executing a special notification corresponding to the result of the process specified by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means (function for executing the hold control command corresponding process by the effect control device 82) )
As a notification mode of the special notification by the special notification execution means, a result corresponding to the result of the grant determination when the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination gives the first privilege. The high expectation aspect and the low expectation aspect that the expectation degree to be relatively high and low are set,
The special notification execution unit can select the notification mode of the low expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification for the grant determination information that is the target of the specifying process by the destination specifying unit. Any one of features M13 to M18, comprising first selection means (a function of executing a process of selecting a low-expected degree holding image in steps S6003 and S6004 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above-described configuration, the first effect is performed in a long operation period for the information for grant determination that is the subject of grant determination before the information for grant determination that is the specific target. Notification is a low expectation mode. As a result, it is possible to make the expectation higher in the production on the front side than the information for grant determination that has become the specific target (in other words, do not make the expectation or focus on the information for grant determination that has become the specific target). It becomes possible, and a player's interest can be concentrated on the said front side production. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect (surprise, etc.) by performing the production on the information for determination of giving on the side that is the specific target.

  Note that the feature M19 is obtained by replacing the “destination specifying unit” with the “destination determination unit”, the “attachment determination unit” with the “determination unit”, and the “addition determination information” with the “determination information”. It can also be expressed as follows.

“The special notification corresponding to the determination result by the destination determination unit indicates that the predetermined information at the timing before the predetermined determination information that has been determined by the destination determination unit becomes the determination target by the determination unit. Provided with special notification execution means (function to execute the hold control command response processing by the effect control device 82) to be executed by the notification means or a separate notification means,
As a notification mode of the special notification by the special notification execution means, a result corresponding to the result of the determination when the predetermined determination information is a target of determination by the determination means gives the first privilege. The high expectation aspect and the low expectation aspect that the expectation degree to be relatively high and low are set,
The special notification execution unit is a first selection unit that easily selects the notification mode of the low expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification for the determination information that has been determined by the destination determination unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features M13 to M18, which includes a function of executing a process of selecting a low-expectation-side holding image in steps S6003 and S6004 by the control device 82 " .

  Feature M20. The special notification execution unit is configured to notify the special notification about the information for grant determination that is the subject of the grant determination immediately before the information for grant determination that is the target of the process to be specified by the destination specifying unit. Second selecting means capable of selecting a notification mode of the high expectation mode as a mode (a function of executing processing for selecting a high expectation side hold image in steps S6003 and S6004 by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to feature M19, comprising:

  According to the above-described configuration, not only the first effect is performed in a long operation period but also high expectation for the information for determination of grant that is the target of the determination of grant immediately before the information for determination of grant that is the specific target. The special notification which becomes an aspect is performed. In this way, it is possible to pay more attention to the immediately preceding first effect. In other words, it is possible to diminish interest in the specific target side. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect (surprise, etc.) by performing the production on the information for determination of giving on the side that is the specific target.

  Note that the feature M20 is obtained by replacing the “destination specifying unit” with “destination determination unit”, the “attachment determination unit” with “determination unit”, and the “addition determination information” with “determination information”. It can also be expressed as follows.

  “The special notification execution unit is configured as the notification mode of the special notification about the determination information that is the determination target immediately before the determination information that is determined by the destination determination unit. It is provided with the 2nd selection means (function which performs the process which selects the image for the high expectation side hold in step S6003, S6004 by the production | presentation control apparatus 82) which is easy to select the notification aspect of an expectation degree aspect, It is characterized by the above-mentioned. And a gaming machine according to feature M19.

Feature M21. A second effect executing means (a function for executing a hold control command corresponding process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the second effect by the predetermined notifying means or another notifying means;
Condition setting means (a function for executing special hold advance notice setting processing by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition that may vary depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed;
With
The second setting means is configured to be able to set an operation period of the first effect based on a result of the specifying process by the destination specifying means and the special condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M20.

  According to the above configuration, in the predetermined notification means or the like, there is a case where the second effect is performed instead of the first effect, and there is a special condition that the probability of establishment differs depending on the length of the period during which the second effect is performed. Is set. And a 2nd setting means sets the operation period of a 1st effect in consideration of not only the specific result by a prior | specification means but a special condition. In this way, it is possible not only to associate the first effect and the second effect that seem to be unrelated at first glance, but also to the special condition (the length of the second effect) in the effect that is being executed first. ) To determine the length of the subsequent first performance.

  Feature M22. The second setting means, based on the result of the process to be specified by the destination specifying means being a predetermined result, the second condition so that the special condition in the second effect being executed is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Feature M21, wherein the operation period of the first effect that is set by the setting means can be set.

  According to the above configuration, the acquisition condition information is acquired while the second effect is being executed, the information for determination of acquisition is acquired, the information about the information for determination of acquisition is specified by the prior specifying means, and the result is a predetermined result. If it is (for example, a result corresponding to granting the first privilege), the operation of the first effect relating to the acquired information for determination of grant so that the special condition for the second effect being executed is satisfied. Period may be set. For example, if the player senses on the way that a special condition for the second effect will not be established in relation to the first effect in a situation where the second effect is being performed, the process proceeds to the second effect. The degree of attention is greatly reduced. Therefore, when the operation period of the first effect can be set so that the special condition for the second effect being executed is established as in the present configuration, the degree of attention to the second effect can be suitably increased. .

  In this case, for example, based on the result of the process specified by the first specifying means being “the result corresponding to granting the first privilege”, the special condition on the second effect side is established as described above. By doing so, it can be clearly associated that the special condition is established in the second effect and that the first privilege is given in the first effect. Therefore, the first effect and the second effect can be performed in association with each other, and the degree of attention to both the effects can be suitably increased.

  Feature M23. The second setting unit is configured so that the special condition in the second effect being executed is established based on the number of the information for determination of grant stored in the information storage unit being a specific number. The gaming machine according to Feature M21 or Feature M22, wherein an operation period of the first effect that is a setting target of the second setting means can be set.

  According to the above configuration, when the acquisition condition is established during execution of the second effect and the information for determination of acquisition is acquired, the number of information for determination of grant is a specific number. There is a case where the operation period of the first effect relating to the acquired information for determination of grant is set so that the special condition for the two effects is established. Since the special condition of the second effect may vary depending on the length of the period during which the first effect is performed, the number of grant determination information that triggers the first effect depends on the success or failure of the special condition. It is thought that they are directly connected. Then, for example, if the number of stored determination information is notified, the player can determine whether the special condition being executed is successful based on the notified number of determination information. Can be easily predicted. Then, if it is predicted that the number of stored information for determination of assignment is small and the special condition cannot be satisfied, the interest in the second effect is greatly reduced. Therefore, if the operation period of the first effect is set so that the special condition of the second effect is established when the number of stored information for grant determination is a specific number, the special condition is It is an unexpected result for a player who is predicting that it will not be established, leading to improvement of interest, and there is still a chance that special conditions will be established even if the number of information for grant determination is small It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

  In addition, as the timing at which the number of pieces of information for grant determination is a specific number, for example, “the number of pieces of information for grant determination stored in the acquired information at the timing when the information for grant determination is acquired by the information acquisition unit is It may be described as “based on being a specific number”.

  Further, if the “specific number” is limited to, for example, “1”, the specific number is 0 before the information for grant determination is acquired by the information acquisition unit. In such a situation, if subsequent grant determination information is not acquired, only the first effect being executed is involved in the success or failure of the special condition for the second effect. Then, it is considered that the player who is accustomed to the game can understand the length of the first effect to some extent from the effect pattern, and then the second effect side without waiting for the end of the first effect being executed. The success or failure of these special conditions can be predicted more clearly. As a result, it is considered that the reduction in the degree of attention to the second performance side as described above is more easily generated. In that respect, the merit of the above configuration is further increased.

  Feature M24. The second setting unit is configured to perform the predetermined determination based on the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination after the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the process to be specified by the destination specifying unit. Post setting means capable of setting the operation period of the first effect with respect to the information for determination of grant (a function of performing setting processing of the variable display time at the time of executing the special game times in the thirteenth embodiment) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M23, wherein:

  According to the said structure, an operation period can be set about the 1st production which concerns on the predetermined | prescribed provision determination information, and a relevance with the following 1st production is given. If the operation period of the predetermined provision determination information is set in accordance with the content (production pattern or operation period) of the first presentation executed / executed prior to the predetermined provision determination information, It can be considered as a first effect having continuity with the first effect that is executed / performed, and the player's interest can be maintained. On the other hand, for example, in a situation where the player can grasp to a certain extent up to which first production has continuity from the relationship with the acquisition timing of the information for grant determination as the production having the continuity. If the first presentation having the continuity that has been newly acquired is further continued in the first presentation for the information for determination of grant, it is easy for the further continuous first presentation to be a so-called Gasse continuous presentation. It can be identified and can lead to an extreme reduction in attention. In that respect, if it is possible to set the operation period of the first effect related to the predetermined grant determination information based on the subsequent grant determination information, it has not yet been implemented, As the previous effect, the first effect related to the predetermined grant determination information can be used, and the first effect regarding the subsequent grant determination information can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature M25. The grant determination means performs the grant determination for one grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means, with respect to the other grant determination information acquired prior to the one grant determination information. Priority means (a function for executing data setting processing by the main control device 81 in the seventh embodiment) to be given priority over the assignment determination,
The post-setting unit may set the operation period of the first effect relating to the information for determination of grant to be determined by the priority unit based on the other information for determination of grant acquired earlier. The gaming machine according to Feature M24, which is a possible configuration.

  According to the above configuration, the event of the feature M24 is more likely to occur by including the priority unit. In such a configuration, it is possible to execute the first effect relating to the information for grant determination that is given the priority determination first, in association with the first effect relating to the information for grant determination on the later side. The effect of the feature M24 can be more suitably achieved.

  Note that the above feature M25 is obtained by replacing “determination determination unit” with “determination unit”, “addition determination information” with “determination information”, and “operation period” with “period”. It is possible to express as follows.

“The determination unit prioritizes the determination for one determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit over the determination for other determination information acquired before the one determination information. Provided with priority means,
Characteristic M1 thru | or characterized by being able to set the period of the said 1st production which concerns on the said information for determination prioritized by the said priority means based on the said other information for determination previously acquired. The gaming machine according to any one of M24.

  Feature M26. The post-setting unit is configured to execute the predetermined determination regardless of the type of the determination information to be subjected to the determination after the predetermined determination information to be specified by the destination specifying unit. The gaming machine according to Feature M24 or Feature M25, wherein the operation period of the first effect with respect to the information for determination of granting can be set.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform post-setting using the same processing configuration regardless of the type of information for grant determination that will be subject to grant determination later. Therefore, the effects of the features M24 and M25 can be achieved with a simpler configuration.

Feature M27. As a result of the above-mentioned grant determination, an advantageous result (probability jackpot result) and a disadvantageous result (usually jackpot result) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are included,
The specifying first effect executing means specifies the information by the destination specifying means even if the result of the assignment determination for the information for assignment determination that has been specified by the destination specifying means is the advantageous result. The first effect relating to the information for grant determination that has been the target of the grant determination before the information for grant determination that has been the target of processing, or the target of the process to be specified by the destination specifying means As the first effect relating to the information for determination of grant, it is possible to execute an effect that informs that the disadvantageous result can be obtained, and after that, it has been the target of the specifying process by the destination specifying unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M26, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of notifying a result of the grant determination information.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the degree of attention due to the perception of the result of the grant determination by the previous first performance. That is, if the previous first effect is an effect that tends to be unfavorable for the player (adverse result), it is difficult to increase the player's attention. On the other hand, even if a result unfavorable for the player is notified, if there is room for the result on the preferable side to be notified after that, the result will be predicted soon and the degree of attention will decrease. Can be avoided.

Feature M28. A specific effect (a demo screen or the like) that is executed in a situation where the information for grant determination is not stored by the information storage unit is set,
The first effect execution means includes the first effect related to the information for determination of grant that has been the target of the process to be specified by the destination specifying means, and the information for determination of grant that has been the target of the process of specifying. Any of the features M1 to M27, characterized in that the specific effect can be executed between the first effect relating to the information for determination of grant that is the target of the grant determination immediately before. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the said structure, the relevance of the 1st effect used as the object of the process specified by a prior | specification means and the 1st effect before it can be made low. That is, if a specific effect occurs after the previous first effect, it can be determined that the player has no more information for grant determination. If the 1st production used as the object of the processing specified by a prior specification means is performed after that, the 1st production used as the object can be made more pronounced.

  In particular, if the present configuration is applied to a configuration that uses the notification result of the previous first effect, such as the features M16 to M18, the notification that the effect as once interrupted as described above has relevance again. As a result, it is possible to provide a surprise to the player. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

Feature M29. As an effect that suggests the result of the grant determination, a first expectation suggestion effect (holding image) and a second expectation suggestion effect (chance effect) that occurs after that are set,
In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, the first high expectation degree suggestion effect and the first expectation degree are relatively high in the expectation degree, which is a result of the grant determination result corresponding to granting the first privilege. 1 Low expectation suggestion production is included,
In the second expectation suggestion effect, the second high expectation suggestion effect and the second expectation degree are relatively high, so that the expectation that is a result of the grant determination corresponding to giving the first privilege is relatively high. 2 Includes a low expectation suggestion,
With respect to the first effect relating to the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination immediately before the grant determination information that is the target of the specifying process by the destination specifying unit, the first high The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M28, wherein the expectation suggestion effect and the second low expectation suggestion effect can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, after an effect with a high degree of expectation (the first high expectation degree suggesting effect) is performed for the first effect before the first effect that has been dealt with by the process specified by the first specifying unit. An effect with a low degree of expectation (second low expectation degree suggestion effect) is performed. In general, when an effect design is performed in which the degree of expectation increases in order (step-up effect), the attention degree of the player can be greatly reduced by using this configuration. However, in this gaming machine, the first effect that should be focused on is the first effect that is specified by the first specifying means, and the more the attention level of the first effect that is immediately before it decreases, the more the next effect. It is thought that the production performed in one production stands out. In particular, the previous first stage is a state in which the degree of attention is once increased by the first high expectation level suggestion stage, and the emotional undulation such as expectation → disappointment has occurred, It is possible to make the first production desired. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention by narrowing the points using the undulations of the player's emotions.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. Information acquisition means for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) for storing the predetermined information (four), which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as the upper limit for the information for determination of grant acquired by the information acquisition means When,
Grant determination for determining whether or not the grant determination information stored in the information storage means is a grant response result corresponding to granting the player a first privilege (opening / closing execution mode or the like). Means (function for executing the determination processing by the main controller 81);
Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination unit, the first notification operation is started by a predetermined notification unit, and the first effect operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A first effect setting means (a function for executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) that makes the first effect (for example, a game time) one time and performs the first effect operation;
An operation period setting unit (a function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period in which the first effect operation is performed based on the determination of the application by the application determination unit. )When,
First effect executing means (function for executing variable display control processing by the effect control device 82) for causing the first effect operation to be performed over the operation period set by the operation period setting means;
A first privilege granting unit (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the fact that the grant determination by the grant determination unit is the grant response result;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Destination specifying means for executing processing for specifying information about the predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing earlier than the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination ( A function of executing a hold command setting process by the main control device 81),
Based on the result of the process specified by the destination specifying unit being a predetermined result, a special notification corresponding to the result of the specified process is executed by the predetermined notification unit or a different notification unit. Special notification executing means (function to execute the hold control command response process by the effect control device 82),
The point specifying means includes:
As the specifying process, result specifying means for executing a process of specifying information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined information for determination of grant is the target of the grant determination (the process of step S6001 by the effect control device 82) Function to execute)
As the specifying process, a period specifying unit (effect control) for executing a process of specifying information corresponding to an operation period in which the first effect is performed when the predetermined information for determination of grant is the target of the grant determination. The function of executing the process of step S6002 by the device 82);
With
As a notification mode of the special notification by the special notification execution unit, an expectation that the result of the determination of grant when the predetermined information for determination of grant becomes the target of the grant determination is the relative correspondence result. High expectation aspect and low expectation aspect that become high and low are set,
When the special notification is executed by the special notification execution unit, a first selection unit (step S6003 by the effect control device 82) capable of selecting the notification mode of the high expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification. , A function of executing processing for selecting a high-expectation-side holding image in S6004),
When the special notification is executed by the special notification execution unit, a second selection unit (step S6003 by the effect control device 82) capable of selecting the notification mode of the low expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification. , A function of executing processing for selecting a low-expected-side hold image in S6004),
With
In the first selection unit and the second selection unit, the result of the process specified by the result specifying unit is the assignment correspondence result, and the result of the process specified by the period specifying unit is shorter than a predetermined period. If it is, the gaming machine is set so as to easily select the special notification in the low expectation mode.

  According to the above configuration, for the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the process specified by the destination specifying means, the grant determination result is the grant response result, and the operation period of the first effect is shorter than the predetermined period. In this case, the notification mode of the special notification is easily set to the low expectation level. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict that the predetermined grant determination information is a grant response result at a timing earlier than the grant determination target.

  Here, in the gaming machine in which the first effect of the operation for the first effect according to the result of the grant determination is performed, the effect that causes the player to expect the result of the grant is associated with the length of the operation period. The configuration to be set is considered common. Specifically, the effect is set so that the expectation is high if the operation period is long and the expectation is low if the operation period is short. In that respect, even if the result of the grant determination is a grant response result, if the operation period of the first effect is short, it is difficult to secure a period for the effect, and it is expected to be a grant response result. It is not possible to fully entertain the player with expectation (for example, super reach). On the other hand, even if it is a low-expectation effect, it does not completely eliminate the possibility of the grant response result, but leaves the possibility of the grant response result, such a low-expectation effect Even so, the player's interest can be prevented from being reduced. However, since it is rare that such a low-expected performance will result in a grant response, it will be positioned as a low-expected performance and provide a surprise when a grant response result is obtained. Is possible.

  In the situation as described above, in the special notification executed at the timing before the information for determination of grant is the target of the determination of grant, the expectation that is the result of grant is high as the notification mode of the special notification. If the special notification is performed in the degree mode, the player expects that the notification indicating that the result is the grant correspondence result is performed in the first effect relating to the grant determination information, that is, the first privilege is granted. If the special notification is performed in the high expectation mode, the player predicts that a high expectation effect (for example, super reach as described above) will occur in the first effect, and the first You can fully enjoy the highly anticipated performance in one performance. On the other hand, if a low-expectation effect occurs in the first effect in a situation where a special notification is being performed in a high-expectation mode, at that point in time, although it is a low-expectation effect The player predicts that the result is an assignment correspondence result. If it does so, there is a possibility of erasing the effect such as a surprise that results in a response to a grant with a low expectation effect in the first effect.

  Therefore, even in the case of the assignment correspondence result, in a situation where the low expectation degree effect is to be performed in the first effect, that is, when the operation period is shorter than the predetermined period, the special notice of the low expectation aspect is easily selected. For example, not only avoiding the surprise effect given to the player, but also because the special notification is in a low expectation mode, the result of the grant is a low expectation mode in the first stage. It is possible to further increase the surprise of the case. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

  The feature N1 can also be expressed as follows. In this case, if each configuration of the following feature N group is applied to the present configuration, “giving determination information” is “determination information”, “giving determination means” is “determination means”, and “predetermined” “Means” may be read as “first determination means”, “operation period” as “period”, and “operation period setting means” as “period setting means”. Further, if the “predetermined predetermined number” is “a predetermined number that is a plurality of predetermined numbers”, it is possible to increase the number of determination targets by the “first determination means”, and various games based on the determination results Can be achieved.

“Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information (holding information) based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (four) predetermined;
Determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means is a corresponding result corresponding to giving the player a first privilege (opening / closing execution mode or the like). A function of executing the determination processing by the device 81),
Based on the determination by the determination means, the first effect is started by a predetermined notification means, and the first effect is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. A period setting means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting one period of one effect (for example, a game time) and performing the first effect;
First effect execution means (a function for executing game times control processing by the main control device 81, variable display control by the effect control device 82) that causes the first effect to be performed over the period set by the period setting means. Processing function), and
Based on the determination by the determination means being the correspondence result, a first privilege giving means for giving the first privilege (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81);
In a gaming machine equipped with
With respect to the predetermined determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit, destination determination unit (holding by the main control device 81) that performs determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined determination information becomes a determination target by the determination unit Command setting process), and
The special notification corresponding to the determination result by the destination determination means indicates that the predetermined notification at a timing earlier than the predetermined determination information that has been determined by the destination determination means becomes the determination target by the determination means. Special notification execution means (function to execute the hold control command corresponding processing by the effect control device 82) to be executed by the means or other notification means,
The destination determination means includes
As the determination, a result determination unit that determines information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined determination information is a target of determination by the determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S6001 by the effect control device 82). When,
As the determination, period determination means for determining information corresponding to a period during which the first effect is performed when the predetermined determination information is a target of determination by the determination means (in step S6002 by the effect control device 82). Processing function), and
With
As the notification mode of the special notification by the special notification execution unit, the degree of expectation that the result of the determination when the predetermined determination information becomes the determination target by the determination unit is the correspondence result is relatively A high expectation aspect and a low expectation aspect that are high and low are set,
When the special notification is executed by the special notification execution unit, a first selection unit (step S6003 by the effect control device 82) capable of selecting the notification mode of the high expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification. , A function of executing processing for selecting a high-expectation-side holding image in S6004),
When the special notification is executed by the special notification execution unit, a second selection unit (step S6003 by the effect control device 82) capable of selecting the notification mode of the low expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification. , A function of executing processing for selecting a low-expected-side hold image in S6004),
With
When the determination result by the result determination unit is the correspondence result and the determination result by the period determination unit is shorter than a predetermined period, the first selection unit and the second selection unit have the low expectation. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set so that it is easy to select the special notification in the mode.

  Feature N2. The first selection unit and the second selection unit specify the period of the grant determination information that is the subject of the grant determination prior to the predetermined grant determination information that is the subject of the special notification. The feature N1 is characterized in that when the result of the process to be specified by the means is longer than a predetermined period, the low expectation mode is easily selected as the notification mode of the special notification. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine having the feature N1, the operation period of the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification is longer than the predetermined period. If it is long, it becomes easy to select the low expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification. That is, the shorter the operation period of the first effect for the predetermined grant determination information that is the subject of special notification is, the shorter the grant determination is prior to the predetermined grant determination information that is the subject. The longer the operation period of the first effect for the information for determination of grant, the longer the special notification of the low expectation aspect is selected. As described above, if the operation period of the first effect is long, a high expectation effect is likely to be performed. Then, in the first effect on the information for determination of grant that is the target of the applicability determination, It is thought that the production with high expectation will be easily performed. And, if the result of the grant determination for the grant determination information that is the subject of grant determination is the grant response result, the player will be satisfied, but if not the grant response result, It seems very disappointing as a player.

  In such a situation where the player is discouraged, in the first effect on the information for determination of grant (which is the target of special notification) after that, the effect is given with a low expectation effect. If the fact that it is the result is notified, it is considered that the surprise given to the player is further increased. This is because, as a player, the expectation result of the grant determination information that is the subject of the special notification should not be expected so much in the first place. By doing as described above, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature N3. When the special notification in the low expectation mode is selected, the special notification execution unit is configured to perform the special notification in the high expectation mode for the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination earlier than the special notification. Is provided with another execution means (a function of executing a process of selecting an image for holding off-holding at the time of the special game in steps S6003 and S6004 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to the feature N1 or the feature N2.

  According to the above-described configuration, the operation period of the grant response result is short, and the predetermined expectation information for which there is a high possibility that a low expectation effect will be performed as the first effect is only reduced in advance. In addition, it is possible to enhance the prior expectation of the grant correspondence information that is the subject of grant determination before that. Thereby, it is thought that the surprise by having become the grant correspondence result with the production of low expectation level is further increased.

  Feature N4. The separate execution means sets the special notification so that the special notification of the high expectation aspect ends at a timing prior to the start of the first effect on the predetermined grant determination information. The gaming machine according to Feature N3, characterized by:

  According to the above configuration, since the expectation for the information for determination of grant regarding the special notification of the high expectation aspect changes to a sense of loss, after that, it becomes a grant response result through a low expectation effect. It is possible to intentionally cause emotional fluctuations. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

Feature N5. The first effect execution means changes the execution mode of the first effect operation from a plurality of predetermined execution modes of the first effect based on the operation period set by the operation period setting unit. An execution mode setting means for setting (a function for executing the process for starting variation by the effect control device 82) is provided, and the first effect operation is performed in the execution mode set by the execution mode setting means. Yes,
The execution mode setting means can change the execution mode to be set depending on whether the special notification of the low expectation mode is selected or not (step S5901 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, which includes a function of executing the processing of S5903.

  According to the above configuration, if the execution mode of the first effect is different between the case where the special notification of the low expectation mode is selected and the case where it is not, not only the prior expectation such as the special notification, It is also possible to adjust the expectation of the result of the assignment determination such as one effect. In this way, it is possible to further increase the surprise when the result of giving is a result of the first effect with a short operation period.

Feature N6. As an execution mode of the first effect operation set by the execution mode setting means, a high expectation execution mode and a low expectation level execution mode are set so that the expectation level as the assignment correspondence result is relatively high or low. The execution mode setting means is set for the first production of this time according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means, from the high expectation execution mode and the low expectation execution mode. It sets the execution mode of the operation,
When the special notification of the low expectation aspect is selected, the low expectation execution aspect is the execution aspect of the first performance operation related to the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification. The game machine according to Feature N5, wherein the execution mode is easy to set.

  According to the above configuration, when the special notification in the low expectation mode is selected, the execution mode for the first effect that is the target of the special notification is also set as the low expectation execution mode. Since it becomes easy, it is possible to further increase the surprise as the result of giving correspondence by lowering not only the prior expectation such as special notice but also the expectation for the effect that informs the result of the grant determination such as the first effect itself. it can.

Feature N7. As an execution mode of the first effect operation set by the execution mode setting means, a high expectation execution mode and a low expectation level execution mode are set so that the expectation level as the assignment correspondence result is relatively high or low. The execution mode setting means is set for the first production of this time according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means, from the high expectation execution mode and the low expectation execution mode. It sets the execution mode of the operation,
When the special notification of the low expectation mode is selected, the information on the determination of the grant that is the target of the grant determination is related to the information on the grant determination that is the target of the special notification. The game machine according to Feature N5 or Feature N6, wherein an execution mode that is the high expectation execution mode is easily set as an execution mode of the first performance operation.

  According to the above configuration, when the special notification of the low expectation mode is selected by the selection unit, the grant that is the subject of the grant determination before the predetermined grant determination information that is the subject of the special alert The first effect operation of the high expectation execution mode is easily performed in the first effect on the determination information. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of loss and to further enhance the surprising effect that is the result of granting by giving the player a sense of loss when the first effect according to the high expectation execution mode is obtained.

  Feature N8. Even if the result of the process specified by the result specifying unit is the assignment correspondence result, and the result of the process specified by the period specifying unit is shorter than a predetermined period, When the specific condition is satisfied, the limiting means for restricting selection of the special notification in the low expectation mode (the processing of steps S4902, S4903 and steps S5610 to S5613 by the main control device 81 is executed. (8) The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N7.

  Even if the predetermined grant determination information corresponds to the grant correspondence result and the operation period of the first effect is short, there may be a problem if special notification of the low expectation mode is performed. For example, in the case where the grant correspondence results occur continuously, when the consecutive grant correspondence results shift to a disadvantageous state for the player in the subsequent grant correspondence results (for example, the lottery mode is the high probability mode) To the low probability mode). Therefore, if it is notified in advance that such a situation, for example, in the configuration in which the priority order of the grant determination is different depending on the type of the acquired grant determination information, the priority-side grant determination information is changed. It is possible to take measures such as acquiring as much as possible so as not to shift to the above disadvantageous state. Therefore, when the specific condition is satisfied as in the above configuration, if the configuration restricting the selection of the special notification in the low expectation mode is generated, the above disadvantages for the player are generated. Can be avoided.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... Upper operation port, 34 ... Lower operation port, 41 ... Symbol display device, 54 ... Launch handle, 63 ... Display light emission part, 75 ... Operation part, 81 ... Main control device, 82 ... Production control device .

Claims (8)

Information acquisition means for acquiring information for determination based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Information storage means for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Determination means for determining whether or not to give a first privilege to a player for the determination information stored in the information storage means;
Based on the determination by the determination means, the first effect is started by a predetermined notification means, and the first effect is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. A first setting means capable of setting a period during which the first effect is performed;
First effect executing means for performing the first effect over a period set by the first setting means;
First privilege granting means for granting the first privilege based on determination by the determination means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A destination determination unit that performs determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit before the predetermined determination information is determined by the determination unit;
A second setting unit capable of setting a period of the first effect based on a result of the determination by the destination determination unit;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:   The second setting unit is configured to determine the destination of the first effect relating to the determination information to be determined before the predetermined determination information to be determined by the destination determination unit. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine can be set based on a determination result by the determination means. As the period in which the first effect is performed, a long period and a short period are set so as to be relatively long and short,
The second setting means tends to make the period of the first effect related to the determination information to be determined prior to the determination information to be determined by the destination determination means to be the long period. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a long-term setting unit that can be set to be.   The second setting means includes a short period setting means capable of setting the period of the first effect related to the information for determination, which is the object of determination by the destination determination means, so that the short period is likely to be the short period. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is provided.   The long-term setting means sets the period of the first effect relating to the determination information to be the determination target immediately before the determination information to be determined by the destination determination means to the long-term setting means. The game machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the game machine is set so as to be easy to become. The special notification corresponding to the determination result by the destination determination means indicates that the predetermined notification at a timing earlier than the predetermined determination information that has been determined by the destination determination means becomes the determination target by the determination means. Means or a special notification execution means that is executed by a separate notification means,
As a notification mode of the special notification by the special notification execution means, a result corresponding to the result of the determination when the predetermined determination information is a target of determination by the determination means gives the first privilege. The high expectation aspect and the low expectation aspect that the expectation degree to be relatively high and low are set,
The special notification execution unit includes a first selection unit that easily selects the notification mode of the low expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification for the determination information that is a target of determination by the destination determination unit. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is one of the following.   The special notification execution unit is configured to provide the high expectation as a notification mode of the special notification about the determination information to be the determination target immediately before the determination information to be determined by the destination determination unit. The gaming machine according to claim 6, further comprising second selection means for easily selecting a notification mode of the degree mode. The determination unit prioritizes the determination for one determination information acquired by the information acquisition unit over the determination for other determination information acquired before the one determination information. Provided with priority means,
2. The period of the first effect relating to the determination information prioritized by the priority means can be set based on the other previously acquired determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 7.

Images